CAT.ES20-172 C
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
New
ø6, ø10, ø50, and ø63 have been added.
Upgraded version of space saving
magnetically coupled rodless cylinder
Basic type
Direct mount type
Series CY3B/CY3R
Magnetically
Coupled
Rodless
Cylinder
Basic type
Direct mount type
Series CY3B/CY3R
Improved durability
Improved bearing performance
Improved lubrication by using a lubretainer
A 70% longer wear ring length
achieving an improvement in bearing performance compared to the
CY1B.
A special resin lubretainer is installed on the
dust seal to achieve ideal lubrication on the
external surface of the cylinder tube.
Direct mount type Series
Basic type Series
CY3R
CY3B
Mounting dimensions are identical to those of series CY1.
The mounting dimensions (in the drawing below) are identical with
those of existing series CY1B/CY1R, allowing easy replacement.
Series CY3B
(∗ For bore size of ø6, the mounting is not interchangeable with the
CY1 series because the piping port has been reduced to a M3 size.)
Series CY3B6
Piping port M3
3 mm
NN
<CY3B6> Piping port M5
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
<CY1B6>
Series CY3R
6 mm
Series CY3R6
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
QW
<CY3R6>
Piping port M3
<CY1R6>
Features 1
Piping port M5
Note) When ordering a product that is interchangeable with a
CY16, add the suffix, X1468 to the end of the CY36
model number (Refer to page 27).
Upgraded version of space saving
magnetically rodless cylinder!
Wear ring A
Lubretainer
(special resin)
Reduction of
sliding resistance
Minimum operating pressure reduced by 30%
Wear ring B
By using a lubretainer, the
minimum operating pressure is reduced by 30%.
(CY3B40 compared with CY1B40)
Series CY3B
Small auto switches are mountable.
Small auto switches can be mounted on the currrent auto switch mounting groove of the CY3R20
to 63. They can also be mounted to all of the cylinder sizes in the CY3R series, making inventory
control of the product easy.
ø6, ø10, ø50, and ø63
Series is completed by adding
the new bore sizes. (ø6 to ø63)
Switch rail
Watchmaker’s
(precision) screwdriver
Mounting screw
M2.5 x 0.45 x 4 l
Switch mounting
bracket
Auto switch
Lightweight
The body weight has been reduced by approximately 10% by eliminating unnecessary body weight and by reducing the outer diameter of
the cylinder tube. (Compared with previous ø50 and ø60 models)
Series Variations
Series
Bore
size
ø10
ø15
ø20
ø25
ø32
ø40
ø50
ø63
ø6
ø10
ø15
ø20
CY3R
50
150
100
ø6
CY3B
Standard stroke (mm)
ø25
ø32
ø40
ø50
ø63
250
200
350
300
450
400
600
500
Individual made-to-order products
800
700
1000
900
Note) The mark indicates the available combination of
bore size and standard stroke.
Heat resistant specifications
(XB6)
Low speed specifications (15 to 50 mm/s)
(XB9)
Long stroke
(XB11)
Low speed specifications (7 to 50 mm/s)
(XB13)
Hydro specifications
(X116)
Axial ports
(X132)
High speed specifications
(X160)
Helical insert thread specifications
(X168)
Added mounting tap positions for slider
(X206)
Oil-free exterior specifications
(X210)
Outside of cylinder tube with hard chrome plating
(X322)
Oil-free exterior specifications (with dust seal)
Interchangeable specification with CY16
(X324)
(X1468)
With magnetic shielding plate
(XC24)
With floating joint
(XC57)
Availability of made to order products varies with the series
and the bore size. For more information, please refer page 24.
Features 2
Series CY3B/CY3R
Model Selection Criteria
Recommended cylinder
Model selection points
Appearance
Features
CY3B
Series
Size/ø6, ø10, ø15, ø20, ø25, ø32,
ø40, ø50, ø63
When
used with many
different types of guides.
When a long stroke is
necessary.
When
used with many
different types of guides.
When auto switches are
added to the basic type.
When used without a guide
for a light load. (See
application example.)
When space is very limited.
Types with guide
• A long stroke is possible.
CY3R
Series
Size/ø6, ø10, ø15, ø20, ø25, ø32,
ø40, ø50, ø63
Application example
Transferring
Cutting
1
• Cylinder can be directly mounted.
• Auto switches can be mounted, and
there is no lurching from cylinder.
• Non-rotation mechanism is available
within the allowable range.
• Piping can be concentrated with the
centralized piping type.
• External dimensions are compact.
• Mounting can be performed on the top
body surface or on one of the side
surfaces.
Series CY3B/CY3R
Model Selection
E: Kinetic energy of load (J)
(W + WB)
V 2
E=
x
2
1000
Es: Allowable kinetic energy for intermediate stop using
an air pressure circuit (J)
Fn: Allowable driving force (N)
MD: Maximum allowable moment (N⋅m) when a connection
bracket, etc. is carried directly
Ps: Operating pressure limit for intermediate stop using
an external stopper, etc. (MPa)
Pv: Maximum operating pressure for vertical operation (MPa)
WBmax: Maximum load weight (kg) when loaded directly
on the body
Wv: Allowable load weight for vertical operation (kg)
(
)
Operating Conditions
• W:
• WB:
• µ:
• Lo:
Load weight (kg)
• Switches
Connection bracket weight (kg)
• P: Operating pressure (MPa)
• V: Speed (mm/s)
Guide's coefficient of friction
• Stroke (mm)
Distance from cylinder
• Mode of operation
shaft center to workpiece point
(horizontal, inclined, vertical)
of application (cm)
• L1: Distance from cylinder shaft center to connection fitting, etc.
Mode of
operation
Note 1)
Inclined operation
Horizontal operation
Vertical operation
Review of load weight
and operating pressure
W
Lo
Guide
First tentative bore size
determination
F1
øD ≥ 1.6 x
P
WB
First tentative bore size
determination
F2
øD ≥ 1.6 x
P
First tentative bore size
determination
F3
øD ≥ 1.6 x
P
θ˚ θ˚
Inclined operation
W + WB ≤ WV
W + WB > WV
Determination
P ≤ PV
P > PV
Allowable Driving Force Table (Fn) (n=1,2,3)
Inclined
F1 = µ x (W + WB) x 9.8
F2 = (W + WB) x 9.8 x (µCOSθ + SINθ)
Vertical
F3 = (W + WB) x 9.8 x (µ + 1)
Horizontal
of allowable load
weight &
pressure
(Refer to page 5 for
(Refer to page 5 for the maximum
Refer to the allowable driving force table for the (Fn) of data K
A.
vertical operation.)
load weight when loaded directly
on the body and connection bracket.)
WB > WBmax
Determination of
connection bracket
weight (WB)
Review of connection bracket
CY3B
WB ≤ WBmax
CY3R
Review of switch use and stroke
Equipped with
switch rail?
(Refer to data
K
A on pages 3
and 4.)
Yes
Equipped with
switches?
No
No
Second tentative determination
of bore size using the graph of
allowable driving force (Fn)
and distance from cylinder
shaft center (Lo)
Yes
Yes
NG
(Refer to
standard
stroke table
on page 12.)
Determination
of stroke with
switch
OK
Equipped
with external guide
system?
No
Yes
Stop with external stopper
Intermediate
stopping method
Note 1)
Intermediate
stop?
Note 3)
WB x L1 > MD
No
Stop with air pressure circuit
WB x L1 ≤ MD
Refer to page 6 for
intermediate stops.)
E=
Determination of
pressure (P) when making
intermediate stop
( )
(W + WB)
V
x
2
1000
P ≤ Ps
(Refer to page 6 for
intermediate stops.)
P > Ps
Determination of
load’s kinetic
energy (E)
E ≤ Es
Bore size
determination
Note 3)
NG
2
E > Es
(Refer to page 6 for body
non-rotating accuracy and
Determination maximum allowable moment.)
of allowable
stroke
Note 2)
Review of order made
products based on
operating conditions
(Refer to pages
24 through 29.)
Review of larger bore size
Review of larger bore size
(Refer to page 6 for body
non-rotating accuracy and
maximum allowable moment.)
Determination
of rotating
moment
Model determination
OK
Note 1) This cylinder cannot perform an intermediate stop
using an air pressure circuit in vertical operation.
In this case, an intermediate stop can be
performed only by using an external stopper, etc.
Note 2) Depending on the operating environment, etc.,
order made products should also be reviewed.
Note 3) An external guide system should be installed
when over specifications.
2
Series CY3B/CY3R
Model Selection
Precautions on Design 1
Selection Procedure
Selection procedure
<Data K
A : Distance from cylinder shaft center
Usable range
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Distance from cylinder shaft center Lo (cm)
Lo
Fn
Selection example
Given a load drive resisting force of Fn = 100
(N) and a distance from the cylinder shaft center to the load application point of Lo = 8 cm,
find the intersection point by extending upward
from the horizontal axis of data K
A where the
distance from the shaft center is 8 cm, and
then extending to the side, find the allowable
driving force on the vertical axis.
Models suitable in satisfying the requirement
of 100 (N) are CY332 or CY340.
Allowable driving force Fn (N)
CY3B10
10
Usable range
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Distance from cylinder shaft center Lo (cm)
CY3B15
10
Usable range
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11
Distance from cylinder shaft center Lo (cm)
Allowable driving force Fn (N)
200
100
50
10
5
Usable range
1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Distance from cylinder shaft center Lo (cm)
Allowable driving force Fn (N)
CY3B25
3
500
300
200
100
50
40
30
20
10
Usable range
1
0 1
50
40
30
20
Usable range
10
5
1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Distance from cylinder shaft center Lo (cm)
500
300
200
100
50
40
30
20
Usable range
10
5
1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Distance from cylinder shaft center Lo (cm)
1000
500
300
200
100
Usable range
50
40
30
20
10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Distance from cylinder shaft center Lo (cm)
CY3B63
CY3B20
5
100
CY3B50
50
40
30
20
5
400
300
200
CY3B40
50
40
30
20
5
Allowable driving force Fn (N)
5
Allowable driving force Fn (N)
Load
Allowable driving force Fn (N)
Workpiece
10
Allowable driving force Fn (N)
3. Select the bore size from Lo and Fn,
based on data K
A.
40
30
20
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Distance from cylinder shaft center Lo (cm)
Allowable driving force Fn (N)
2. Find the distance Lo (cm) from the point of
the load where driving force is applied, to
the center of the cylinder shaft.
Allowable driving capacity>
CY3B32
CY3B6
Allowable driving force Fn (N)
1. Find the drive resisting force Fn (N) when
moving the load horizontally.
1000
500
400
300
200
100
50
40
30
20
Usable range
10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Distance from cylinder shaft center Lo (cm)
Model Selection
Series CY3B/CY3R
Precautions on Design 1
<Data K
A : Distance from cylinder shaft center
CY3R32
Allowable driving force Fn (N)
Allowable driving force Fn (N)
CY3R6
40
30
20
H
10
5
Usable range
1
0
Allowable driving capacity>
1
2
3
4
5
6
400
300
200
100
50
40
30
20
10
5
1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Distance from cylinder shaft center Lo (cm)
10
Usable range
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Distance from cylinder shaft center Lo (cm)
Allowable driving force Fn (N)
CY3R15
50
40
30
20
10
Usable range
5
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11
Distance from cylinder shaft center Lo (cm)
CY3R20
Allowable driving force Fn (N)
500
300
200
100
50
40
30
20
Usable range
10
5
1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Distance from cylinder shaft center Lo (cm)
CY3R50
H
Allowable driving force Fn (N)
0
Allowable driving force Fn (N)
CY3R40
50
40
30
20
5
Distance from cylinder shaft center Lo (cm)
1000
500
300
200
100
Usable range
50
40
30
20
10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Distance from cylinder shaft center Lo (cm)
CY3R63
200
100
50
30
10
5
Usable range
1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Distance from cylinder shaft center Lo (cm)
Allowable driving force Fn (N)
Allowable driving force Fn (N)
CY3R10
Usable range
1000
500
400
300
200
100
50
40
30
20
Usable range
10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Distance from cylinder shaft center Lo (cm)
Allowable driving force Fn (N)
CY3R25
500
300
200
100
50
40
30
20
10
Usable range
5
1
0 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Distance from cylinder shaft center Lo (cm)
4
Series CY3B/CY3R
Model Selection
Precautions on Design 2
Maximum Weight of Connection
Bracket to the Body
Cylinder Dead Weight Deflection
When the cylinder is mounted horizontally, deflection appears due to its own weight as
shown in the data, and the longer the stroke is,
the greater the amount of variation in the shaft
center. Therefore, a connection method should
be considered which can assimilate this deflection.
Load platform
Guide shaft
Series CY3 is guided by an external axis (such
as a linear guide) without directly mounting the
load. When designing a metal bracket to connect the load, make sure that its weight will not
exceed the value in the table below. Basically,
guide the CY3R direct mounting type also with
an external axis. (For connection methods, refer to the Instruction Manual.)
CY3B
CY3R
Max. Connection Bracket Weight
C
Model
(Note)
CY3B50,63
CY3B25,32,40
Clearance (Note)
(0.2 to 0.5 mm)
CY3B20
CY3B15
CY3B10
CY36
Note 1) According to the dead weight deflection
in the figure on the right, provide
clearance so that the cylinder does not
touch the mounting surface or the load,
etc., and is able to operate smoothly
within the minimum operating pressure
range for a full stroke. For more
information, refer to instruction manual.
Note 2) In case of the CY3R, install a shim,
etc. to eliminate clearance between
the body and the switch rail. For more
information, refer to the CY3R instruction manual.
Note 3) The amount of deflection differs from
the CY1B/CY1R. Adjust the clearance
value by referring to the dead weight
deflection as shown in the table on the
right.
Deflection (mm)
The above clearance amount is a reference
value.
28
27
CY315
26
25
24
23
CY310
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9 CY36
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1000
2000
Max. connection bracket weight (WBmax) (kg)
CY36
0.2
CY310
0.4
CY315
1.0
CY320
1.1
CY325
1.2
CY332
1.5
CY340
2.0
CY350
2.5
CY363
3.0
Consult with SMC in case a bracket with weight
exceeding the above value is to be mounted.
<CY3R>
Maximum Load Weight when
Loaded Directly on Body
CY363
CY350
CY340
When the load is applied directly to the body, it
should be no greater than the maximum values shown in the table below.
CY332
3000
4000
CY325
Model
CY320
CY3R6
CY3R10
CY3R15
CY3R20
CY3R25
CY3R32
CY3R40
CY3R50
CY3R63
5000
6000
Stroke (mm)
∗ The above deflection data represent values at the
time when the external sliding part moves to the
middle of the stroke.
Vertical Operation
Max. load weight (WBmax) (kg)
0.2
0.4
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
Loading direction
The load should be guided by a ball type bearing (LM guide, etc.). If a slide bearing is used, sliding
resistance increases due to the load weight and load moment, which can cause malfunction.
Load weight
(Slider bracket weight
+ Workpiece weight)
Workpiece
W
Rodless cylinder
5
Bore size
(mm)
Model
6
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
63
CY36
CY310
CY315
CY320
CY325
CY332
CY340
CY350
CY363
Allowable load Max. operating
weight (Wv) pressure (Pv)
(MPa)
(kg)
0.55
1.0
0.55
2.7
0.65
7.0
0.65
11.0
0.65
18.5
0.65
30.0
0.65
47.0
0.65
75.0
0.65
115.0
∗ Use caution, as there is a danger of
breaking the magnetic coupling if operated
above the maximum operating pressure.
Loading
direction
Switch
rail
Body
Wear ring
C
Model Selection
Series CY3B/CY3R
Precautions on Design 3
Intermediate Stop
Stroke End Stopping Method
(1) Intermediate stopping of load
with an external stopper, etc.
When stopping a load in mid-stroke using an
external stopper, etc., operate within the operating pressure limits shown in the table below.
Use caution, as operation at a pressure exceeding these limits can result in breaking of
the magnetic coupling.
Bore size
(mm)
Model
When stopping a load having a large inertial force at the stroke end, tilting of the body and damage to
the bearings and cylinder tube may occur. (Refer to the left hand drawing below.)
As shown in the right hand drawing below, a shock absorber should be used together with the stopper, and thrust should also be transmitted from the center of the body so that tilting will not occur.
Load
Shock absorber
Slide block
Load
Guide shaft
Slide block
Guide shaft
Operating pressure limit for
intermediate stop (Ps) (MPa)
6
CY36
0.55
10
CY310
0.55
15
CY315
0.65
20
CY320
0.65
25
CY325
0.65
32
CY332
0.65
40
CY340
0.65
50
CY350
0.65
63
CY363
0.65
Cylinder tube
Body
Cylinder tube
Stopper
Body tilting
Body
Thrust transmission area
Note) The drawing shows the CY3B series.
<CY3R>
(2) Intermediate stopping of load
with an air pressure circuit
Body Non-rotating Accuracy and Maximum
Allowable Moment (with Switch Rail)
When performing an intermediate stop of a
load using an air pressure circuit, operate at or
below the kinetic energy shown in the table below. Use caution, as operation when exceeding the allowable value can result in breaking
Reference values for non-rotating accuracy and maximum allowable moment at stroke end are indicated below.
(Reference values)
Bore size
(mm)
Model
Allowable kinetic energy for
intermediate stop (Es) (J)
Max.
Bore size Non-rotating
allowable
(mm)
accuracy (˚) moment (MD)
(N⋅m)
Note 2)
Allowable
stroke
(mm)
6
7.3
0.02
100
6.0
0.05
100
6
CY36
0.007
10
10
CY310
0.03
15
4.5
0.15
200
15
CY315
0.13
20
3.7
0.20
300
20
CY320
0.24
25
3.7
0.25
300
25
CY325
0.45
32
3.1
0.40
400
32
CY332
0.88
40
2.8
0.62
400
2.4
1.00
500
2.2
1.37
500
40
CY340
1.53
50
50
CY350
3.12
63
63
CY363
5.07
(Reference values)
Non-rotating accuracy
Switch rail
Body
Wear ring C
Note 1) Avoid operations where rotational torque (moment) is applied. In such a case, the use of an
external guide is recommended.
Note 2) The above reference values will be satisfied within the allowable stroke ranges, but caution is
necessary, because as the stroke becomes longer, the inclination (rotation angle) within the
stroke can be expected to increase.
Note 3) When a load is applied directly to the body, the loaded weight should be no greater than the
allowable load weights on page 5.
6
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder:
Basic Type
Series
CY3B
ø6, ø10, ø15, ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63
How to Order
Basic type
CY3B 25
300
Basic type
Bore size
6
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
63
Standard stroke
6 mm
Refer to the standard stroke table shown below.
10 mm
15 mm
Port thread type
20 mm
Symbol
25 mm
32 mm
Nil
40 mm
TN
TF
50 mm
63 mm
Type
M thread
Rc
NPT
G
Bore size
6, 10, 15
20, 25, 32, 40
50, 63
Standard Stroke
Bore size
(mm)
6
Maximum available
stroke (mm)
Standard stroke (mm)
300
50, 100, 150, 200
500
10
15
20
50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300
25
100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600,
700, 800
50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500
1000
1500
3000
32
3000
40
50
100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600,
700, 800, 900, 1000
5000
63
Note 1) Long stroke specification (XB11) applies to the strokes exceeding 2000 mm. (Refer to page 25.)
Note 2) The longer the stroke, the larger the amount of deflection in a cylinder tube. Pay attention to the mounting
bracket and clearance value.
Magnetic Holding Force
7
Bore size (mm)
6
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
63
Holding force (N)
19.6
53.9
137
231
363
588
922
1471
2256
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Series CY3B
Basic Type
Specifications
Fluid
Air
Proof pressure
1.05 MPa
Max. operating pressure
0.7 MPa
Min. operating pressure
Refer to the minimum operating pressure table.
Ambient and fluid temperature
–10 to 60ºC
Piston speed
50 to 500 mm/s
Cushion
Rubber bumper on both ends
Lubrication
JIS Symbol
Non-lube
+1.4
+1.8
0 to 250 st: +1.0
0 , 251 to 1000 st: 0 , 1001 st to: 0
Stroke length tolerance
Made to Order
(Refer to pages 24 for details.)
Horizontal, Inclined, Vertical Note)
Mounting nut (2 pcs.)
Standard equipment (accessory)
Note) When vertically mounting, it is impossible to perform an intermediate stop by means of a
pneumatic circuit.
When calculating the actual thrdesign should consider the
Caution ust,
minimum actuating pressure.
Theoretical Cylinder Thrust
Specifications
Heat resistant specifications
-XB9
Low speed specifications (15 to 50 mm/s)
-XB11
Long stroke
-XB13
Low speed specifications (7 to 50 mm/s)
ø6, ø10
ø15, ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
1200
100
1100
90
0
ø1
0
-XB6
ø4
Symbol
Mounting orientation
1000
900
-X160
High speed specifications
-X168
Helical insert thread specifications
-X206
Added mounting tap positions for slider
-X210
Oil-free exterior specifications
-X322
Outside of cylinder tube with hard chrome plating
300
ø20
-X324
Oil-free exterior specifications (with dust seal)
20
200
ø15
-X1468
Interchangeable specification with CY16
10
100
-XC24
With magnetic shielding plate
-XC57
With floating joint
s
50
40
30
ø6
siz
re
Bo
60
800
700
re
70
ize
600
500
5
ø2
400
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Supply pressure (MPa)
Minimum Operating Pressure
2
ø3
Bo
80
e
Axial ports
Theoretical thrust (N)
Hydro specifications
-X132
Theoretical thrust (N)
-X116
Supply pressure (MPa)
ø50, ø63
0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.15
0.15
0.14
0.12 0.12 0.12
0.1
0.05
re
2500
Bo
0.2
Theoretical thrust (N)
Minimum operating pressure (MPa)
3
si
ø6 ze
3000
0
ø5
2000
1500
1000
500
0
6 10 15 20 25 32 40 50 63
Bore size (mm)
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Supply pressure (MPa)
Note) Values show when the cylinder is driving
without load.
Weight
Main Material
Unit: kg
Description
Head cover
Material
Note
Aluminum alloy Electroless nickel plated
Aluminum alloy
Magnet
Rare earth magnet
Basic weight (at 0 st)
6
10
0.052 0.08
15
20
Hard anodized
Note) For details, refer to the construction
drawings on page 9.
25
32
0.275 0.351 0.672 1.287
Additional weight per 50 mm of stroke 0.004 0.014 0.015 0.02
Cylinder tube Stainless steel
Body
Bore size (mm)
0.023 0.033
40
50
63
2.07
3.2
0.04
0.077 0.096
5.3
Calculation method/Example: CY3B32-500
Basic weight.........................1.287 kg
Additional weight..........0.033 kg/50 st 1.287 + 0.033 x 500 ÷ 50 = 1.617 kg
Cylinder stroke..........................500 st
8
Series CY3B
Construction
Basic type
CY3B6
CY3B10, 15
w !9 !2 !4 !6 t !0 i q o u y !7 r
w !2 !4 !1 !8 !7 !6 !5 !0 i o q u y t
r
∗ The above drawing is ø15. (3 magnets are used in ø10.)
CY3B20 to 40
CY3B50, 63
w
e !3 !2 !4 !1 !8 !6 !5 !7 !0 i q o u t y
w !2 !4 !1 !8 !6 !5 !7 !0 i o u q y t !3
r
r
Component Parts
Material
Aluminum alloy
ø6, ø10 Brass
Head cover
ø15 to ø63 Aluminum alloy
End collar
Aluminum alloy
Cylinder tube
Stainless steel
ø6 to ø15 Brass
Piston
ø20 to ø63 Aluminum alloy
Shaft
Stainless steel
Piston side yoke
Rolled steel
External slider side yoke
Rolled steel
Magnet A
Rare earth magnet
Magnet B
Rare earth magnet
Spacer
Aluminum alloy
Bumper
Urethane rubber
Piston nut
Carbon steel
C type snap ring for hole
Carbon tool steel
Wear ring A
Special resin
Wear ring B
Special resin
Piston seal
NBR
Lubretainer
Special resin
Cylinder tube gasket
NBR
No.
Description
1 Body
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
9
Note
Hard anodized
Electroless Ni plated
ø20 to ø40 only
ø6 to ø15 Electroless Ni plated
ø20 to ø63 Chromated
Zinc chromated
Zinc chromated
Black anodized (ø6: not available)
ø6 to ø15: not available
Nickel plated
ø6: not available
ø6, ø10 only
Replacement Parts: Seal Kit
Contents
Kit no.
Numbers !5, !6, !7, !9 above
CY3B6-PS
Numbers !5, !6, !7, !8, !9 above
CY3B10-PS
CY3B15-PS
CY3B20-PS
CY3B25-PS
Numbers !5, !6, !7, !8 above
CY3B32-PS
CY3B40-PS
CY3B50-PS
CY3B63-PS
∗ Seal kits are sets consisting of numbers 15 through 19. Order using the
kit number corresponding to each bore size.
Bore size (mm)
6
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
63
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Series CY3B
Basic Type
Dimensions
Basic type
CY3B6 to 63
B
4-MM
thread depth J
0
L –0.1 Note 1)
H
G
2-P (Piping port)
E
G
øD
X
(R)
NN
Effective thread
length T
Mounting nut
width across flats C
øI
NA
N
K
W
N
F
S + Stroke
F
ZZ + Stroke
0
Note 1) ø50, ø63: L –0.2
A
B
8-V
Effective thread length Y
H
G
Mounting nut
width across flats C
E
H
B
G
E
øQ
NA
(R)
NN
F
F
NA
N
CC±0.1
CY3B50, 63
CY3B6 to 15
C
8∗
14
14
26
32
32
41
—
—
CC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
32
38
Model
W
X
Y
ZZ
CY3B6
CY3B10
CY3B15
CY3B20
CY3B25
CY3B32
CY3B40
CY3B50
CY3B63
25
30
35
50
50
50
60
60
70
10
16
19
25
30
40
40
60
70
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
16
16
78∗
81
103
132
137
156
182
180
192
D
7.6
12
16.6 ∗
21.6 ∗
26.4 ∗
33.6 ∗
41.6 ∗
52.4 ∗
65.4 ∗
E
4
1.5
2
2∗
2∗
2∗
3∗
8
8
Nil
M3 x 0.5∗
M5 x 0.8
M5 x 0.8
Rc 1/8
Rc 1/8
Rc 1/8
Rc 1/4
Rc 1/4
Rc 1/4
G
F
8∗ 5
5
9
5.5
10
7.5∗
13
7.5∗
13
8∗
16
16 11
2 14
2 14
P (Piping port)
TN∗
—
—
—
NPT 1/8
NPT 1/8
NPT 1/8
NPT 1/4
NPT 1/4
NPT 1/4
H
13.5 ∗
12.5
13
20
20.5
22
29
33
33
I
—
—
—
28
34
40
50
58∗
72∗
TF ∗
—
—
—
G 1/8
G 1/8
G 1/8
G 1/4
G 1/4
G 1/4
Note 2) The astrisk denotes the dimensions which are different from
the CY1B series.
J
4.5
4.5
6
6
8
8
10
12
12
K
L
MM
5 35 M3 x 0.5
4 38 M3 x 0.5
11 57 M4 x 0.7
8 66 M4 x 0.7
10 70 M5 x 0.8
15 80 M6 x 1
16 92 M6 x 1
25 110 M8 x 1.25
26 122 M8 x 1.25
Q
N
NN
S
NA
R
—
9.5 ∗ 10∗ M6 x 1∗
62∗
—
—
11
14 M10 x 1
63
—
—
11
17 M10 x 1
83
—
—
18∗
24 M20 x 1.5
12 ∗ 106
—
18.5 ∗ 30 M26 x 1.5
15 ∗ 111
∗
—
20
36 M26 x 1.5
18 ∗ 124
—
26∗
46 M32 x 2
23 ∗ 150
– 0.007
25
55
—
30 – 0.037 27.5∗ 176
– 0.007
25
69
—
32 – 0.043 34.5∗ 188
(mm)
V
T
6.5
—
7.5
—
8
—
10
—
10
—
13
—
13
—
— M8 x 1.25
— M10 x 1.5
Mounting Nut/Included in the package (2 pcs).
d
C
CY3B6
CY3B10
CY3B15
CY3B20
CY3B25
CY3B32
CY3B40
CY3B50
CY3B63
A B
4 17
4 25
4 35
8 36
8 46
8 60
10 70
— 86
— 100
b
Model
N
øI
H
B
Part no.
Applicable bore size (mm)
d
H
B
C
SNJ-006B
SNJ-016B
SN-020B
SN-032B
SN-040B
6
10, 15
20
25, 32
40
M6 x 1.0
M10 x 1.0
M20 x 1.5
M26 x 1.5
M32 x 2.0
4
4
8
8
10
8
14
26
32
41
9.2
16.2
30
37
47.3
10
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder:
Direct Mount Type
Series
CY3R
ø6, ø10, ø15, ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63
How to Order
CY3R
25
300
M9B
Number of auto switches
Direct mount type
Nil
2 pcs.
Piping type
S
1 ps,
Nil
Both sides piping type
n
“n” pcs.
G
Centralized piping type
Auto switch type
Note 1) Type G (centralized piping)
is not available for ø6.
Nil
Bore size
6
6 mm
10 10 mm
15 15 mm
Switch rail
20 20 mm
Port thread type
25 25 mm
32 32 mm
40 40 mm
50 50 mm
63 63 mm
Without auto switch
Note 1) In case of ø20 with switch rail but without switch,
the cylinder construction is for reed switch.
∗ Refer to the table below for auto switch model numbers.
∗ The auto switch is shipped together, but not assembled.
Symbol
Nil
TN
TF
Bore size
6, 10, 15
Type
M thread
Rc
NPT
G
Nil
With switch rail
N
Without switch rail
Note 1) A type with switch rail has built-in switch magnets.
Note 2) ø15 has built-in switch magnets even without switch rail.
20, 25, 32, 40
Standard stroke
50, 63
Refer to page 12 for standard stroke.
Solid state switch Reed switch
Type
Special
function
Electrical
entry
—
Grommet
Indicator
light
Applicable Auto Switches / The applicable auto switch is determined by the bore size. Refer to pages 21 to 23 for further information on auto switches.
No
Yes
Load voltage
Wiring
(output)
2-wire
DC
24 V
3-wire
(NPN equiv.)
–
3-wire (NPN)
Grommet Yes
Diagnostic
indication
(2-color display)
2-wire
3-wire (NPN)
5 V, 12 V 100 V or less
12 V
100 V
5V
–
24 V
3-wire (PNP)
2-wire
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m......... Nil (Example) M9N
3 m............ L (Example) M9NL
5 m............ Z (Example) M9NZ
12 V
5 V, 12 V
12 V
A90
A93
A96
M9N
5 V, 12 V
3-wire (PNP)
—
AC
Auto
switch
model
M9P
–
M9B
F9NW
F9PW
F9BW
Lead wire length (m)∗
0.5
(Nil)
3
(L)
5
(Z)
Pre-wired
connector
Applicable load
–
–
IC circuit
–
–
–
Relay,
PLC
–
–
IC circuit
–
IC circuit
–
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
–
∗∗ Solid state switches marked “” are produced upon receipt of order.
• For ø25, 32, 40, 50, and 63, other than the applicable auto switches listed in “How to Order”, the other auto switches can be mounted. For detailed
specifications, refer to page 18.
• With pre-wired connector is also available in solid state auto switches. For specifications, refer to “SMC Best Pneumatics” catalog vol. 8, page 8-30-52.
11
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Series CY3R
Direct Mount Type
Specifications
Fluid
Air
Proof pressure
1.05 MPa
Max. operating pressure
0.7 MPa
Min. operating pressure
Refer to the minimum operating pressure table.
Ambient and fluid temperature
–10 to 60ºC
Piston speed
50 to 500 mm/s
Cushion
Rubber bumper on both ends
Lubrication
Non-lube
+1.4
+1.8
0 to 250 st: +1.0
0 , 251 to 1000 st: 0 , 1001 st to: 0
Stroke length tolerance
Mounting
Direct mount type
Horizontal, Inclined, Vertical Note 2)
Mounting orientation
Note 1) When an auto switch is installed at an intermediate position of a type with auto switch, keep the maximum
piston speed at 300 mm/s or below to ensure operation of relays or other devices.
Note 2) When vertically mounting, it is impossible to perform an intermediate stop by means of a pneumatic circuit.
Made to Order
Standard Stroke
(Refer to page 24 for details.)
Symbol
Specifications
Bore size
(mm)
-X116
Hydro specifications
-X160
High speed specifications
-X322
Outside of cylinder tube with hard chrome plating
-X1468
Interchangeable specification with CY16
-XC57
50, 100, 150, 200
300
300
10
50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300
500
500
15
50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400,
450, 500
1000
750
6
With floating joint
Minimum Operating Pressure
20
0.2
100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450,
500, 600, 700, 800
1500
100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450,
500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000
2000
1000
1200
32
0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.15
0.15
40
0.14
0.12 0.12 0.12
50
0.1
1500
63
Note) The longer the stroke, the larger the amount of deflection in a cylinder tube. Pay attention to the
mounting bracket and clearance value.
0.05
0
Magnetic Holding Force
6 10 15 20 25 32 40 50 63
Bore size (mm)
Note) Values show when the cylinder is operating
without a load.
Bore size (mm)
6
10
15
20
25
32
40
Holding force (N)
19.6
53.9
137
231
363
588
922
Theoretical Cylinder Thrust
e
re
Bo
siz
0
ø1
ø6
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Supply pressure (MPa)
1200
1100
1000
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
50
63
1471 2256
When calculating the actual thrust, design should
consider the minimum actuating pressure.
ø15, ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
Theoretical thrust (holding force) (N)
ø6, ø10
Caution
ø50, ø63
Theoretical thrust (holding force) (N)
Minimum operating pressure
(MPa)
25
Theoretical thrust (holding force) (N)
Max. stroke
Max. stroke
without switch (mm) with switch (mm)
Standard stroke (mm)
0
ø4
2
ø3
ø25
ø20
ø15
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Supply pressure (MPa)
3000
3
ø6
2500
0
ø5
2000
1500
1000
500
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Supply pressure (MPa)
Weight
Unit: kg
6
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
63
With switch rail
0.086
0.111
0.272
0.421
0.622
1.217
1.98
3.54
5.38
Without switch rail
0.069
0.08
0.225
0.351
0.542
1.097
1.82
3.25
5.03
With switch rail
0.016
0.034
0.040
0.051
0.056
0.076
0.093
0.159
0.188
Without switch rail
0.004
0.014
0.015
0.020
0.023
0.033
0.040
0.077
0.096
Bore size (mm)
Basic weight (at 0 st)
Additional weight per 50 mm
of stroke
Calculation method/Example: CY3R25-500 (with switch rail)
0.622 + 0.056 x 500 ÷ 50 = 1.182 (kg)
Basic weight....0.622 (kg), Additional weight....0.056 (kg/50 st), Cylinder stroke....500 (st)
12
Series CY3R
Construction
Both sides piping type
CY3R6
@1 @3 !5 !6 @4 @6 !0 i q !4 !2
2a
!9
@2
@3 @7 o
r
3a
u y t @8 !8
CY3R10
2a
!9 @2
CY3R15 to 63
@0 @3 @7
2a
!9
@0 !5 !6 @4 @9 @6 !0 i q !1 !4 !2
!8 @2
@8 @5 o u y t
r
3a
!8
@0 !5 !6 !3 @4 @9 @6 !0 i q !1 !4 !2 y r
@0 @3 @5
t
3a
@8 o u !7 @7
CY3R15, 20
CY3R15
Component Parts
No.
1
2a
2b
3a
3b
4
Description
Body
End cover A
End cover C
End cover B
End cover D
Cylinder tube
Material
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
ø6 to ø15 Brass
ø20 to ø63 Aluminum alloy
5
Piston
6
7
8
9
10
Shaft
Piston side yoke
External slider side yoke
Magnet A
Magnet B
11
Spacer
Aluminum alloy
12
Bumper
Urethane rubber
13
Piston nut
14
15
16
C type snap ring for hole
Attachment ring
C type snap ring for shaft
Carbon tool steel
Aluminum alloy
Hard steel wire
17
Magnetic shielding plate
Rolled steel plate
18
19
20
Switch rail
Aluminum alloy
Magnet
Rare earth magnet
Hexagon socket head plug Chromium steel
Stainless steel
Rolled steel plate
Rolled steel plate
Rare earth magnet
Rare earth magnet
Carbon steel
Note
Hard anodized
Electroless nickel plated
Electroless nickel plated
Electroless nickel plated
Electroless nickel plated
ø6 to ø15 Electroless nickel plated
ø20 to ø63 Chromate
Zinc chromated
Zinc chromated
Black anodized
(ø6: not available)
Zinc chromate
(ø6 to ø15: not available)
Nickel plated
Chromate
Chromated
(ø6, ø10: not available)
White anodized
Nickel plated
23
Note
ø40
Hexagon socket head plug
Steel balls
Chromium steel
ø20, ø50, ø63 None
Nickel plated
Hexagon socket head screw Chromium steel
Hexagon socket
Nickel plated
Chromium steel
head set screw
24∗
25∗
26∗
27∗
28∗
29∗
30∗
Cylinder tube Gasket
Wear ring A
Wear ring B
Wear ring C
Piston seal
Lubretainer
Switch rail gasket
No.
21
22
Description
Material
NBR
Special resin
Special resin
Special resin
NBR
Special resin
NBR
Both sides piping type: None
∗ Seal kits are sets consisting of numbers 24 through 30. Order using the
kit number corresponding to each bore size.
Replacement Parts: Seal Kit
Bore size (mm)
6
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
63
Kit no.
CY3R6-PS
CY3R10-PS
CY3R15-PS
CY3R20-PS
CY3R25-PS
CY3R32-PS
CY3R40-PS
CY3R50-PS
CY3R63-PS
Contents
Numbers @4, @6, @7, @8 above
Numbers
@4, @5, @6, @7, @8, @9, #0
above
∗ Seal kits are the same for both the both sides piping type and the
centralized piping type.
13
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Series CY3R
Direct Mount Type
Construction
Centralized piping type
CY3RG10
2b
!9
@2
!5 !6 @4 @9 @6 !0 i q !1 !4 !2
@3
2b
@8 @7 @5
o u y t
r
3b
!8
#0
!5 !6 !3 @4 @9 @6 !0 i q !1 !4 !2 y
r
@0
3b
CY3RG15 to 63
!9
!8 @2 @0 #0 @3 @5
t
@8 o u !7
@7
CY3RG15
CY3RG15, 20
!9
!8
@2 @1
CY3RG15
Switch Rail Accessory
Switch Rail Accessory Kit
CYR 15 E
Bore size (mm)
Stroke
Bore size
20
6
10
Kit no.
CYR6E--N
CYR10E-
15
CYR15E-
CYR20E-
For reed switch
For solid state switch CYR20EN-
25
CYR25E-
32
40
50
63
CYR32E-
CYR40E-
Contents
Numbers !8, !9, @2, @7 on the left
Numbers !8, !9, @0, @2, @7 on the left
Note 2)
Numbers !7, !8, @0, @2, @7 on the left
Numbers !7, !8, !9, @0, @2, @7
on the left
CYR50E-
CYR63E-
Note 1) indicates the stroke.
Note 2) A magnet is already built in for ø15.
14
Series CY3R
Dimensions
Both sides piping type: ø6 to ø63
N
X
HC
HT
HB
Note) This figure shows types with switch rail (Nil).
A
2-plug
H
HA
CB
K
2-P (Piping port)
T
HP
4-counter bore dia. øB
Counter bore depth C
Y
0
L -0.1 Note 1)
CY3R6
HS
HR
CR
Plug
W
K
G
2 x 4-MM
Thread depth M
Q + Stroke
Z + Stroke
PW
QW
X
WS
4-6.5
4-øLD
GW
GP
WP
F
4-3.2
WP
T
TC
4-J x E
øD
2-P (Piping port)
W
Switch rail
G
CY3R25 to 63
0
Note 1) ø50, ø63: L –0.2
CY3R10 to 20
B
—∗
CY3R6
6.5
CY3R10 9
CY3R15 10.5 8
9.5
CY3R20 9
CY3R25 8.5 9.5
CY3R32 10.5 11
11
CY3R40 10
14
CY3R50 14
14
CY3R63 15
Model
Model
CY3R6
CY3R10
CY3R15
CY3R20
CY3R25
CY3R32
CY3R40
CY3R50
CY3R63
Model
CY3R6
CY3R10
CY3R15
CY3R20
CY3R25
CY3R32
CY3R40
CY3R50
CY3R63
A
7∗
L
34
38
53
62
70
76
90
110
118
LD
3.5
3.5
4.3
5.4
5.4
7
7
8.6
8.6
C
—∗
3.2
4.2
5.2
5.2
6.5
6.5
8.2
8.2
M
3.5
4
5
5
6
7
8
10
10
CB
2
2
2
3
3
3
5
5
5
CR
0.5
0.5
0.5
1
1
1.5
2
2
3
D
7.6
12
16.6 ∗
21.6 ∗
26.4 ∗
33.6 ∗
41.6 ∗
52.4 ∗
65.4 ∗
MM
M3 x 0.5
M3 x 0.5
M4 x 0.7
M4 x 0.7
M5 x 0.8
M6 x 1
M6 x 1
M8 x 1.25
M8 x 1.25
P (Piping port)
Nil
TN ∗
M3 x 0.5 ∗
—
M5 x 0.8
—
M5 x 0.8
—
Rc 1/8
NPT 1/8
Rc 1/8
NPT 1/8
Rc 1/8
NPT 1/8
Rc 1/4
NPT 1/4
Rc 1/4
NPT 1/4
Rc 1/4
NPT 1/4
N
3.5
4.5
6
7
6.5
8.5
11
15
16
F
5.5
6.5
8
9
8.5
10.5
13
17
18
PW
19
26
32
38
43
54
64
82
94
G
3∗
4
5
6
6
7
7
8.5
8.5
GP
20
27
33
39
44
55
65
83
95
Q
60 ∗
68
84
95
105
116
134
159
171
GW
18.5
25.5
31.5
37.5
42.5
53.5
63.5
81.5
93.5
QW
10
14
18
17
20
26
34
48
60
H
19
26
32
39
44
55
67
85
97
T
14.5 ∗
17.5
19
20.5
21.5
24
26
30
32
HA
17
24
30
36
41
52
62
80
92
TC
10.5
14
17
20
22.5
28
33
42
48
TF ∗
—
—
—
G 1/8
G 1/8
G 1/8
G 1/4
G 1/4
G 1/4
Note 2) The astrisk denotes the dimensions which are different from the CY1R series.
15
HB
10.5
14
17
21
23.5
29
36
45
51
W
20
20
25
40
40
50
60
60
70
HC
18
25
31
38
43
54
66
84
96
WP
9.5
13
16
19
21.5
27
32
41
47
HP
10.5 ∗
14
17
24
23.5
29
36
45
51
WS
6
8
7
7
7
7
7
10
10
HR
17
24
30
36
41
51
62
80
90
X
10
15
18
22
28
35
40
50
60
HS
6
5
8.5
7.5
6.5
7
8
9
9.5
HT
10.5∗
14
17
24
23.5
29
36
45
51
Y
35.5
39.5
54.5
64
72
79
93
113
121
Z
66 ∗
76
94
107
117
130
148
176
188
JxE
M4 x 0.7 x 6
M4 x 0.7 x 6
M5 x 0.8 x 7
M6 x 1 x 8
M6 x 1 x 8
M8 x 1.25 x 10
M8 x 1.25 x 10
M10 x 1.5 x 15
M10 x 1.5 x 15
(mm)
K
7
9
14
11
15
13
15
25
24
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Direct Mount Type
Series CY3R
Dimensions
N
X
HC
HB
Centralized piping type: ø10 to ø63
W
CB
CR
2-P
WS
HS
HR
Plug
W
K
G
(Piping port)
2 x 4-MM
Thread depth M
Q + Stroke
Z + Stroke
CY3RG25, 32, 40
CY3RG10
QW
PW
øD
4-øLD
CY3RG15
T
F
WP
12.5
19.5
13
30
Plug
12.5
4-counter bore dia. øB
Counter bore depth C
Y
0 Note 1)
L -0.1
TC
(Piping port)
T
X
8
14
2-P
GW
GP
22
2-P (Piping port)
H
HA
HT
HP
4-J x E
K
Switch rail
G
0
Note 1) ø50, ø63: L –0.2
CY3RG20
Model
CY3RG10
CY3RG15
CY3RG20
CY3RG25
CY3RG32
CY3RG40
CY3RG50
CY3RG63
Model
CY3RG10
CY3RG15
CY3RG20
CY3RG25
CY3RG32
CY3RG40
CY3RG50
CY3RG63
Model
CY3RG10
CY3RG15
CY3RG20
CY3RG25
CY3RG32
CY3RG40
CY3RG50
CY3RG63
B
6.5
8
9.5
9.5
11
11
14
14
C
3.2
4.2
5.2
5.2
6.5
6.5
8.2
8.2
CB
2
2
3
3
3
5
5
5
LD
3.5
4.3
5.4
5.4
7
7
8.6
8.6
M
4
5
5
6
7
8
10
10
MM
M3 x 0.5
M4 x 0.7
M4 x 0.7
M5 x 0.8
M6 x 1
M6 x 1
M8 x 1.25
M8 x 1.25
Nil
M5 x 0.8
M5 x 0.8
Rc 1/8
Rc 1/8
Rc 1/8
Rc 1/4
Rc 1/4
Rc 1/4
CR
0.5
0.5
1
1
1.5
2
2
3
P (Piping port)
TN ∗
—
—
NPT 1/8
NPT 1/8
NPT 1/8
NPT 1/4
NPT 1/4
NPT 1/4
D
12
16.6∗
21.6∗
26.4∗
33.6∗
41.6∗
52.4∗
65.4∗
F
6.5
8
9
8.5
10.5
13
17
18
G
4
5
6
6
7
7
8.5
8.5
GP
27
33
39
44
55
65
83
95
GW
25.5
31.5
37.5
42.5
53.5
63.5
81.5
93.5
H
26
32
39
44
55
67
85
97
HA
24
30
36
41
52
62
80
92
HB
14
17
21
23.5
29
36
45
51
HC
25
31
38
43
54
66
84
96
HP
—
—
11
14.5
20
25
32
35
N
4.5
6
7
6.5
8.5
11
15
16
PW
26
32
38
43
54
64
82
94
Q
68
84
95
105
116
134
159
171
QW
14
18
17
20
26
34
48
60
T
17.5
19
20.5
21.5
24
26
30
32
TC
14
17
20
22.5
28
33
42
48
W
20
25
40
40
50
60
60
70
WP
13
16
19
21.5
27
32
41
47
WS
8
7
7
7
7
7
10
10
X
15
18
22
28
35
40
50
60
HR
24
30
36
41
51
62
80
90
Y
39.5
54.5
64
72
79
93
113
121
HS
5
8.5
7.5
6.5
7
8
9
9.5
HT
—
—
28
33.5
41
50
56
63.5
JxE
M4 x 0.7 x 6
M5 x 0.8 x 7
M6 x 1 x 8
M6 x 1 x 8
M8 x 1.25 x 10
M8 x 1.25 x 10
M10 x 1.5 x 15
M10 x 1.5 x 15
K
9
14
11
15
13
15
25
24
(mm)
L
38
53
62
70
76
90
110
118
Z
76
94
107
117
130
148
176
188
TF ∗
—
—
G 1/8
G 1/8
G 1/8
G 1/4
G 1/4
G 1/4
Note 2) The astrisk denotes the dimensions which are different from the CY1RG series.
16
Series CY3R
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position for Stroke End Detection
Auto Switch Operation Range
(Reference
dimension)
A
Auto
Bore size (mm)
switch
6 10 15 20 25 32 40
model
D-A9
9
6 7
6
8 11 8
D-M9
4
3 4.5 2.5 3.5 3 3
D-F9W 4 7 4
4.5 4 4.5 5.5
D-Z7
— — — — 9 9 11
D-Z80
D-Y59
D-Y7
6
— — — — 5 5
D-Y7W
B
C
D
50 63
8
3
5
8
3
4.5
9 10
6
6
∗ Switches cannot be mounted in some cases.
∗ Operating ranges are standards including hysteresis,
and are not guaranteed. (variation on the order of
±30%)
Large variations may occur depending on the surrounding environment.
ø6, ø10, ø15, ø20
Auto switch
model
Bore size
(mm)
6
10
15
20
(mm)
A
B
C
D
D-A9
D-M9
D-F9W
D-A9
D-M9
D-F9W
D-A9
D-M9
D-F9W
D-A9
D-M9
D-F9W
26
28
17.5
19.5
30
32
21.5
23.5
46
48
76.5
87.5
42
44
72.5
83.5
46
48
—
39.5
42
44
—
35.5
26
—
56.5
67.5
30
32
60.5
71.5
Note 1) Auto switches cannot be installed in Area C in the case of ø15.
ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63
Bore size
(mm)
25
32
40
50
63
(mm)
A
Auto switch
model
D-A9
19
22.5
24.5
28.5
30.5
B
C
D
D-Y5
D-Y5
D-Z7 D-Y5
D-Z7 D-Y5
D-M9 D-Z7
D-M9 D-Z7
D-M9
D-M9
D-Y7P D-A9
W D-Z80 D-Y7P D-A9 D-F9W D-Z80 D-Y7P D-A9 D-F9W D-Z80 D-Y7P
D-F9W D-Z80
D-F9
D-Y7W
D-Y7W
D-Y7W
D-Y7W
23
26.5
28.5
32.5
34.5
18
21.5
23.5
27.5
29.5
98
107.5
123.5
147.5
157.5
94
103.5
119.5
143.5
153.5
99
108.5
124.5
148.5
158.5
42
45.5
47.5
51.5
53.5
38
41.5
43.5
47.5
49.5
43
46.5
48.5
52.5
54.5
75
84.5
100.5
124.5
134.5
79
88.5
104.5
128.5
138.5
74
83.5
99.5
123.5
133.5
Note 1) 50 mm is the minimum stroke available with 2 auto switches mounted.
Note 2) Figures in the table above are used as a reference when mounting the auto switches for stroke end detection. In the case of actually setting the auto switches,
adjust them after confirming their operation.
Note 3) Mounting brackets are additionally required for the D-A9, M9 and F9W types. Refer to the auto switch mounting bracket part number on page 18.
17
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Direct Mount Type
Series CY3R
Auto Switch Mounting
Auto Switch Specifications
ø6 to ø20
(1) Switches (switch rail) can be added to the
standard type (without switch rail). The
switch rail accessory type is mentioned on
page 14, and can be ordered together with
auto switches.
(2) Refer to the separate disassembly instructions for switch magnet installation procedures.
When mounting auto switches, they
should be inserted into the cylinder's
switch groove from the direction shown
in the drawing on the right. After setting
in the mounting position, use a flat head
watchmaker’s screwdriver to tighten the
mounting screw which is included.
Flathead watchmaker’s
screwdriver
Auto switch
ø5 to ø6
Note) When tightening the auto switch mounting screw,
use a watchmaker’s screwdriver with an approximately 5 to 6 mm diameter handle.
Furthermore, the tightening torque should be
approximately 0.1 to 0.15 N⋅m. As a rule, it can be
turned about 90º past the point at which tightening
can be felt.
Switch mounting screw
(M2.5 x 4 l)
(included)
ø25 to ø63
Mounting Bracket Part No.
(1) Insert the front side of the auto switch into
the auto switch groove and slide the switch
to the desired position.
(2) After the detection position is confirmed, securely tighten the mounting screw (M2.5)
on the auto switch.
(3) Changes to the detection position have to
be performed during process (2).
Switch rail
Watchmaker’s
(precision) screwdriver
Bore size
(mm)
25
32
40
50
63
e
q
Mounting screw
M2.5 x 0.45 x 4 l
w
Mounting
bracket
part no.
BMG2-012
Weight
Applicable
auto switches
3g
Reed switch:
D-A9
Solid state switch:
D-M9
D-F9W
Switch mounting
bracket
Note) When tightening the mounting screw, use a
watchmaker’s screwdriver with a 5 to 6 mm
handle diameter and tighten with a torque of
0.10 to 0.15 N⋅m. As a guide, an acceptable
tightening level is reached by tightening the
screw an additional 90 degrees from the
point at which the screw is snug.
Auto switch
Other than the applicable auto switches listed in “How to Order”, the following auto switches can be mounted.
For detailed specifications, refer to “SMC Best Pneumatics” catalog vol. 8, 8-30-1.
Type
Reed switch
Solid state switch
Model
D-Z73
D-Z76
D-Z80
D-Y59A
D-Y59B
D-Y7P
D-Y7BW
D-Y7NW
D-Y7PW
Electrical entry
Features
Applicable
bore size
—
Without indicator light
Grommet (In-line)
—
ø25 to ø63
Diagnostic indication
(2-color display)
∗ With pre-wired connector is also available in solid state auto switches. For specifications, refer to “SMC Best Pneumatics” catalog vol. 8, page 8-30-52.
∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state switch (D-F9G/F9H/Y7G/Y7H type) are also available. For details, refer to “SMC Best Pneumatics”
catalog vol. 8, page 8-30-31/8-30-32.
18
Series CY3
Auto Switch Specifications
Auto Switch Common Specifications
Type
Leakage current
Solid state switch
Reed switch
3-wire: 100 µA or less
None
Operating time
Impact resistance
Insulation resistance
2-wire: 0.8 mA or less
1.2 ms
1 ms or less
300 m/s2
1000 m/s2
50 MΩ or more at 500 Mega VDC (between lead wire and case)
Withstand voltage
1000 VAC for 1 minute (between lead wire and case)
Ambient temperature
–10 to 60°C
Enclosure
IEC529 standard IP67, JIS C 0920 waterproof construction
Lead Wire Length
Contact Protection Boxes: CD-P11, CD-P12
Lead wire length indication
<Applicable switch model>
(Example)
D-A9/Z7/Z8
The auto switches above do not have a built-in contact protection circuit.
Therefore, please use a contact protection box with the switch for any of
the following cases:
q Where the operation load is an inductive load.
w Where the wiring length to load is greater than 5 m.
e Where the load voltage is 100 VAC.
The contact life may be shortened. (Due to permanent energizing conditions.)
D-M9P L
Lead wire length
Nil
L
Z
0.5 m
3 m
5 m
Note 1) Applicable auto switch with 5 m lead wire “Z”
Reed switch: None
Solid state switch: Manufactured upon receipt of order as standard.
Note 2) The standard lead wire length of solid state switch with water-resistant
2-color indication is 3 meters. (Not available 0.5 m)
Note 3) To designate solid state switches with flexible specifications, add “-61”
after the lead wire length.
Specifications
CD-P12
CD-P11
Part no.
Load voltage
100 VAC
200 VAC
24 VDC
Maximum load current
25 mA
12.5 mA
50 mA
∗ Lead wire length
Switch conneciton side 0.5 m
Load connection side
0.5 m
(Example) D-F9NWL- 61
Flexible specification
Note) D-M9 is a flexible cable specification as standard.
Auto Switch Hysteresis
The hysteresis is the difference between the position of the auto switch as
it turns “on” and as it turns “off”. A part of operating range (one side)
includes this hysteresis.
Internal Circuit
CD-P11
Surge absorber
Choke
coil
OUT Brown
OUT Blue
Switch operation
position
(ON)
Hysteresis
Choke coil
CD-P12
Note)
Zener diode
OUT (+)
Brown
OUT (–)
Blue
Reed switch:
2 mm or less
Solid state switch: 1 mm or less
Dimensions
Switch operation
position
(OFF)
Note) Hysteresis may fluctuate due to the operating environment.
Contact SMC if hysteresis causes an operational problem.
Connection
To connect a switch unit to a contact protection box, connect the lead wire
from the side of the contact protection box marked SWITCH to the lead
wire coming out of the switch unit. Keep the switch as close as possible to
the contact protection box, with a lead wire length of no more than 1 meter.
19
Series CY3
Auto Switch
Connections and Examples
Basic Wiring
Solid state 3-wire, NPN
Solid state 3-wire, PNP
Brown
Brown
Load
Brown
Load
Black
Switch
main
circuit
2-wire
(Solid state)
Switch
main
circuit
Indicator
light
protective
circuit
etc.
Switch
main
circuit
Black
Load
Blue
2-wire
(Reed switch)
Blue
Blue
Brown
Load
Blue
(Power supplies for switch and load are separate.)
Brown
Brown
Load
Black
Switch
main
circuit
Brown
Indicator
light
protective
circuit
etc.
Switch
main
circuit
Load
Blue
Blue
Load
Blue
Example of Connection to PLC (Programmable Logic Controller)
• Sink input specifications
3-wire, NPN
Black
• Source input specifications
3-wire, PNP
Black
Input
Brown
Connect according to the applicable
PLC input specifications, since the
connection method will vary depending
on the PLC input specifications.
Input
Brown
Switch
Switch
Blue
Blue
COM
COM
PLC internal circuit
PLC internal circuit
2-wire
2-wire
Brown
Blue
Input
Switch
Input
Switch
Blue
Brown
COM
COM
PLC internal circuit
PLC internal circuit
Example of AND (Serial) and OR (Parallel) Connection
3-wire
AND connection for NPN output
(using relays)
Switch 1
Switch 2
Brown
Black
Relay
Blue
AND connection for NPN output
(performed with switches only)
Load
Relay
contact
Brown
Black
Relay
Blue
Switch 1
Switch 2
OR connection for NPN output
Brown
Black
Load
Blue
Switch 1
Brown
Black
Blue
Switch 2
Brown
Black
Blue
Load
Brown
Black
Blue
The indicator lights will illuminate
when both switches are turned ON.
2-wire with 2-switch AND connection
Brown
Load
Switch 1
Switch 2
Blue
Brown
Blue
When two switches are connected in series, a load may
malfunction because the
load voltage will decrease
when in the ON state.
The indicator lights will illuminate if both of the switches
are in the ON state.
Power supply
Internal
–
x 2 pcs.
voltage
voltage drop
= 24 V - 4 V x 2 pcs.
= 16 V
Example: Power supply is 24 VDC.
Internal voltage drop in switch is 4 V.
Load voltage at ON =
2-wire with 2-switch OR connection
Brown
Switch 1
Switch 2
Blue
Brown
Load
(Solid state)
(Reed switch)
When two switches
are connected in parallel, a malfunction
may occur because
the load voltage will
increase when in the
OFF state.
Because there is no
current leakage, the
load voltage will not increase when turned
OFF. However, depending on the number of
switches in the ON
state, the indicator lights
may sometimes dim or
not light because of the
dispersion and reduction of the current flowing to the switches.
Blue
Load voltage at OFF = Leakage current x 2 pcs.
x Load impedance
= 1 mA x 2 pcs. x 3 kΩ
=6V
Example: Load impedance is 3 kΩ.
Leakage current from switch is 1 mA.
20
Reed Switch: Direct Mounting Style
D-A90/D-A93/D-A96
For details about certified products conforming to
international standards, visit us at www.smcworld.com.
Auto Switch Specifications
Grommet
Electrical entry direction: In-line
PLC: Programmable Logic Controller
D-A90 (Without indicator light)
D-A90
Auto switch part no.
Applicable load
Load voltage
IC circuit, Relay, PLC
24 V AC/DC or less
48 V AC/DC or less
100 V AC/DC or less
50 mA
40 mA
20 mA
Maximum load current
Contact protection circuit
None
Internal resistance
1 Ω or less (including lead wire length of 3 m)
D-A93/D-A96 (With indicator light)
D-A93
Auto switch part no.
Applicable load
Caution
Operating Precautions
Fix the switch with the existing screw
installed on the switch body. The switch may
be damaged if a screw other than the one
supplied, is used.
Relay, PLC
Load voltage
Load current range
and max. load
current
IC circuit
24 VDC
100 VAC
4 to 8 VDC
5 to 40 mA
5 to 20 mA
20 mA
Contact protection circuit
Internal voltage drop
D-A96
None
0.8 V or less
2.4 V or less (to 20 mA)/3 V or less (to 40 mA)
Red LED illuminates when ON.
Indicator light
Lead
Auto Switch Internal Circuit
D-A90
Reed switch
Contact
protection
box
OUT (±)
Brown
Weight
Unit: g
CD-P11
CD-P12
OUT (±)
Blue
Auto switch part no.
Lead wire length
(m)
D-A93
LED diode
Brown
Contact
protection
box
Resistor
Reed switch
wires
D-A90/D-A93 — Oilproof heavy-duty vinyl cable: ø2.7, 0.18 mm2 x 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5 m
D-A96— Oilproof heavy-duty vinyl cable: ø2.7, 0.15 mm2 x 3 cores (Brown, Black, Blue), 0.5 m
Note 1) Refer to page 19 for reed switch common specifications.
Note 2) Refer to page 19 for lead wire lengths.
Zener
diode
OUT (+)
Brown
D-A90
D-A93
D-A96
6
6
8
30
30
41
0.5
3
Dimensions
Unit: mm
CD-P11
CD-P12
Blue
OUT (–)
Blue
D-A90/D-A93/D-A96
D-A96
LED diode
DC (+)
Brown
Indicator light
(+)
Reed switch
Resistor
Reverse
current
prevention
diode diode
OUT
Black
DC (–)
Blue
Load
D-A90 type comes without
indicator light
DC power
supply
(–)
Note) q In a case where the operation load is
an inductive load.
w In a case where the wiring load is
greater than 5 m.
e In a case where the load voltage is
100 VAC.
Use the auto switch with a contact protection
box in any of the above mentioned cases.
(For details about the contact protection box,
refer to page 19.)
21
M2.5 x 4 l
Slotted set screw
Most sensitive
position
( ): dimensions for D-A93.
Solid State Switch: Direct Mounting Style
D-M9N/D-M9P/D-M9B
For details about certified products conforming to
international standards, visit us at www.smcworld.com.
Auto Switch Specifications
Grommet
PLC: Programmable Logic Controller
2-wire load current is reduced
(2.5 to 40 mA)
Lead free
UL certified (style 2844) lead
cable is used.
D-M9/D-M9V (With indicator light)
D-M9N
Auto switch part no.
D-M9P
D-M9B
In-line
Electrical entry direction
2-wire
3-wire
Wiring type
NPN
Output type
PNP
—
IC circuit, Relay, PLC
24 VDC relay, PLC
Power supply voltage
5, 12, 24 VDC (4.5 to 28 V)
—
Current consumption
10 mA or less
Applicable load
Load voltage
—
28 VDC or less
40 mA or less
Load current
2.5 to 40 mA
0.8 V or less
4 V or less
100 µA or less at 24 VDC
0.8 mA or less
Internal voltage drop
Leakage current
24 VDC (10 to 28 VDC)
—
Indicator light
Red LED illuminates when ON.
Lead
Caution
Operating Precautions
Fix the switch with the existing screw
installed on the switch body. The switch may
be damaged if a screw other than the one
supplied, is used.
wires
Oilproof heavy-duty vinyl cable: ø2.7 x 3.2 ellipse
D-M9B
0.15 mm2 x 2 cores
D-M9N, D-M9P
0.15 mm2 x 3 cores
Note 1) Refer to page 19 for solid state switch common specifications.
Note 2) Refer to page 19 for lead wire lengths.
Weight
Unit: g
Auto switch part no.
Auto Switch Internal Circuit
D-M9N
Switch
main circuit
DC (+)
Brown
D-M9N
D-M9P
8
8
7
3
41
41
38
5
68
68
63
0.5
Lead wire length
(m)
Dimensions
D-M9B
Unit: mm
D-M9
OUT
Black
Mounting screw M2.5 x 4 l
Slotted set screw
Indicator light
2.7
4
D-M9P
2.6
2.8
DC (–)
Blue
22
3.2
Switch
main circuit
DC (+)
Brown
OUT
Black
6
Most sensitive position
22
DC (–)
Blue
D-M9B
Switch
main circuit
OUT (+)
Brown
OUT (–)
Blue
22
2-color Indication Solid State Switch:
Direct Mounting Style
D-F9NW/D-F9PW/D-F9BW
For details about certified products conforming to
international standards, visit us at www.smcworld.com.
Auto Switch Specifications
Grommet
PLC: Programmable Logic Controller
D-F9W (With indicator light)
D-F9NW
Auto switch part no.
D-F9PW
Output type
Power supply voltage
IC circuit, Relay IC, PLC
24 VDC relay, PLC
5, 12, 24 VDC (4.5 to 28 VDC)
—
Auto Switch Internal Circuit
D-F9NW
Switch
main circuit
DC (+)
Brown
—
10 mA or less
Current consumption
Fix the switch with the existing screw
installed on the switch body. The switch may
be damaged if a screw other than the one
supplied, is used.
—
PNP
NPN
Applicable load
Operating Precautions
2-wire
3-wire
Wiring type
Caution
D-F9BW
In-line
Electrical entry direction
Load voltage
28 VDC or less
—
24 VDC (10 to 28 VDC)
Load current
40 mA or less
1.5 V or less
(0.8 V or less at 10 mA
load current)
80 mA or less
5 to 40 mA
0.8 V or less
4 V or less
Internal voltage
drop
Leakage current
100 µA or less at 24 VDC
Indicator light
Operating position .......... Red LED illuminates.
Optimum operating position .......... Green LED illuminates.
0.8 mA or less
Lead
wires
Oilproof heavy-duty vinyl cable: ø2.7, 0.15 mm2 x 3 cores (Brown, Black, Blue),
0.18 mm2 x 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5 m
Note 1) Refer to page 19 for solid state switch common specifications.
Note 2) Refer to page 19 for lead wire lengths.
OUT
Black
Weight
DC (–)
Blue
Unit: g
D-F9NW
Auto switch part no.
0.5
Lead wire length
(m)
D-F9PW
D-F9PW
D-F9BW
7
7
7
3
34
34
32
5
56
56
52
OUT
Black
DC (–)
Blue
Dimensions
Unit: mm
D-F9W
Mounting screw M2.5 x 4 l
Slotted set screw
2.8
22
4
6
OUT (–)
Blue
Indicator light/Display method
ON
Operating
range
OFF
Display
Red
Green
2.6
Switch
main circuit
OUT (+)
Brown
Red
Optimum operating
position
23
Indicator light
2
D-F9BW
ø2.7
Switch
main circuit
DC (+)
Brown
Most sensitive position
Series CY3B/CY3R
Made to Order
Contact SMC for detailed specifications, lead times and prices.
Symbol
Contents
Model
Bore size (mm)
6
-XB6
Heat resistant cylinder (150°C specification)
CY3B
-XB11
Long stroke (2001 mm or longer)
CY3B
Low speed cylinder (7 to 50 mm/s)
CY3B
-XB13
Note 1)
10 15 20 25 32 40 50 63
CY3B
-X116
Hydro specifications
CY3R
-X132
Axial ports
-X160
High speed specifications
CY3B
CY3B
CY3R
-X168
Helical insert thread specifications
CY3B
-X206
Added mounting tap positions for slider
CY3B
-X210
Oil-free exterior specifications
CY3B
-X322
Outside of cylinder tube with hard chrome
plating
-X324
Oil-free exterior specifications (with dust seal)
-X1468
Interchangeable specification with CY16
CY3B
CY3R
CY3B
CY3B
CY3R
-XC24
With magnetic shielding plate
CY3B
CY3B
-XC57
With floating joint
CY3R
Note 1) XB9, Low speed cylinder (15 to 50 mm/s) can also be produced (CY3B6 to 63).
Note 2) Individual “Made to Order” is only applicable to the model as mentioned above.
24
Series CY3
Made to Order 1
Contact SMC for detailed specifications, lead times and prices.
Symbol
1
-XB6
Heat resistant cylinder (150°C specification)
CY3B Bore size Port thread type
Stroke XB6
Heat resistant cylinder
Specifications
Applicable series
CY3B
Bore size
ø6 to ø63
50 to 150°C∗
Ambient and fluid temperature
Max. operating pressure
0.5 MPa
50 to 400 mm/s∗
Piston speed
∗ When using in less than 100°C range, since it could make a difference in the
maintenance cycle, depending on the operating speed, use it at 200 mm/s or
less.
Temperature range for operating cylinder
and piston speed
(1) When using with an operating temperature from 60°C to 100°C,
and a piston speed of more than 200 mm/s, please consult with
SMC separately.
(2) When using with an operating temperature from 50° to 100°C,
and a piston speed of less than 200 mm/s, the XB6 specifications
can be used.
(3) As for XB6, regarding the temperature range (over 50°C to 60°C)
which overlaps the one of standard products, consider the tendency of operating temperature (upper, lower limits), then choose
a model.
(mm/s)
0.4 MPa∗
Max. operating pressure for intermediate stop
∗ Use caution that the magnet coupling will be removed, if it is used to stop in an
intermediate stroke by an external stopper with the operating pressure over 0.4
MPa.
Magnetic Holding Force
Bore size (mm)
6
10
15
25
32
40
90.1 160
250
410
641
1000 1590
299
490
766
1190 1900
40.0
Holding force
17.2
(at 100°C)
47.9 107
2
192
Standard
products
50
e
20
Long stroke (2001 mm or longer) -XB11
CY3B Bore size Port thread type
80
100
120
140
(°C)
<Reference>
Maintenance cycle for XB6 could vary substantially, depending on the operating condition and the ambient temperature. Even if using in our recommended
range, as a guide, conduct it in around 1/2 intervals, compared to the standard
products.
3
Symbol
Low speed (7 to 50 mm/s) specifications -XB13
CY3B Bore size Port thread type
Stroke XB13
Low speed (7 to 50 mm/s) specifications
CY3B
ø25 to ø63
Applicable stroke Max. manufacturable strokes from 2001 mm to standard type
There is no sticking and slipping even at very low drive speeds of 7 to 50
mm/s. Furthermore, there is no lurching at start up, allowing smooth drive
through the entire stroke.
Note) Please contact SMC for the delivery.
Specifications
Applicable series
Bore size
Piston speed
25
160
When using with the operating temperature fluctuated between 50°C or less
and 100°C or more, the operating speed, etc. will be largely restricted by the
durability. Prior to use, please contact SMC.
Specifications
Bore size
60
XB6
Stroke XB11
Long stroke (2001 mm to Max. manufacturable stroke)
Applicable series
40
w
Ambient temperature
63
Symbol
q
200
(N)
20
Holding force
14.4
(at 150°C)
Piston speed
400
Operating Pressure Limit for Intermediate Stop
and Vertical Operation
CY3B
ø6 to ø63
7 to 50 mm/s
Series CY3
Made to Order 2
Contact SMC for detailed specifications, lead times and prices.
4
Symbol
-X116
Hydro specifications
CY3B Bore size Port thread type
CY3R
Stroke
X116
7
Symbol
Helical insert thread specifications -X168
CY3B Bore size Port thread type
Hydro specifications
Stroke
X168
Helical insert thread specifications
Suitable for precision low speed feeding, intermediate stopping and skip
feeding of the cylinder.
The standard mounting threads have been changed to the helical insert
thread specifications.
Specifications
Specifications
Applicable series
CY3B/CY3R
Applicable series
ø25 to ø63
Bore size
Fluid
Turbine oil
Piston speed
15 to 300 mm/s
Note 1) Only piping on both sides is available with the CY3R series.
Note 2) When performing intermediate stops with an air-hydro circuit, set
the kinetic energy of the load so that it does not exceed the
allowable value. (Regarding the allowable value, refer to the
section “Intermediate stops” for each series.)
5
8
Symbol
Added mounting tap positions for slider -X206
CY3B Bore size Port thread type
-X132
Axial ports
CY3B Bore size Port thread type
Stroke
X132
Specifications
Bore size
Applicable series
Bore size
CY3B
ø6 to ø63
The air supply port has been changed to an axial position on the head
cover.
Mounting taps
Additional positions
Specifications
X206
Mounting taps have been added on the surface opposite the standard positions.
Applicable series
Axial ports
Stroke
Added mounting tap positions for slider
Symbol
2-port size
CY3B
ø20 to ø63
Bore size
Standard surface
CY3B
ø6 to ø63
2-plug
∗ Dimensions are the same as the standard product.
The port size is the same as the standard type.
6
Symbol
-X160
High speed specifications
CY3B Bore size Port thread type
CY3R
Stroke
X160
High speed specifications
Makes possible high speed piston drive of 1500mm/s (without load).
Specifications
Applicable series
CY3B/CY3R
Bore size
ø20 to ø63
Piston speed (no load)
1500 mm/s
Note 1) When operating this cylinder at high speed, a shock absorber
must be provided.
Note 2) Only piping on both sides is available with the CY3R series.
26
Series CY3
Made to Order 3
Contact SMC for detailed specifications, lead times and prices.
9
Symbol
Oil-free exterior specifications
CY3B Bore size Port thread type
-X210
X210
Stroke
11
Symbol
Oil-free exterior specifications (with dust seal) -X324
CY3B Bore size Port thread type
Oil-free exterior specifications
Suitable for environments where oil is not tolerated. A lubretainer is not installed. A separate version -X324 (with dust seal) is available in cases in
which dust, etc. is dispersed throughout the environment.
Oil-free exterior specifications (with dust seal)
This unit has oil-free exterior specifications, with a dust seal provided on
the cylinder body.
Specifications
Specifications
Bore size
ø10 to ø63
ø6 to ø63
Construction
Construction
CY3B
CY3B
CY3B
Applicable series
CY3B
Applicable series
Bore size
X324
Stroke
Special bearing
Dust seal
(felt)
Special bearing
Symbol
10
Symbol
Outside of cylinder tube with hard chrome plating -X322
CY3B Bore size Port thread type
CY3R(G)
Stroke
12 Interchangeable specification with CY16 -X1468
CY3B Bore size Port thread type
CY3R
X322
X1468
Stroke
Interchangeable specification with CY16
Mounting dimensions are interchangeable with CY16.
Outside of cylinder tube with hard chrome plating
The outside of the cylinder tube has been plated with hard chromium for
reducing wear on the bearings.
13
Symbol
-XC24
With magnetic shielding plate
Specifications
Applicable series
Bore size
CY3B/CY3R
CY3B Bore size Port thread type
Stroke
XC24
ø15 to ø63
∗ Be sure to provide shock absorption measures at the stroke end.
Note 1) The maximum manufacturable strokes are same as the maximum
manufacturable strokes of the standard products. As for ø50, ø63
of the CY3B series, the maximum manufacturable strokes are
available up to 4000 mm.
Note 2) When ordering a cylinder with a stroke of 2001 mm or longer,
place an order by adding the suffix -XB11X322 to the end of the
part number.
With magnetic shielding plate
Shields against the magnetic leakage from an external slider.
Specifications
CY3B
Applicable series
Bore size
ø6 to ø63
Dimensions
Construction
CY3B
CY3R
Magnetic
shielding plate
Tube external surface is
hard chromium electro
Tube external surface is
hard chromium electro
Bore size (mm)
Dimensions
B
Standard
external (B)
ø6
ø10 ø15 ø20 ø25 ø32 ø40 ø50 ø63
19
27
37
38
48
62
72
88
102
17
25
35
36
46
60
70
86
100
∗ Dimensions other than above are the same as the basic type.
27
Series CY3
Made to Order 4
Contact SMC for detailed specifications, lead times and prices.
14
Symbol
With floating joint (CY3B)
CY3B Bore size Port thread type
-XC57
Stroke
XC57
Specifications
ø6 to ø63
Bore size
With floating joint
Note) Since the body of this cylinder is designed for connection with a
floating joint, and cannot be connected to the bodies of standard
products, contact SMC if necessary.
A special floating joint is added to the CY3B series, and the number of connections to the guide on the other axis (the load side) is reduced.
The attachment of the bolt to the floating joint and the load is not limited to
the top or bottom.
Dimensions
Attached from top
Helical insert tap
Note 2)
ø6, ø10
Attached from
bottom: MD
Body
ø6, ø10
(mm)
Model
6
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
63
F∗
Note 1)
R
Note 2)
MM
MD
M
PA
—
—
12
—
18
18
l
M3 x 0.5 x 3 l
—
—
17
—
26
57
25
M4 x 0.7
M3
4
25
6
36
23.5
66
30
M5 x 0.8
M3
4
27
6
37
21
28.5
70
30
M6 x 1.0
M4
5
36
7
47
6.0
27.5
36
80
35
M6 x 1.0
M5
6
47
8
61
6.0
28.5
41
92
40
M6 x 1.0
M5
6
55
8
71
11
6.0
35
49
110
40
M8 x 1.25
M6
8
65
11
87
18
7.0
42
57
122
50
M8 x 1.25
M6
10
80
11
101
HB
L
LA
6.3
11
35
15
2.5
9.5
15
38
6.5
5.5
16.5
23
36
6.5
5.5
17
20
46
8.0
5.5
22.5
60
9.5
26
70
9.5
35
86
36
100
A
B
C
10
17
—
2.5
10
25
—
16
35
18
HA
M3 x 0.5 x 3
W
Note 1) Dimension F provides a clearance of 1 mm between the body and the floating joint, but does not consider dead weight
deflection of the cylinder tube, etc. When put into operation, an appropriate value should be set which considers dead
weight deflection and alignment variations with respect to the other axis. (Refer to the dead weight deflection table on
page 5.)
Note 2) Use caution when attached from the top and operated at or above dimension R (3 mm or more for ø6 and ø10), because the end of the screw will contact the body, and floating cannot be maintained in some cases.
28
Series CY3
Made to Order 5
Contact SMC for detailed specifications, lead times and prices.
15
Symbol
With floating joint (CY3R)
-XC57
CY3R(G) Bore size Port thread type
XC57
Stroke
Specifications
Bore size
With floating joint
ø6 to ø63
Note) Since the body of this cylinder is designed for connection with a
floating joint, and cannot be connected to the bodies of standard
products, contact SMC if necessary.
A special floating joint is added to the CY3R series, and the number of connections to the guide on the other axis (the load side) is reduced.
The attachment of the bolt to the floating joint and the load is not limited to
the top or bottom.
Dimensions
ø6, ø10, ø15
Attached from bottom
with CAP bolt
Bolt size: MD
4-SS thread depth S
(Helical insert depth)
Attached from top
with bolt
4-recessed area diameter øBB
4-recessed area depth CC
Body
Note 1)
Note 1)
Switch rail
Note 1)
Floating block
Section D-D'
ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63
Attached from top
with CAP bolt
Attached from bottom
with CAP bolt
Bolt size: MD
Floating block
Body
Note 1)
Note 1)
Note 2)
2-SS
(Helical insert thread)
Switch rail
Section D-D'
(mm)
Note 1)
Note 1)
Note 1)
Note 2)
SS
WF
XA
XB
3.5
M3 x 0.5
—
10
—
—
3.5
M3 x 0.5
—
12
—
M4
—
4.5
M4 x 0.7
—
14
—
14.5
M3
7
4.5
M4 x 0.7
34
26
3
29
14.5
M4
8
5.5
M5 x 0.8
39
31
3
76
34
17
M5
10
6.5
M6 x 1
50
41
3
74.5 28
90
39
19.5
M5
10
6.5
M6 x 1
60
45
3
—
92.5 38
110
39
19.5
M6
15
10
M8 x 1.25
78
60
3
—
104.5 39
118
49
24.5
M6
15
10
M8 x 1.25
90
70
3
HL
L
LA
LF
MD R
26
23
34
15
7.5
M3
—
33
30
38
15
7.5
M3
53
17
8.5
14
62
29
17
70
—
62.5 22
7.5
—
7.5
9
7.5
10
Bore size
A
BA
BB
CC
FC FE
6
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
63
9.5
3.4
6.5
3.3
—
5
7
5.5 10.5
11.5
3.4
6.5
3.3
—
5
7
7
18
4.5
8
4.4
—
4.5
6.5
7.5 14.5
16.5
—
—
—
6.5
—
6
4
—
45
20.5
—
—
—
8
—
7
4
—
51
21
—
—
—
9.5
—
7.5
4.5
25.5
—
—
—
9.5
—
7.5
35.5
—
—
—
11
—
34.5
—
—
—
18
—
FF
FG
FH HB
13
38.5 35.5
S
Note 1) FE, FF and HB provide a clearance of 1 mm between the body and the floating joint, but do not consider dead weight deflection of the cylinder tube, etc. When
put into operation, an appropriate value should be set which considers dead weight deflection an alignment variations with respect to the other axis. (Refer to
the dead weight deflection table on page 5.)
Note 2) Use caution when attached from the top and operated at or above dimension R, because the end of the screw will contact the body, and floating cannot be
maintained in some cases.
29
Series CY3B/CY3R
Safety Instructions
These safety instructions are intended to prevent a hazardous situation and/or equipment damage. These
instructions indicate the level of potential hazard by labels of "Caution", "Warning" or "Danger". To
ensure safety, be sure to observe ISO 4414 Note 1), JIS B 8370 Note 2) and other safety practices.
Explanation of the Labels
Labels
Danger
Warning
Caution
Note 1)
Note 2)
Note 3)
Note 4)
Explanation of the labels
In extreme conditions, there is a possible result of serious injury or loss of life.
Operator error could result in serious injury or loss of life.
Operator error could result in injury or equipment damage.
ISO 4414: Pneumatic fluid power – General rules relating to systems
JIS B 8370: General Rules for Pneumatic Equipment
Injury indicates light wounds, burns and electrical shocks that do not require hospitalization or hospital visits for long-term medical treatment.
Equipment damage refers to extensive damage to the equipment and surrounding devices.
Selection/Handling/Applications
1. The compatibility of the pneumatic equipment is the responsibility of the person who designs the
pneumatic system or decides its specifications.
Since the products specified here are used in various operating conditions, their compatibility for the specific pneumatic system
must be based on specifications or post analysis and/or tests to meet the specific requirements. The expected performance and
safety assurance are the responsibility of the person who has determined the compatibility of the system. This person should
continuously review the suitability of all items specified, referring to the latest catalog information with a view to giving due
consideration to any possibility of equipment failure when configuring a system.
2. Only trained personnel should operate pneumatically operated machinery and equipment.
Compressed air can be dangerous if handled incorrectly. Assembly, handling or repair of pneumatic systems should be
performed by trained and experienced operators.
3. Do not service machinery/equipment or attempt to remove components until safety is confirmed.
1. Inspection and maintenance of machinery/equipment should only be performed once measures to prevent falling or runaway
of the driver objects have been confirmed.
2. When equipment is removed, confirm that safety process as mentioned above. Turn off the supply pressure for this equipment
and exhaust all residual compressed air in the system.
3. Before machinery/equipment is restarted, take measures to prevent quick extension of a cylinder piston rod, etc.
4. Contact SMC if the product will be used in any of the following conditions:
1. Conditions and environments beyond the given specifications, or if product is used outdoors.
2. Installation on equipment in conjunction with atomic energy, railway, air navigation, vehicles, medical equipment, food and
beverages, recreation equipment, emergency stop circuits, clutch and brake circuits in press applications, or safety equipment.
3. An application which has the possibility of having negative effects on people, property, or animals, requiring special safety analysis.
4. If the products are used in an interlock circuit, prepare a double interlock style circuit with a mechanical protection function for
the prevention of a breakdown. And, examine the devices periodically if they function normally or not.
Exemption from Liability
1. SMC, its officers and employees shall be exempted from liability for any loss or damage arising out of
earthquakes or fire, action by a third person, accidents, customer error with or without intention, product misuse, and any other damages caused by abnormal operating conditions.
2. SMC, its officers and employees shall be exempted from liability for any direct or indirect loss or damage, including consequential loss or damage, loss of profits, or loss of chance, claims, demands, proceedings, costs, expenses, awards, judgments and any other liability whatsoever including legal costs
and expenses, which may be suffered or incurred, whether in tort (including negligence), contract,
breach of statutory duty, equity or otherwise.
3. SMC is exempted from liability for any damages caused by operations not contained in the catalogs
and/or instruction manuals, and operations outside of the specification range.
4. SMC is exempted from liability for any loss or damage whatsoever caused by malfunctions of its products when combined with other devices or software.
Back page 1
Series CY3
Auto Switch Precautions 1
Be sure to read this before handling.
Design & Selection
Warning
1. Confirm the specifications.
Read the specifications carefully and use this product appropriately. The product may be damaged or malfunction if it is used
outside the range of specifications of current load, voltage, temperature or impact. We do not guarantee any damage in any
case the product is used outside of the specification range.
2. Pay attention to the length of time that a switch is ON
at an intermediate stroke position.
When an auto switch is placed at an intermediate position of the
stroke and a load is driven at the time the piston passes, the
auto switch will operate, but if the speed is too great the operating time will be shortened and the load may not operate properly. The maximum detectable piston speed is:
V (mm/s) =
Auto switch operating range (mm)
x 1000
Time load applied (ms)
3. Keep wiring as short as possible.
<Reed switch>
As the length of the wiring to a load gets longer, the rush current at switching ON becomes greater, and this may shorten
the product’s life. (The switch will stay ON all the time.) Use a
contact protection box when the wire length is 5 m or longer.
<Solid state switch>
Although wire length should not affect switch function, use a
wire 100 m or shorter.
4. Do not use a load that generates surge voltage. If a
surge voltage is generated, the discharge occurs at
the contact, possibly resulting in the shortening of
product life.
<Reed switch>
If driving a load such as a relay that generates a surge voltage,
use a switch with a built-in contact protection circuit or use a
contact protection box.
<Solid state switch>
Although a zener diode for surge protection is connected at the
output side of a solid state auto switch, damage may still occur
if the surge is applied repeatedly. When a load, such as a relay
or solenoid, which generates surge is directly driven, use a type
of switch with a built-in surge absorbing element.
5. Cautions for use in an interlock circuit
When an auto switch is used for an interlock signal requiring
high reliability, devise a double interlock system to avoid trouble
by providing a mechanical protection function, or by also using
another switch (sensor) together with the auto switch. Also perform periodic maintenance and confirm proper operation.
6. Do not make any modifications to the product.
Do not take the product apart. It may cause human injuries and
accidents.
Caution
1. Use caution when multiple actuators are used and
close to each other.
When two or more auto switch actuators are lined up in close
proximity to each other, magnetic field interference may cause
the switches to malfunction. Maintain a minimum cylinder separation of 40 mm. (When the allowable interval is specified for
each cylinder series, use the indicated value.)
2. Take note of the internal voltage drop of the switch.
<Reed switch>
1) Switches with an indicator light (Except D-A96, Z76)
• If auto switches are connected in series as shown below,
take note that there will be a large voltage drop because of
internal resistance in the light emitting diodes. (Refer to internal voltage drop in the auto switch specifications.)
[The voltage drop will be “n” times larger when “n” auto
switches are connected.]
Even though an auto switch operates normally, the load
may not operate.
Load
• In the same way, when operating under a specified voltage,
although an auto switch may operate normally, the load
may not operate. Therefore, the formula below should be
satisfied after confirming the minimum operating voltage of
the load.
Internal voltage Minimum operating
Supply
–
>
drop of switch
voltage of load
voltage
2) If the internal resistance of a light emitting diode causes a
problem, select a switch without an indicator light (Model DA90, Z80).
<Solid state switch>
3) Generally, the internal voltage drop will be greater with a 2wire solid state auto switch than with a reed switch. Take the
same precautions as in 1).
Also, note that a 12 VDC relay is not applicable.
3. Pay attention to leakage current.
<Solid state switch>
With a 2 wire solid state auto switch, current (leakage current)
flows to the load to operate the internal circuit even when in the
OFF state.
Operating current of
load (OFF condition) > Leakage current
If the criteria given in the above formula are not met, it will not
reset correctly (stays ON). Use a 3-wire switch if this specification will not be satisfied.
Moreover, leakage current flow to the load will be “n” times larger when “n” auto switches are connected in parallel.
4. Ensure sufficient clearance for maintenance activities.
When designing an application, be sure to allow sufficient clearance for maintenance and inspections.
Back page 2
Series CY3
Auto Switch Precautions 2
Be sure to read this before handling.
Mounting & Adjustment
Warning
1. Instruction manual
Install the products and operate them only after reading the instruction manual carefully and understanding its contents. Also
keep the manual where it can be referred to as necessary.
2. Do not drop or bump.
Do not drop, bump or apply excessive impacts (300 m⁄s2 or
more for reed switches and 1000 m⁄s2 or more for solid state
switches) while handling. Although the body of the switch may
not be damaged, the inside of the switch could be damaged
and cause a malfunction.
Mounting & Adjustment
Caution
1. Do not carry an actuator by the auto switch lead
wires.
Never carry a cylinder (actuator) by its lead wires. This may not
only cause broken lead wires, but it may cause internal elements of the switch to be damaged by the stress.
2. Fix the switch with appropriate screw installed on
the switch body. If using other screws, switch may
be damaged.
Wiring
3. Mount switches using the proper fastening torque.
When a switch is tightened beyond the range of fastening torque, the mounting screws, mounting bracket or switch may be
damaged. On the other hand, tightening below the range of fastening torque may allow the switch to slip out of position. (Refer
to switch mounting for each series regarding switch mounting,
moving, and fastening torque, etc.)
4. Mount a switch at the center of the operating range.
Adjust the mounting position of an auto switch so that the piston
stops at the center of the operating range (the range in which a
switch is ON).
(The mounting position shown in a catalog indicates the optimum position at stroke end.) If mounted at the end of the operating range (around the borderline of ON and OFF), operation
will be unstable.
<D-M9>
When the D-M9 auto switch is used to replace old series auto
switch, it may not activate depending on operating condition
because of its shorter operating range.
Such as
• Application where the stop position of actuator may vary and
exceed the operating range of the auto switch, for example,
pushing, pressing, clamping operation, etc.
• Application where the auto switch is used for detecting an
intermediate stop position of the actuator. (In this case the
detecting time will be reduced. )
In these applications, set the auto switch to the center of the
required detecting range.
5. Securing the space for maintenance
When installing the products, please allow access for maintenance.
Warning
1. Confirm proper insulation of wiring.
Be certain that there is no faulty wiring insulation (contact with
other circuits, ground fault, improper insulation between terminals, etc.). Damage may occur due to excess current flow into a
switch.
2. Do not wire with power lines or high voltage lines.
Wire separately from power lines or high voltage lines, avoiding
parallel wiring or wiring in the same conduit with these lines.
Control circuits, including auto switches, may malfunction due
to noise from these other lines.
Caution
1. Avoid repeatedly bending or stretching lead wires.
Broken lead wires will result from applying bending stress or
stretching force to the lead wires.
2. Be sure to connect the load before power is applied.
<2-wire type>
If the power is turned ON when an auto switch is not connected
to a load, the switch will be instantly damaged because of excess current.
3. Do not allow short circuit of loads.
<Reed switch>
If the power is turned ON with a load in a short circuited condition, the switch will be instantly damaged because of excess
current flow into the switch.
<Solid state switch>
Model D-M9, F9W and all models of PNP output type
switches do not have built-in short circuit prevention circuits. If
loads are short circuited, the switches will be instantly damaged, as in the case of reed switches.
Take special care to avoid reverse wiring with the power supply
line (brown) and the output line (black) on 3-wire type switches.
Back page 3
Series CY3
Auto Switch Precautions 3
Be sure to read this before handling.
Wiring
Operating Environment
Warning
Caution
1. Never use in an atmosphere of explosive gases.
4. Avoid incorrect wiring.
<Reed switch>
A 24 VDC switch with indicator light has polarity. The brown
lead wire is (+) and the blue lead wire is (–).
1) If connections are reversed, a switch will operate, however,
the light emitting diode will not light up.
Also note that a current greater than that specified will damage a light emitting diode and it will no longer operate.
Applicable models:
D-A93, D-Z73
<Solid state switch>
1) If connections are reversed on a 2-wire type switch, the
switch will not be damaged if protected by a protection circuit, but the switch will always stay in an ON state. However,
it is still necessary to avoid reversed connections, since the
switch could be damaged by a load short circuit in this condition.
2) If connections are reversed (power supply line + and power
supply line –) on a 3-wire type switch, the switch will be protected by a protection circuit. However, if the power supply
line (+) is connected to the blue wire and the power supply
line (–) is connected to the black wire, the switch will be damaged.
<D-M9>
D-M9 does not have built-in short circuit protection circuit.
Be aware that if the power supply connection is reversed (e.g.
(+) power supply wire and (–) power supply wire connection is
reversed), the switch will be damaged.
5. When the cable sheath is stripped, confirm the stripping direction. The insulator may be split or damaged depending on the direction. (D-M9 only)
The construction of auto switches is not intended to prevent explosion. Never use in an atmosphere with an explosive gas
since this may cause a serious explosion.
2. Do not use in an area where a magnetic field is generated.
Auto switches will malfunction or magnets inside actuators will
become demagnetized.
3. Do not use in an environment where the auto switch
will be continually exposed to water.
Although switches, satisfy IEC standard IP67 construction (JIS
C 0920: watertight construction), do not use switches in applications where continually exposed to water splash or spray. Poor
insulation or swelling of the potting resin inside switches may
cause malfunction.
4. Do not use in an environment with oil or chemicals.
Consult with SMC if auto switches will be used in an environment with coolant, cleaning solvent, various oils or chemicals. If
auto switches are used under these conditions for even a short
time, they may be adversely affected by improper insulation,
malfunction due to swelling of the potting resin, or hardening of
the lead wires.
5. Do not use in an environment with temperature cycles.
Consult with SMC if switches are used where there are temperature cycles other than normal temperature changes, as they
may be adversely affected internally.
6. Do not use in an environment where there is excessive impact shock.
<Reed switch>
When excessive impact (300 m/s2 or more) is applied to a reed
switch during operation, the contact point will malfunction and
generate or cut off a signal momentarily (1 ms or less). Consult
with SMC regarding the need to use a solid state switch depending upon the environment.
7. Do not use in an area where surges are generated.
<Solid state switch>
When there are units (solenoid type lifter, high frequency induction furnace, motor, etc.) which generate a large amount of
surge in the area around actuators with solid state auto
switches, this may cause deterioration or damage to the
switches. Avoid sources of surge generation and crossed lines.
Recommended Tool
Model name
Wire stripper
Model no.
D-M9N-SWY
∗ Stripper for a round cable (ø2.0) can be used for a 2-wire type cable.
Back page 4
Series CY3
Auto Switch Precautions 4
Be sure to read this before handling.
Operating Environment
Caution
1. Avoid accumulation of iron debris or close contact
with magnetic substances.
When a large amount of ferrous debris such as machining chips
or spatter is accumulated, or a magnetic substance (something
attracted by a magnet) is brought into close proximity with an
auto switch actuator, it may cause the auto switch (actuator) to
malfunction due to a loss of the magnetic force inside the actuator.
2. Consult with SMC concerning water resistance, elasticity of lead wires, usage at welding sites, etc.
3. Do not use in direct sunlight.
4. Do not mount the product in locations where it is exposed to radiant heat.
Maintenance
Warning
1. Perform the following maintenance periodically in
order to prevent possible danger due to unexpected
auto switch malfunction.
1) Securely tighten switch mounting screws.
If screws become loose or the mounting position is dislocated, retighten them after readjusting the mounting position.
2) Confirm that there is no damage to lead wires.
To prevent faulty insulation, replace switches or repair lead
wires, etc., if damage is discovered.
3) Confirm the lighting of the green light on the 2-color indicator
type switch.
Confirm that the green LED is on when stopped at the established position. If the red LED is on, the mounting position is
not appropriate. Readjust the mounting position until the
green LED lights up.
2. Maintenance procedures are outlined in the operation manual.
Not following proper procedures could cause the product to
malfunction and could lead to damage to the equipment or machine.
3. Removal of equipment, and supply/exhaust of compressed air
Before any machinery or equipment is removed, first ensure
that the appropriate measures are in place to prevent the fall or
erratic movement of driven objects and equipment, then cut off
the electric power and reduce the pressure in the system to
zero. Only then should you proceed with the removal of any
machinery and equipment.
When machinery is restarted, proceed with caution after confirming that appropriate measures are in place to prevent actuators from sudden movement.
Back page 5
Series CY3B/CY3R
Specific Product Precautions
Be sure to read this before handling. For Safety Instructions, Actuator Precautions,
refer to “Precautions for Handling Pneumatic Devices” (M-03-E3A).
Mounting
Mounting
Caution
Caution
1. Take care to avoid nicks or other damage on the outside surface of the cylinder tube.
9. Careful alignment is necessary when connecting to a
load having an external guide mechanism.
This can lead to damage of the scraper and wear ring, which in
turn can cause malfunction.
As the stroke becomes longer, variations in the center axis become larger. Consider using a connection method (floating mechamism) that is able to absorb these variations. Furthermore,
use the special floating brackets (XC57) which have been provided for the CY3B and CY3R series (pages 28 to 29).
2. Take care regarding rotation of the external slider.
Rotation should be controlled by connecting it to another shaft
(linear guide, etc.).
3. Do not operate with the magnetic coupling out of position.
In case the magnetic coupling is out of position, push the external slider back into the correct position by hand at the end of
the stroke (or correct the piston slider with air pressure).
4. The cylinder is mounted with bolts through the
mounting holes in the end covers. Be sure they are
tightened securely. (CY3R)
5. If gaps occur between the mounting surface and the
end covers when mounting with bolts, perform shim
adjustment using spacers, etc. so that there is no
unreasonable stress. (CY3R)
6. Be sure that both end covers are secured to the
mounting surface before operating the cylinder.
Avoid operation with the external slider secured to the surface.
7. Do not apply a lateral load to the external slider.
When a load is mounted directly to the cylinder, variations in
the alignment of each shaft center cannot be assimilated, which
results in the generation of a lateral load that can cause malfunction. (Figure 1) The cylinder should be operated using a
connection method which allows for assimilation of shaft alignment variations and deflection due to the cylinder's own weight.
A drawing of a recommended mounting is shown in Figure 2.
Mounting
bracket
Direct connection
with bolts, etc. Guide rod
Guide rod
Shock
absorber
Variations in the load and cylinder
shaft alignment cannot be assimilated,
resulting in malfunction.
Figure 1. Incorrect mounting
Rodless cylinder
1. Use caution as the attractive power of the magnets
is very strong.
When removing the external slider and piston slider from the
cylinder tube for maintenance, etc., handle with caution, since
the magnets installed in each slider have very strong attractive
power.
Caution
1. When reattaching the head covers after disassembly, confirm that they are tightened securely. (CY3B)
When disassembling, hold the wrench flat section of one head
cover with a vise, and remove the other cover using a spanner or
adjustable angle wrench on its wrench flat section. When
retightening, first coat with Locktight (No. 542 red), and retighten
3 to 5° past the original position prior to removal.
2. Special tools are necessary for disassembly. (CY3R)
F
Special Tool Number List
Stopper
Shaft alignment variations are assimilated
by providing clearance for the mounting
bracket and cylinder. Moreover, the
mounting bracket is extended above the
cylinder shaft center, so that the cylinder
is not subjected to moment.
Figure 2. Recommended mounting
Note) The drawing shows the
CY3B series.
8. Use caution regarding the allowable load weight
when operating in a vertical direction.
The allowable load weight when operating in a vertical direction
(reference values on page 5) is determined by the model selection method, however, if a load greater than the allowable value
is applied, the magnetic coupling may break and there is a possibility of dropping the load. When using this type of application,
contact SMC regarding the operating conditions (pressure,
load, speed, stroke, frequency, etc.).
Back page 6
Warning
Special tool
Center of axis
Rodless cylinder
Disassembly & Maintenance
Part no. Applicable bore size (mm)
6, 10, 15, 20
25, 32, 40
50
63
CYRZ-V
CYRZ-W
CYRZ-X
CYRZ-Y
3. Use caution when taking off the external slider, as
the piston slider will be directly attracted to it.
When removing the external slider or piston slider from the cylinder tube, first force the sliders out of their magnetically coupled positions and then remove them individually while there is
no longer any holding force. If they are removed when still
magnetically coupled, they will be directly attracted to one another and will not come apart.
4. Do not disassemble the magnetic components (piston slider, external slider).
This can cause a loss of holding force and malfunction.
5. When disassembling to replace the seals and wear
ring, refer to the separate disassembly instructions.
SMC'S GLOBAL MANUFACTURING, DISTRIBUTION
AND SERVICE NETWORK
EUROPE
AUSTRIA
SMC Pneumatik GmbH
BELGIUM
SMC Pneumatics N.V./S.A.
BULGARIA
SMC Industrial Automation Bulgaria EOOD
CROATIA
SMC Industrijska automatika d.o.o.
CZECH REPUBLIC
SMC Industrial Automation CZ s.r.o.
DENMARK
SMC Pneumatik A/S
ESTONIA
SMC Pneumatics Estonia O
FINLAND
SMC Pneumatics Finland OY
FRANCE
SMC Pneumatique SA
GERMANY
SMC Pneumatik GmbH
HUNGARY
SMC Hungary Ipari Automatiz l si Kft.
IRELAND
SMC Pneumatics (Ireland) Ltd.
ITALY
SMC Italia S.p.A.
LATVIA
SMC Pnuematics Latvia SIA
NETHERLANDS
SMC Pneumatics BV.
NORWAY
SMC Pneumatics Norway A/S
POLAND
SMC Industrial Automation Polska Sp.z.o.o.
ROMANIA
SMC Romania s.r.l.
RUSSIA
SMC Pneumatik LLC.
SLOVAKIA
SMC Priemyseln automatiz ci , s.r.o.
SLOVENIA
SMC INDUSTRIJSKA AVTOMATIKA d.o.o.
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
SMC Espa a, S.A.
SWEDEN
SMC Pneumatics Sweden AB
SWITZERLAND
SMC Pneumatik AG.
UK
SMC Pneumatics (U.K.) Ltd.
ASIA
CHINA
SMC (China) Co., Ltd.
HONG KONG
SMC Pneumatics (Hong Kong) Ltd.
INDIA
SMC Pneumatics (India) Pvt. Ltd.
INDONESIA
PT. SMC Pneumatics Indonesia
MALAYSIA
SMC Pneumatics (S.E.A.) Sdn. Bhd.
PHILIPPINES
SHOKETSU-SMC Corporation
SINGAPORE
SMC Pneumatics (S.E.A.) Pte. Ltd.
SOUTH KOREA
SMC Pneumatics Korea Co., Ltd.
TAIWAN
SMC Pneumatics (Taiwan) Co., Ltd.
THAILAND
SMC Thailand Ltd.
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
SMC Pneumatics (Canada) Ltd.
MEXICO
SMC Corporation (Mexico) S.A. de C.V.
USA
SMC Corporation of America
SOUTH AMERICA
ARGENTINA
SMC Argentina S.A.
BOLIVIA
SMC Pneumatics Bolivia S.R.L.
BRAZIL
SMC Pneumaticos Do Brazil Ltda.
CHILE
SMC Pneumatics (Chile) S.A.
VENEZUELA
SMC Neumatica Venezuela S.A.
OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA
SMC Pneumatics (Australia) Pty. Ltd.
NEW ZEALAND
SMC Pneumatics (N.Z.) Ltd.
Safety Instructions Be sure to read Precautions for Handling Pneumatic Devices (M-03-E3A) before using.
1-16-4 Shimbashi, Minato-ku, Tokyo 105-8659 JAPAN
Tel: 03-3502-2740 Fax: 03-3508-2480
URL http://www.smcworld.com
' 2005 SMC Corporation All Rights Reserved
Specifications are subject to change without prior notice
and any obligation on the part of the manufacturer.
D-DN
1st printing GR printing JU 120DN Printed in Japan.
This catalog is printed on recycled paper with concern for the global environment.
Series
12-CY3B
Magnetic rodless cylinder
ø15, ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
How to Order
Clean series
12 — Special treatment on sliding part
Bore size (mm)
12 - CY3B
15
- 300
Cylinder stroke (mm)
Port type
Symbol
Nil
TN
TF
Type
M5 x 0.8
Rc
NPT
G
Bore size
15
20, 25, 32, 40
Model
Model
Bore size
(mm)
Port size Lubrication
12-CY3B15
12-CY3B20
12-CY3B25
12-CY3B32
15
20
25
32
M5 x 0.8
Rc1/8
NPT1/8
Non-lube
G1/8
12-CY3B40
40
Rc1/4
NPT1/4
G1/4
Standard stroke
(mm)
Maximum
manufacturable
stroke
50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500
1000
100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350,
400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800
Cushion
Rubber
Air
앪
1300
(Both sides)
100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400,
450, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000
Note 1) Stroke exceeding the standard stroke but below the maximum possible stroke is available for special order upon request.
Note 2) Intermediate stroke is available by the 1 mm interval.
Note 3) Please contact SMC if the maximum manufacturable stroke is exceeded.
Specifications
Bore size (mm)
15/20/25/32/40
Item
1.05MPa
0.7MPa
ø15, ø20: 0.16MPa, ø25: 0.15MPa, ø32: 0.14MPa, ø40: 0.12MPa
–10°C to 60°C (With no freezing)
50 to 400 mm/s
+1.4
+1.8
0 to 250 st: +1.0
0 , 251 to 1000 st: 0 , 1001 st to: 0
Proof pressure
Max. operating pressure
Min. operating pressure
Ambient and fluid temperature
Piston speed
Stroke length tolerance
Mounting bracket
Grease
2 mounting nuts (Standard)
Fluorine grease
Particle generation grade
(Refer to front matter pages 13 to 22 for details.)
Grade 3
Magnetic holding force (N)
160
Bore size (mm)
15
20
25
32
40
Holding force
137
231
363
588
922
—
Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder 12-CY3B
Dimensions
첸B
4-MM
Thread depth J
0
L -0.1
H
G
E
Cylinder tube outer circumference:
Hard chrome plated + special treatment
2-P (Piping port)
G
Air cylinder
12-CY3B15 to 40
Rotary actuator
øD
X
(I)
NN
øR
Mounting nut
N
K
W
N
F
S + Stroke
Air gripper
NA
F
Directional control
valve
ZZ + Stroke
H
첸B
G
E
Mounting nut
F
Flow control
equipment
NA
NN
N
G
H
I
J
K
L
35
36
46
60
70
16.6
21.6
26.4
33.6
41.6
2
2
2
2
3
10
13
13
16
16
5.5
7.5
7.5
8
11
13
20
20.5
22
29
—
12
15
18
23
6
6
8
8
10
11
8
10
15
16
57
66
70
80
92
P (Piping port)
TN
TF
—
—
NPT1/8
NPT1/8
NPT1/8
NPT1/4
G1/8
G1/8
G1/8
G1/4
N
NA
11
18
18.5
20
26
17
24
30
36
46
NN
M10 x 1
M20 x 1.5
M26 x 1.5
M26 x 1.5
M32 x 2
R
S
W
X
ZZ
—
28
34
40
50
83
106
111
124
150
35
50
50
50
60
19
25
30
40
40
103
132
137
156
182
Mounting nuts (2 pcs.) are shipped together.
d
H
Part number
SNJ-016B
SN-020B
SN-032B
SN-040B
Applicable bore size (mm)
15
20
25, 32
40
B
d
M10 x 1.0
M20 x 1.5
M26 x 1.5
M32 x 2.0
H
B
C
4
8
8
10
14
26
32
41
16.2
30
37
47.3
Clean gas filter
Nil
M5 x 0.8
Rc1/8
Rc1/8
Rc1/8
Rc1/4
MM
M4 x 0.7
M4 x 0.7
M5 x 0.8
M6 x 1
M6 x 1
Air preparation
equipment
F
Pressure switch
E
C
12-CY3B15
12-CY3B20
12-CY3B25
12-CY3B32
12-CY3B40
D
b
Model
B
Fittings & Tubing
(mm)
Model
12-CY3B15
12-CY3B20
12-CY3B25
12-CY3B32
12-CY3B40
Filter, Pressure
control equipment
12- CY3B15
161
Specific Product Precautions
Be sure to read before handling.
12-CY1B/3B/1R/3R/REA. Common Precautions
Caution
Caution
1. Use caution to the rotation of the external slider.
Rotation should be controlled by connecting the external slider to
another shaft (linear guide, etc.).
2. Do not operate with the magnetic coupling out of position.
If the magnetic coupling is out of position, push the external slider
by hand (or the position slider with air pressure) back to the
proper position at the stroke end.
3. Do not apply a lateral load to the external slider.
When a load is mounted directly to the cylinder, variations in the
alignment of each shaft center cannot be offset, which results in
the generation of a lateral load that can cause malfunction. The
cylinder should be operated using a connection method which
allows for shaft alignment variations and deflection due to the
cylinder's own weight. A drawing of a recommended mounting
method is shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1
12- REA
1. Stroke adjustment is provided for position adjustment.
This mechanism is not intended for adjustment of the cushion
effect (smooth start-up, soft stop). This mechanism is for
matching of the cylinder's stroke end position to the mechanical
stopper, etc., of a machine.
2. Stroke adjustment should be conducted with no pressure
supply.
To ensure safety, stroke adjustment should be conducted with no
pressure supply. Before adjustment is performed, shut off the
drive air, release any residual pressure and implement measures
to prevent dropping of workpieces, etc.
Adjustment procedure is shown below.
1) Insert a wrench into the hexagon hole of the adjustment screw
to loosen lock nut A.
2) Rotate the adjustment screw to right and left and move the
cushion ring holder (stroke end) forward and backward to align
the position with that of the external stopper.
3) After the stroke end adjustment is completed, retighten lock nut
A.
Lock nut A
Stopper
Guide rod
Cushion ring holder
Backward Note)
Forward
Backward
Adjusting screw
Forward
Wrench
Rodless cylinder
4. When used for vertical operation, use caution
regarding allowable load.
When used for vertical operation, use caution as there is a
possibility of dropping due to separation of the magnetic
coupling if a load greater than the allowable value is
added. When used for vertical operation, contact SMC for
the operating conditions (pressure, load, speed, stroke,
frequency, etc.).
Refer to Best Pneumatics vol.8 (CY1 series model
selection method) for details.
5. Do not scratch or gouge the external surface of the
cylinder.
It can damage the wear ring, increase particle generation
and cause malfunction.
6. Do not use the cylinder with its body fixed.
Be sure to secure both head covers (or end covers in case
of CY1R) before using the cylinder. Operation of the
cylinder with its body fixed will damage the wear ring,
resulting in increase of particle generation or malfunction.
12- CY1R/3R
Caution
1. Pay attention to the cylinder mounting surface.
If there is any clearance between the end covers on both
ends and the mounting surfaces, adjust the shim with a
spacer for secure installation.
168
Note) Do not move it backward, as it is set to
a full stroke at the time of shipment.
•Adjusting screw width across flats •Lock nut A tightening torque
Model
Width across flats (mm)
Model
Tightening torque (N·m)
12-REA25
5
12-REA25
1.2
12-REA32
5
12-REA32
1.2
12-REA40
6
12-REA40
2.1
12-REA50
8
12-REA50
3.4
12-REA63
8
12-REA63
3.4
3. Throttle type speed controllers are recommended for speed
adjustment, as shown in the table below.
•Recommended speed controller
Model
Model
Elbow type
Straight type
In-line type
12-REA25 10-AS2201F-01-06-X214 10-AS2301F-01-06-X214 10-AS2001F-06-X214
12-REA32 10-AS2201F-02-06-X214 10-AS2301F-02-06-X214 10-AS2001F-06-X214
12-REA40 10-AS2201F-02-06-X214 10-AS2301F-02-06-X214 10-AS2001F-06-X214
12-REA50 10-AS3201F-02-08-X214 10-AS3301F-02-08-X214 10-AS3001F-08-X214
12-REA63 10-AS3201F-02-08-X214 10-AS3301F-02-08-X214 10-AS3001F-08-X214
Although speed adjustment is possible with meter-in and meterout speed controllers, smooth start-up and soft stop may not be
achieved.
In case the mounting orientation is not horizontal, a system with a
pressure regulating circuit on the lower side is recommended. (It
is also effective to shorten start-up delay in rising and for energy
conservation.)
4. Cushion adjustment is not necessary.
The fixed cushion mechanism does not require the conventional
cushion adjustment.
Disassembly and Maintenance
12-CY1B/3B
12- CY1R/3R
1. Use caution as the attractive power of the magnets is very strong.
When removing the external slider and piston slider from the cylinder tube for maintenance, etc., handle with caution, since the magnets
installed in each slider have a very strong attractive force.
Air cylinder
Warning
Figure 2. Correct positioning
3. Do not disassemble the magnetic components (piston slider and external slider).
This can cause a loss of holding force and malfunction.
Directional control
valve
2. Use caution to the direction of the external slider and the piston slider.
Since the external slider and piston slider are directional for ø6, ø10 and holding type L, refer to the figures below when performing
disassembly or maintenance. Put the external slider and piston slider together, and insert the piston slider into the cylinder tube so that
they will have the correct positional relationship as shown in Fig. (2). If they align as shown in Fig. (3), insert the piston slider after turning
it around 180°.
If the direction is not correct, it will be impossible to obtain the specified holding force.
Figure 3. Positioning
in incorrect direction
Example : ø20 to ø63 with L type holding force
4. Since it is possible to change the magnetic holding force (from H type to L type), please contact SMC if this is necessary.
Flow control
equipment
5. When disassembling to replace the seals and wear ring, refer to the separate disassembly instructions.
Caution
6. Special tools are necessary for disassembly.
Filter, Pressure
control equipment
6. Apply additional tightening when remounting the head cover
after disassembly.
When disassembling, hold the wrench flat section of one head
cover with a vice, and remove the other cover using a spanner
or adjustable angle wrench on its wrench flat section. When
retightening, first coat with Loctite (No. 542 red) and retighten
3° to 5° past the original position prior to removal.
Air gripper
1. Use caution when taking off the external slider, as the piston slider will be directly attracted to it.
When removing the external slider or piston slider from the cylinder tube, first force the sliders out of their magnetically coupled positions,
and then remove them individually when there is no longer any holding force. If they are removed while still magnetically coupled, they
will be directly attracted to one another and will not come apart.
Rotary actuator
Caution
F
Special tool
Air preparation
equipment
Fittings & Tubing
Special tool part number list
Part no. Applicable bore size (mm)
6, 10, 15, 20
CYRZ-V
25, 32, 40
CYRZ-W
50
CYRZ-X
63
CYRZ-Y
12- REA
Pressure switch
Warning
Clean gas filter
1. Do not disassemble the product because it may damage the
air cushion mechanism.
Contact SMC when disassembly or maintenance is
necessary .
169
12-CY3R
Series
Magnetic rodless cylinder (Direct mount type)
ø15, ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
How to Order
Port thread type
Clean series
12 — Special treatment on sliding part
Symbol
Nil
Bore size (mm)
TN
TF
12 - CY3R 25
Type
M5 x 0.8
Rc
NPT
G
- 300
Bore size
15
20, 25, 32, 40
N
Standard stroke
N — Without switch rail
∗ Switch rail is not available for 12- series.
Model
Model
Bore size
(mm)
Port size
12-CY3R15
12-CY3R20
12-CY3R25
12-CY3R32
15
20
25
32
M5 x 0.8
Rc1/8
NPT1/8
G1/8
12-CY3R40
40
Rc1/4
NPT1/4
G1/4
Standard stroke (mm)
Maximum manufacturable
stroke (mm)
50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500
1000
100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350,
400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800
1300
Lubrication
Non-lube
Cushion
Rubber
Air
앪
(Both sides)
—
Note 1) Stroke exceeding the standard stroke will be available upon request as special product.
Note 2) Intermediate stroke is available by the 1 mm interval.
Note 3) Please contact SMC if the maximum manufacturable stroke is exceeded.
Specifications
Bore size (mm)
Item
Proof pressure
Max. operating pressure
Min. operating pressure
Ambient and fluid temperature
Piston speed
Stroke length tolerance
Mounting
Grease
15/20/25/32/40
1.05MPa
0.7MPa
ø15, ø20: 0.16MPa, ø25: 0.15MPa, ø32: 0.14MPa, ø40: 0.12MPa
–10°C to 60°C (With no freezing)
50 to 400 mm/s
+1.4
+1.8
0 to 250 st:+1.0
0 , 251 to 1000 st: 0 ,1001 st to 0
Direct mount type
Fluorine grease
Particle generation grade
Grade 3
(Refer to front matter pages 13 to 22 for details.)
Magnetic holding force (N)
164
Bore size (mm)
15
20
25
32
40
Holding force
137
231
363
588
922
Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder
12-CY3R
Dimensions
N
X
Rotary actuator
HB
Air gripper
TC
GW
GP
4-øLD
WP
W
2 x 4-MM thread depth M
K
G
T
PW
4-counter bore øB
Counter bore depth C
Cylinder tube outer
circumference:
Hard chrome plated +
special treatment
Y
0
L -0.1
QW
T
øD
4-J x E
K
F
2-P
(Piping port)
HP
W
X
CB
A
2-Plug
H
HA
Q + Stroke
Directional control
valve
HC
HT
Air cylinder
12-CY3R15 to 40
G
C
CB
G
GP
GW
H
HA
HB
HC
HP
JxE
K
4.2
2
16.6 181.
D
F
5
33
31.5
32
30
171.
31
171. 171.
HT
M5 x 0.8 x 7
14
12-CY3R20 19.5 19.5
5.2
3
21.6 191.
6
39
37.5
39
36
211.
38
241. 241.
M6 x 1 x 8
11
12-CY3R25 18.5 19.5
5.2
3
26.4 18.5
6
44
42.5
44
41
23.5
43
23.5 23.5
M6 x 1 x 8
15
12-CY3R32 10.5 111.
6.5
3
33.6 10.5
7
55
53.5
55
52
291.
54
291. 291.
M8 x 1.25 x 10
13
12-CY3R40 101. 111.
6.5
5
41.6 131.
7
65
63.5
67
62
361.
66
361. 361.
M8 x 1.25 x 10
15
T
TC
W
WP
X
Y
Model
L
LD
M
MM
N
PW
Q
QW
12-CY3R15
53
4.3
5
M4 x 0.7
161.
32
184
18
191. 171.
25
161.
18
54.5 194
12-CY3R20
62
5.6
5
M4 x 0.7
171.
38
195
17
20.5 201.
40
191.
22
641. 107
12-CY3R25
70
5.6
6
M5 x 0.8
16.5
43
105
20
21.5 22.5
40
21.5
28
721. 117
12-CY3R32
76
71.
7
M6 x 1
18.5
54
116
26
241. 281.
50
271.
35
791. 130
12-CY3R40
90
71.
8
M6 x 1
111.
134
34
261. 331.
60
321.
40
931. 148
64
Z
Clean gas filter
B
Air preparation
equipment
A
12-CY3R15 10.5 181.
Pressure switch
(mm)
Model
Fittings & Tubing
Filter, Pressure
control equipment
Flow control
equipment
Z + Stroke
165
Specific Product Precautions
Be sure to read before handling.
12-CY1B/3B/1R/3R/REA. Common Precautions
Caution
Caution
1. Use caution to the rotation of the external slider.
Rotation should be controlled by connecting the external slider to
another shaft (linear guide, etc.).
2. Do not operate with the magnetic coupling out of position.
If the magnetic coupling is out of position, push the external slider
by hand (or the position slider with air pressure) back to the
proper position at the stroke end.
3. Do not apply a lateral load to the external slider.
When a load is mounted directly to the cylinder, variations in the
alignment of each shaft center cannot be offset, which results in
the generation of a lateral load that can cause malfunction. The
cylinder should be operated using a connection method which
allows for shaft alignment variations and deflection due to the
cylinder's own weight. A drawing of a recommended mounting
method is shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1
12- REA
1. Stroke adjustment is provided for position adjustment.
This mechanism is not intended for adjustment of the cushion
effect (smooth start-up, soft stop). This mechanism is for
matching of the cylinder's stroke end position to the mechanical
stopper, etc., of a machine.
2. Stroke adjustment should be conducted with no pressure
supply.
To ensure safety, stroke adjustment should be conducted with no
pressure supply. Before adjustment is performed, shut off the
drive air, release any residual pressure and implement measures
to prevent dropping of workpieces, etc.
Adjustment procedure is shown below.
1) Insert a wrench into the hexagon hole of the adjustment screw
to loosen lock nut A.
2) Rotate the adjustment screw to right and left and move the
cushion ring holder (stroke end) forward and backward to align
the position with that of the external stopper.
3) After the stroke end adjustment is completed, retighten lock nut
A.
Lock nut A
Stopper
Guide rod
Cushion ring holder
Backward Note)
Forward
Backward
Adjusting screw
Forward
Wrench
Rodless cylinder
4. When used for vertical operation, use caution
regarding allowable load.
When used for vertical operation, use caution as there is a
possibility of dropping due to separation of the magnetic
coupling if a load greater than the allowable value is
added. When used for vertical operation, contact SMC for
the operating conditions (pressure, load, speed, stroke,
frequency, etc.).
Refer to Best Pneumatics vol.8 (CY1 series model
selection method) for details.
5. Do not scratch or gouge the external surface of the
cylinder.
It can damage the wear ring, increase particle generation
and cause malfunction.
6. Do not use the cylinder with its body fixed.
Be sure to secure both head covers (or end covers in case
of CY1R) before using the cylinder. Operation of the
cylinder with its body fixed will damage the wear ring,
resulting in increase of particle generation or malfunction.
12- CY1R/3R
Caution
1. Pay attention to the cylinder mounting surface.
If there is any clearance between the end covers on both
ends and the mounting surfaces, adjust the shim with a
spacer for secure installation.
168
Note) Do not move it backward, as it is set to
a full stroke at the time of shipment.
•Adjusting screw width across flats •Lock nut A tightening torque
Model
Width across flats (mm)
Model
Tightening torque (N·m)
12-REA25
5
12-REA25
1.2
12-REA32
5
12-REA32
1.2
12-REA40
6
12-REA40
2.1
12-REA50
8
12-REA50
3.4
12-REA63
8
12-REA63
3.4
3. Throttle type speed controllers are recommended for speed
adjustment, as shown in the table below.
•Recommended speed controller
Model
Model
Elbow type
Straight type
In-line type
12-REA25 10-AS2201F-01-06-X214 10-AS2301F-01-06-X214 10-AS2001F-06-X214
12-REA32 10-AS2201F-02-06-X214 10-AS2301F-02-06-X214 10-AS2001F-06-X214
12-REA40 10-AS2201F-02-06-X214 10-AS2301F-02-06-X214 10-AS2001F-06-X214
12-REA50 10-AS3201F-02-08-X214 10-AS3301F-02-08-X214 10-AS3001F-08-X214
12-REA63 10-AS3201F-02-08-X214 10-AS3301F-02-08-X214 10-AS3001F-08-X214
Although speed adjustment is possible with meter-in and meterout speed controllers, smooth start-up and soft stop may not be
achieved.
In case the mounting orientation is not horizontal, a system with a
pressure regulating circuit on the lower side is recommended. (It
is also effective to shorten start-up delay in rising and for energy
conservation.)
4. Cushion adjustment is not necessary.
The fixed cushion mechanism does not require the conventional
cushion adjustment.
Disassembly and Maintenance
12-CY1B/3B
12- CY1R/3R
1. Use caution as the attractive power of the magnets is very strong.
When removing the external slider and piston slider from the cylinder tube for maintenance, etc., handle with caution, since the magnets
installed in each slider have a very strong attractive force.
Air cylinder
Warning
Figure 2. Correct positioning
3. Do not disassemble the magnetic components (piston slider and external slider).
This can cause a loss of holding force and malfunction.
Directional control
valve
2. Use caution to the direction of the external slider and the piston slider.
Since the external slider and piston slider are directional for ø6, ø10 and holding type L, refer to the figures below when performing
disassembly or maintenance. Put the external slider and piston slider together, and insert the piston slider into the cylinder tube so that
they will have the correct positional relationship as shown in Fig. (2). If they align as shown in Fig. (3), insert the piston slider after turning
it around 180°.
If the direction is not correct, it will be impossible to obtain the specified holding force.
Figure 3. Positioning
in incorrect direction
Example : ø20 to ø63 with L type holding force
4. Since it is possible to change the magnetic holding force (from H type to L type), please contact SMC if this is necessary.
Flow control
equipment
5. When disassembling to replace the seals and wear ring, refer to the separate disassembly instructions.
Caution
6. Special tools are necessary for disassembly.
Filter, Pressure
control equipment
6. Apply additional tightening when remounting the head cover
after disassembly.
When disassembling, hold the wrench flat section of one head
cover with a vice, and remove the other cover using a spanner
or adjustable angle wrench on its wrench flat section. When
retightening, first coat with Loctite (No. 542 red) and retighten
3° to 5° past the original position prior to removal.
Air gripper
1. Use caution when taking off the external slider, as the piston slider will be directly attracted to it.
When removing the external slider or piston slider from the cylinder tube, first force the sliders out of their magnetically coupled positions,
and then remove them individually when there is no longer any holding force. If they are removed while still magnetically coupled, they
will be directly attracted to one another and will not come apart.
Rotary actuator
Caution
F
Special tool
Air preparation
equipment
Fittings & Tubing
Special tool part number list
Part no. Applicable bore size (mm)
6, 10, 15, 20
CYRZ-V
25, 32, 40
CYRZ-W
50
CYRZ-X
63
CYRZ-Y
12- REA
Pressure switch
Warning
Clean gas filter
1. Do not disassemble the product because it may damage the
air cushion mechanism.
Contact SMC when disassembly or maintenance is
necessary .
169
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder New
RoHS
ø6, ø10, ø15, ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
Overall
length
Weight
15
Max.
% reduced
2.12 lbs (0.96 kg)
(Existing model 2.5 lbs (1.13 kg))
15 mm shortened
Max.
240 mm (Existing model 255 mm)
(CY1S 40-100 stroke)
(CY1S 15-100 stroke)
Reduced in length
Improved durability
Lub-retainers are mounted on the internal and external
surfaces of the cylinder tube to maintain the lubrication.
External surface lub-retainers
Cylinder tube
Adjustment bolt improves
stroke accuracy/repeatability.
Stroke position can be maintained with the adjustment bolt
positioned next to the shock absorber, so stroke adjustment
is not necessary.
Adjustment bolt
Internal surface lub-retainers
Series CY1S
Shock absorber
CAT.NAS20-227A
Series CY1S
Reduced in weight
Weightisisreduced
reducedwith
withthe
theredesign
redesignofofthe
theslide
slide
Weight
blockand
andreducing
reducingthe
thethickness
thicknessofofthe
theplate.
plate.
block
Bore size
size (mm)
(mm)
Bore
66
(kg)lbs (kg)
Reduction rate
rate Existing
Existing
Reduction
modelmodel
8%
0.82 (0.37)
8%
0.37
NewCY1S
New
CY1S
0.34
0.34
0.59
0.59
10
10
15
15
0.96
0.96
1.68
1.68
20
20
25
25
2.02
2.02
3.45
3.45
32
32
40
40
5.36
5.36
13%
13%
15%
15%
1.5 (0.68)
0.68
2.5 (1.13)
1.13
13%
13%
10%
10%
4.3 (1.93)
1.93
5.0 (2.25)
2.25
12%
12%
14%
14%
8.7 (3.94)
3.94
13.7 (6.23)
6.23
Slide block
block
Slide
At100
100stroke
stroke
At
Plate
Plate
Reduced in length
Overall length
length is
is reduced,
reduced, but
but interchangeable
interchangeable
Overall
with the
the existing
existing model.
model.
with
(mm)
(mm)
NewCY1S
New
CY1S
Bore size
size
Bore
(mm)
(mm)
Existing
Existing
model
Bilateral piping
piping type
type Centralized
Centralizedpiping
pipingtype
type model
Bilateral
Length
Length Overall
Overall Length
Overall Length
Overall
reduction
reduction length
length reduction
length reduction
length
Overall
Overall
length
length
66
10
10
162
162
172
172
66
88
166
166
176
176
22
44
168
168
180
180
15
15
20
20
187
187
206
206
10
10
99
192
192
211
211
55
44
197
197
215
215
25
25
32
32
206
206
228
228
211
211
234
234
44
44
215
215
238
238
40
40
240
240
99
10
10
15
15
246
246
99
255
255
At100
100stroke
stroke
At
Bilateral piping and centralized piping versions available
Bilateral
Bilateral piping
piping type
type
Port
PP22 Port
Centralized
Centralized piping
piping type
type
Port
PP11 Port
PP11
PP11
PP22
PP22
Pressure is
is applied
applied
PP11 Pressure
Operating direction
direction
Operating
Operating direction
direction
Operating
Pressure is
is applied
applied
PP22 Pressure
Features 11
Features
Port
PP22 Port
Pressure is
is applied
applied
PP11 Pressure
Pressure is
is applied
applied
PP22 Pressure
3-Options available for stroke adjustment
Bumper bolt (resin tipped)
Bumper bolt
(Same on the opposite side)
Shock absorber + Adjustment bolt (metal ended)
Adjustment bolt
(Same on the opposite side)
Shock absorber
(Same on the opposite side)
Reduced in length
Shock absorber + Adjustment bolt (metal ended) on one side
Bumper bolt (resin tipped) on one side
Adjustment bolt
Shock absorber
Bumper bolt
New
Improved auto switch mounting
New
7Auto switch can be mounted in any desired
position. (D-M9;, D-A9;)
• The auto switch can be fixed
in any desired position with a
switch spacer.
• This reduces man-hours for
mounting.
Shock absorber
The RJ series soft stop shock
absorbers fitted as standard
Auto switch
Switch spacer
5Auto switch mounting
rail fitted as standard
Auto switch rail is suitable for various switch specifications.
Refer to page 1 for applicable auto switches.
M6
M10
M8
(For ø6) (For ø10, ø15) (For ø20)
M14
M20
(For ø25)
(For ø32, ø40)
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder Series Variations
Series
Bearing
Piping type
:
Bore size (mm)
Bilateral
20piping Centralized
25piping
6
10
15
20
25
32
New
40
50
63
Made to
Order
Page
2
2
Pneumatics
Best Pneumatics
CY3B
Standard Air Cylinders
Basic type
CY3R
New CY1S
Basic type
Direct mount
Compact Air Cylinders
Floating Joints
Water Resistant Cylinders
Rodless Cylinders
Air-hydro Units
Auto Switches
Ver.
1
Note 1)
Slide bearing
1
2
2
Pneumatics
Best Pneumatics
Standard Air Cylinders
Compact Air Cylinders
Floating Joints
Water Resistant Cylinders
Rodless Cylinders
Air-hydro Units
Auto Switches
Ver.
1
1
2
Best Pneumatics
Standard Air Cylinders
Ball bushing
Compact Air Cylinders
Floating Joints
Water Resistant Cylinders
Rodless Cylinders
Air-hydro Units
Auto Switches
Ver.
1
1
2
2
Pneumatics
Best Pneumatics
CY1H
Standard Air Cylinders
Compact Air Cylinders
Floating Joints
Water Resistant Cylinders
Rodless Cylinders
Air-hydro Units
Auto Switches
Ver.
1
1
2
2
Pneumatics
Best Pneumatics
CY1HT
CY1F
Standard Air Cylinders
Compact Air Cylinders
Floating Joints
Water Resistant Cylinders
Linear guide
type
Best Pneumatics
Page 1174
Best Pneumatics
Page 1178
Page 1 of this catalog
2
Pneumatics
CY1L
Series CY1S
Note 2)
Rodless Cylinders
Air-hydro Units
Auto Switches
Ver.
1
1
2
2
Pneumatics
Best Pneumatics
Standard Air Cylinders
Compact Air Cylinders
Floating Joints
Water Resistant Cylinders
Rodless Cylinders
Air-hydro Units
Auto Switches
Ver.
1
1
2
2
Pneumatics
Best Pneumatics
CYP
Standard Air Cylinders
Compact Air Cylinders
Floating Joints
Water Resistant Cylinders
Rodless Cylinders
Air-hydro Units
Auto Switches
1
Ver.
1
Best Pneumatics
Page 1206
Best Pneumatics
Page 1218
Best Pneumatics
Page 1218
Best Pneumatics
Page 1239
Best Pneumatics
Page 1255
Note 1) Except ø6 Note 2) Refer to pages 9 and 10 for made to order specifications.
Features 2
Series
CY1S
Model Selection
Selection Flow Chart
Operating Conditions
D: Bore size (mm)
L: Stroke (mm)
m: Load mass (kg)
Va: Piston speed (mm/s)
P: Operating pressure (MPa)
E: Kinetic energy (J)
Review the
operating
conditions.
Review the
operating conditions.
Mounting orientation (Horizontal, Vertical)
NG
) mh: Allowable load mass by thrust in
horizontal operation
mv: Allowable load mass by thrust in
vertical operation
mh, mv: See Table 1.
Check allowable load
mass by thrust.
m a mh, mv
OK
Reference
1
Check allowable load
mass by thrust.
Reference
2
NG
Check allowable load
mass by stroke.
Check allowable load
mass by stroke.
m a mst
) mst: See Graphs (1) to (7).
OK
Reference
3
NG
Bumper bolt
Adjustment bolt
External stopper Note 2) 3)
NG
OK
Yes
Note 1)
Intermediate
stop/Method
Yes (Pneumatic circuit)
None
Check operating
pressure.
P a Ps
) Ps: Allowable pressure
Refer to front matter 11.
Consider load factor
on guides.
Judgement of
guide load factor
[£A] a 1
Note 4, 5)
Check kinetic energy.
E a Es
OK
OK
NG
) Es: Allowable kinetic energy
Refer to front matter 11.
Model determination
Note 1) Stroke adjustment with either a bumper bolt or adjustment bolt is considered as an intermediate stop.
Note 2) When an intermediate stop is performed with an external stopper, consider the dynamic load as shown below.
mBumper bolt: D = 4/100
mShock absorber and air cushion: D = 1/100
In addition to this, check the judgement results of the guide load factor. (D: Bumper coefficient)
Note 3) When an external stopper is used in conjunction with a shock absorber, check the model selection of shock absorber separately.
Note 4) This cylinder cannot perform an intermediate stop with the pneumatic circuit in vertical operation.
The intermediate stop is only performed with a bumper bolt, adjustment bolt or external stopper.
Note 5) When an intermediate stop is performed with the pneumatic circuit, the stopping accuracy may vary significantly.
If accuracy is required, be sure to perform the intermediate stop with a bumper bolt, adjustment bolt or external stopper.
Front matter 1
Model Selection
Series CY1S
1 Check allowable load mass by thrust.
In this series, the work load and the maximum operating pressure are restricted to prevent the magnetic coupling from being separated.
Ensure that the work load mass and operating pressure are within the values in Table 1.
Table 1. Allowable load mass by thrust and maximum operating pressure
Bore size (mm)
Horizontal operation
mh [kg]
Horizontal operation
Max. operating pressure
Ph [MPa] Note)
Vertical operation
mv [kg]
6
1.8
1.0
10
3.0
2.7
15
7.0
20
12
25
20
18.5
32
30
30
40
50
47
Vertical operation
Max. operating pressure
Pv [MPa]
0.55
7.0
0.70
11
0.65
(1 MPa = 145 psi, 1 Kg = 2.2 lbs)
Note) Without stroke adjustment
When stroke adjustment is performed with bumper bolt, adjustment bolt, or intermediate stop is performed with an external stopper, the
maximum operating pressure should be as shown in the front matter 11.
2 Check allowable load mass by stroke.
In this series, guide shafts are assembled to support the load.
Deflection of the guide shaft increases due to work load mass and rolling moment (M2), so the work load mass and stroke is restricted.
Check that the load mass is within the allowable load mass by stroke: mst from Graphs (1) to (7) for each bore size.
[Horizontal mounting and Ceiling mounting]
[Wall mounting]
[Vertical mounting]
The allowable load mass by stroke range varies depending on
the y direction of the loads center of gravity.
The allowable load mass by stroke range varies depending
on the z direction of the loads center of gravity.
Load mass is not restricted
by stroke.
M2
M2
Y
Z
A
X
y
mst x g
X
z
mst x g
A: Distance between the center of the guide shaft and the upper surface of the slide block
Front matter 2
Series CY1S
2 Check allowable load mass by stroke.
Selection Graph
ø6
[Graph 1] Allowable load mass by stroke
10
y, z + A a 100
0
100
200
300
Load mass [kg]
Load mass [kg]
10
1
ø10
[Graph 2] Allowable load mass by stroke
y, z + A a 200
y, z + A a 300
1
400
0
100
200
Stroke [mm]
300
400
500
600
Stroke [mm]
ø15
[Graph 3] Allowable load mass by stroke
ø20
[Graph 4] Allowable load mass by stroke
100
10
Load mass [kg]
Load mass [kg]
y, z + A = 0
y, z + A = 100
y, z + A = 200
y, z + A = 300
1
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
y, z + A a 100
10
y, z + A = 200
y, z + A = 300
1
800
0
200
400
Stroke [mm]
ø25
1000
100
y, z + A = 0
y, z + A = 50
Load mass [kg]
y, z + A = 0
y, z + A = 50
10
y, z + A = 100
1
y, z + A = 200
0.1
10
y, z + A = 100
y, z + A = 200
y, z + A = 300
1
y, z + A = 300
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
Stroke [mm]
0.1
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
ø40
(1 Kg = 2.2 lbs)
100
Load mass [kg]
y, z + A = 0
y, z + A = 50
y, z + A = 100
y, z + A = 200
10
y, z + A = 300
0
200
400
600
800
1000
Stroke [mm]
Front matter 3
1600
Stroke [mm]
[Graph 7] Allowable load mass by stroke
1
1200
ø32
[Graph 6] Allowable load mass by stroke
100
Load mass [kg]
800
Stroke [mm]
[Graph 5] Allowable load mass by stroke
0.01
600
1200
1400
1600
If load center of gravity exceeds the value of y, z + A on the
graph, please consult SMC.
Model Selection Series
CY1S
3 Consider load factor on guides.
3 — : Types of moment applied to rodless cylinders
Multiple moments may be generated depending on the mounting orientation, load, and position of the center of gravity.
Coordinates and Moments
M3: Yaw moment
The direction of the axis, X, Y and Z are
based on the cylinder mounting orientation
shown on the right.
Consider the direction of the axis for each
mounting direction.
Z
M1: Pitch moment
Y
X
M2: Roll moment
Static moment calculation by mounting style
[Horizontal mounting]
[Ceiling mounting]
M1
M2
y
X
Y
x
mxg
M1
M2
X
[Wall mounting]
x
y
M2
[Vertical mounting]
M3
A
Y
mxg
mxg
A
x
z
X
M3
Z
Z y
mxg
z M1
Y
Table 2. Mounting orientation and static moment
Mounting orientation Horizontal mounting Ceiling mounting Wall mounting Vertical mounting
m
Static load
—
m x g x (z + A)
mxgxx
mxgxx
M1
m x g x (z + A)
—
mxgxy
mxgxy
M2
mxgxx
mxgxy
—
—
M3
A: Distance between the center of the guide shaft and the upper surface of the slide
Bore size (mm)
Static
moment
6
10
15
20
25
32
40
block (See the table on the right.)
A [mm]
19
21
25
27
33
40
49
Dynamic moment calculation by mounting style
M1
Va
Va
A
M3
z
M1E
M3E
y
FE
FE
mxg
mxg
Table 3. Mounting orientation and static moment
Static
moment
Mounting orientation Horizontal mounting Ceiling mounting Wall mounting Vertical mounting
Bumper bolt: D = 4/100
Dynamic load
D x 1.4 x Va x m x g
Shock absorber: D = 1/100
FE
1/3 x FE x (z + A)
M1E
Dynamic moment does not occur.
M2E
1/3 x FE x y
M3E
Regardless of the mounting orientation, dynamic moment is calculated with the formulas above.
Front matter 4
Series CY1S
3 Consider load factor on guides.
3 — @ Allowable load mass on guides/Allowable moment
Table 4. Allowable load mass on guides and moment
Bore size
(mm)
6
10
15
20
25
32
40
Allowable load mass on guides
m [kg]
9
15
35
60
104
195
244
Allowable moment [N·m]
M1
M2
M3
1.3
1.4
1.3
2.6
2.9
2.6
8.6
8.9
8.6
17
18
17
30
35
30
67
82
67
96
124
96
The table above indicates the maximum performance of the guide,
but does not show the actual allowable work load mass.
Refer to Graphs (8) to (13) for correct allowable mass by piston speed.
m
[Graph 8] Allowable load mass on guides (ø6 to ø15)
400
CY1S40-Z
Load mass m [kg]
Load mass m [kg]
CY1S15-Z
CY1S10-Z
10
CY1S6-Z
3
100
200
300
Piston speed [mm/s]
[Graph 10] Allowable moment (ø6 to ø15)
M1, M3
CY1S25-Z
CY1S20-Z
200
300
Piston speed [mm/s]
[Graph 11] Allowable moment (ø20 to ø40)
Moment M1, M3 [Nm]
Moment M1, M3 [Nm]
100
400
M1, M3
200
10
CY1S15-Z
CY1S10-Z
0.5
100
CY1S32-Z
20
100
400
20
1
m
[Graph 9] Allowable load mass on guides (ø20 to ø40)
50
CY1S6-Z
200
300
Piston speed [mm/s]
M2
CY1S40-Z
CY1S32-Z
CY1S25-Z
CY1S20-Z
10
5
100
400
[Graph 12] Allowable moment (ø6 to ø15)
100
200
300
Piston speed [mm/s]
400
M2
[Graph 13] Allowable moment (ø20 to ø40)
20
200
10
100
CY1S15-Z
CY1S10-Z
1
0.5
100
Front matter 5
CY1S6-Z
200
300
Piston speed [mm/s]
CY1S32-Z
Moment M2 [Nm]
Moment M2 [Nm]
CY1S40-Z
CY1S25-Z
CY1S20-Z
10
400
5
100
200
300
Piston speed [mm/s]
400
(1 MPa = 145 psi, 1 Kg = 2.2 lbs)
Model Selection
Series CY1S
3 — . Consideration of guide load factor
Work load mass and allowable moment varies depending on the load mounting method, stroke, cylinder mounting orientation and
piston speed.
Whether the cylinder is suitable or not is decided by the allowable load mass on guides in the graphs.
The selection calculation is shown below.
It is necessary to consider i) allowable load mass on guides, ii) static moment and iii) dynamic moment (when the slide block
collides with the stopper).
i) ·ii) is calculated with Va (average speed) and iii) is calculated with V (collision speed V = 1.4Va).
Calculate mmax of i) from the allowable load mass on guides in Graphs (8) and (9),
and calculate Mmax of ii) and iii) from the allowable moment (M1, M2, M3) in Graphs (10), (11), (12) and (13).
Sum of guide
load factors
3A
=
Load mass (m)
Allowable load mass on guides (mmax)
+
Static moment (M) Note 1)
Allowable static moment (Mmax)
+
Dynamic moment (ME) Note 2)
Allowable dynamic moment (MEmax)
a1
Note 1) Moment caused by the load etc., with cylinder in resting condition
Note 2) Moment caused by the load equivalent to impact at the stroke end (at the time of impact with stopper)
Note 3) Several moments might be generated depending on the cylinder mounting orientation or the load center of gravity, so the sum
of the allowable load mass on guides, allowable static moment and allowable dynamic moment will be the sum of all these guide
load factors.
Calculation method to determine the center of gravity when several loads are mounted on the cylinder
When several loads are mounted on the cylinder, it is difficult to calculate the center of gravity.
As shown in the figure below, the center of gravity of the load is calculated from the total load mass and of center of gravity for all the loads.
Load Blocking
A
zb
za
Xb,Xc,Xd
Wb
Z
yd
yc
Wc
X
Wa
Wd
Y
zc,zd
Y
Mass and center of gravity of the load
Load no.
Wn
Wa
Wb
Wc
Wd
Mass
mn
ma
mb
mc
md
Calculation for Overall Center of Gravity
Center of gravity
X-axis
xn
xa
xb
xc
xd
Y-axis
yn
ya
yb
yc
yd
Z-axis
zn
za
zb
zc
zd
Refer to the following sections 1 to 4 to calculate the center of gravity and the total load.
mt = 3mn …:
X =
1
x 3 (mn x xn) …………@
mt
Y =
1
x 3 (mn x yn) ………….
mt
Z =
1
x 3 {mn x (A + zn)} …;
mt
(n = a,b,c,d)
Refer to front matter 7 for detailed selection procedure.
Front matter 6
Series CY1S
Calculation of Guide Load Factor
The selection calculation finds the load factors (An) of the items below, where the total does not exceed 1.
Load factor An
Item
Note
1: Maximum load mass
A1 = m/mmax
Examine m.
mmax is the max. load mass for Va.
2: Static moment
A2 = M/Mmax
Examine M1, M2, M3.
Mmax is the allowable moment for Va.
3: Dynamic moment
A3 = ME/MEmax
Examine M1E, M3E.
MEmax is the allowable moment for V.
Calculation example 7 Mounting on horizontal wall
[1] Operating Conditions
CY1SG25-600
Wa: Connection plate t = 10 (1.5 kg)
Cylinder: CY1SG25-600
Cushion: Shock absorber
Mounting: Horizontal wall mounting
Speed: Va = 250 [mm/s]
Wc: Rod L = 50 (0.5 kg)
[2] Load Blocking
A = 33
Wd: Workpiece (2.5 kg)
50
Wb: Arm L = 105 (1.0 kg)
5
Z
X
0
50
25
Mass and center of gravity of the load
Load no.
Wn
Wa
Wb
Wc
Wd
105
Y
Mass
Center of gravity
mn
X-axis
Y-axis
1.5 kg
0 mm
0 mm
1.0 kg
0 mm
0 mm
50 mm
0.5 kg
0 mm
25 mm
105 mm
2.5 kg
0 mm
50 mm
105 mm
n = a,b,c,d
[3] Calculation for Overall Center of Gravity
(1 Kg = 2.2 lbs)
mt = 3 mn
= 1.5 + 1.0 + 0.5 + 2.5
= 5.5 kg
X = 0 mm
(The center of gravity in the x direction of all work pieces is 0, so X = 0 mm.)
1
Y =
x 3 (mn x yn)
mt
1
=
x (1.5 x 0 + 1.0 x 0 + 0.5 x 25 + 2.5 x 50)
5.5
= 25 mm
1
Z =
x 3 {mn x (A + zn)}
mt
1
=
x {1.5 x (33 + 5) + 1.0 x (33 + 50) + 0.5 x (33 + 105) + 2.5 x (33 + 105)}
5.5
= 100 mm
xn
yn
Z-axis
zn
5 mm
[4] Check the allowable load.
Item
Result
Note
(1) Check allowable load
mass by thrust.
Work load is 5.5 kg < 20 kg. OK
Check allowable load by thrust.
The bore size is ø25, so the allowable load by thrust will be 20 kg.
(2) Allowable load by stroke
Work load is 5.5 kg < 20 kg. OK
The load is restricted to 20 kg when the stroke is 600 mm and Z = 100 mm taken from
Graph (5) C(See the next page).
Front matter 7
Model Selection
Series CY1S
[5] Judgement of Guide Load Factor
Load factor An
Item
Load mass
Note
A1 = m/mmax
Examine m.
Find the value of mmax when
Va = 250 mm/s from Graph (9) A.
M2 = m x g x Z
= 5.5 x 9.8 x 100/1000
= 5.4 [N·m]
A2 = M2/M2max
= 5.4/28.0
= 0.19
Examine M2.
M1, M3 values do not apply to this example.
FE = 1.4 x Va x m x g x D
= 1.4 x 250 x 5.5 x 9.8 x 1/100
= 188.7 [N]
Calculate for the impact load.
Since the impact is absorbed by shock absorber,
the bumper coefficient D = 1/100
M1E = 1/3 x FE x Z
= 1/3 x 188.7 x 100/1000
= 6.3 [N·m]
Examine M1E. Calculate the collision speed V.
V = 1.4 x Va
V = 1.4 x 250
V = 350 mm/s
= 5.5/83.2
= 0.07
m
Static moment
Z
(A)
(z)
M2
Refer to [3] Calculation for Overall Center of Gravity
in the Z-axis on front matter 7.
Find the value M2max when
Va = 250 mm/s from Graph (13) ,.
mxg
Dynamic moment
M1
Va
(A)
Z
M1E
(z)
mxg
A3A = M1E/M1max
Va
M3E
Find the value M1Emax when
Va = 350 mm/s from Graph (11) ?.
= 6.3/17.1
= 0.37
M3
Y
mxg
Judgement
M3E = 1/3 x FE x Y
= 1/3 x 188.7 x 25/1000
= 1.6 [N·m]
A3B = M3E/M3max
= 1.6/17.1
= 0.09
Examine M3E.
3An = A1 + A2 + A3A + A3B
= 0.07 + 0.19 + 0.37 + 0.09
= 0.72
3An = 0.72 a 1, so the cylinder can be used.
ø25
[Graph 5] Allowable load mass by stroke
Refer to [3] Calculation for Overall Center of Gravity
in the Y-axis on front matter 7.
From the results above,
Find the value M3Emax when Va = 350 mm/s from Graph (11) +.
m
[Graph 9] Allowable load mass on guides
400
100
1
Load mass m [kg]
10
y, Z = 100
0.1
0.01
0
200
400
600
800
1000
Stroke [mm]
1200
1400
M2
[Graph 13] Allowable moment
100
100
Moment M2 [Nm]
200
CY1S25-Z
10
5
100
250
Piston speed [mm/s]
400
CY1S25-Z
250
Piston speed [mm/s]
400
M1, M3
[Graph 11] Allowable moment
200
100
20
100
1600
Moment M1, M3 [Nm]
Load mass m [kg]
CY1S25-Z
10
5
100
350 400
Piston speed [mm/s]
(1 N•m = 0.74 lbf•ft, 1 Kg = 2.2 lbs)
Front matter 8
Series CY1S
Calculation of Guide Load Factor
Calculation example 5 Vertical mounting
[1] Operating Conditions
Cylinder: CY1SG20-700
Cushion: Shock absorber
Mounting: Vertical mounting
Speed: Va = 200 [mm/s]
CY1SG20-700
Wa: Connection plate t = 10 (1.0 kg)
Wb: Arm L = 100 (1.0 kg)
Wc: Rod L = 50 (0.5 kg)
Wd: Workpiece (3.0 kg)
[2] Load Blocking
Mass and center of gravity of the load
100
5
50
A = 27
Y
Load no.
Wn
25
O
Y
50
Wa
Wb
Wc
Wd
Mass
Center of gravity
mn
X-axis
Y-axis
1.0 kg
0 mm
0 mm
1.0 kg
0 mm
0 mm
50 mm
0.5 kg
0 mm
25 mm
100 mm
3.0 kg
0 mm
50 mm
xn
(1 Kg = 2.2 lbs)
Z-axis
yn
zn
5 mm
100 mm
n = a, b, c, d
Z
X
[3] Calculation for Overall Center of Gravity
mt = 3 mn
= 1.0 + 1.0 + 0.5 + 3.0
= 5.5 kg
X = 0 mm
(The center of gravity in the x direction of all work pieces is 0, so X = 0 mm.)
1
Y =
x 3 (mn x yn)
mt
1
=
x (1.0 x 0 + 1.0 x 0 + 0.5 x 25 + 3.0 x 50)
5.5
= 30 mm
1
Z =
x 3 {mn x (A + zn)}
mt
1
=
x {1.0 x (27 + 5) + 1.0 x (27 + 50) + 0.5 x (27 + 100) + 3.0 x (27 + 100)}
5.5
= 101 mm
[4] Check the allowable load.
Item
(1) Check allowable load
mass by thrust.
(2) Allowable load by stroke
Front matter 9
Result
Work load is 5.5 kg < 11 kg. OK
No restriction
Note
Check the allowable load for vertical mounting.
The bore size is ø20, so the maximum load for vertical mounting will be 11 kg.
The cylinder is mounted in the vertical direction, and the load generates no rolling
moment, so there is not restriction.
Model Selection
Series CY1S
[5] Judgement of Guide Load Factor
Load factor An
Item
Note
Load mass
A1 = 0
In case of vertical mounting, no static load is applied.
Static moment
M1 = m x g x Z
= 5.5 x 9.8 x 101/1000
= 5.4 [N·m]
A2A = M1/M1max
= 5.4/17.0
= 0.32
Examine M1.
M3 = m x g x Y
= 5.5 x 9.8 x 30/1000
= 1.6 [N·m]
A2B = M3/M3max
= 1.6/17.0
= 0.10
Examine M3.
M1
(A)
(z)
mxg
Y
Refer to [3] Calculation for Overall Center of Gravity
in the Y-axis on front matter 7.
Find the value of M3max when
Va = 200 mm/s from Graph (11) A.
M2 value does not apply to this example.
mxg
Dynamic moment
Va
M1
(A)
mxg
M1
(z)
Z
FE = 1.4 x Va x m x g x D
= 1.4 x 200 x 5.5 x 9.8 x 1/100
= 150.9 [N]
Calculate the impact load.
Since the impact is absorbed by shock absorber,
the bumper coefficient D = 1/100
M1E = 1/3 x FE x Z
= 1/3 x 150.9 x 101/1000
= 5.1 [N·m]
Examine M1E. Calculate the collision speed V.
V = 1.4 x Va
V = 1.4 x 200
V = 280 mm/s
A3A = M1E/M1max
= 5.1/12.1
= 0.42
FE
Va
M3
M3E
Find the value of M1max when
Va = 200 mm/s from Graph (11) C.
Z
M3
Y
Refer to [3] Calculation for Overall Center of Gravity
in the Z-axis on front matter 7.
mxg
FE
Judgement
Find the value of M1Emax when
Va = 280 mm/s from Graph (11) ,.
M3E = 1/3 x FE x Y
= 1/3 x 150.9 x 30/1000
= 1.5 [N·m]
A3B = M3E/M3max
= 1.5/12.1
= 0.12
Examine M3E.
3An = A1 + A2A + A2B + A3A + A3B
= 0 + 0.32 + 0.10 + 0.42 + 0.12
= 0.96
3An = 0.96 a 1, so the cylinder can be used.
From the results above,
Find the value of M3Emax when Va = 280 mm/s from Graph (11) ?.
M1, M3
[Graph 11] Allowable moment
Moment M1, M3 [Nm]
200
100
10
5
100
CY1S20-Z
200
280
Piston speed [mm/s]
400
(1 N•m = 0.74 lbf•ft)
Load factors on the guides can be calculated with the SMC Pneumatic CAD system.
Front matter 10
Series CY1S
Caution on Design
Vertical Operation
Intermediate Stop
When operating a load vertically, it should be operated within the
allowable load mass and allowable pressure as shown in the table
below.
Operating the cylinder above the specified values may lead to the
load dropping. If accurate stopping position is required, consider
using a metal-ended external stopper.
1. When an intermediate stop is performed with an
external stopper etc.
Bore size (mm)
Allowable load mass (mv) Allowable pressure (Pv)
(kg)
(MPa)
6
1.0
10
2.7
15
7.0
20
11.0
25
18.5
32
30.0
40
47.0
0.55
When stopping a load in mid-stroke using an external stopper,
adjustment bolt or bumper bolt, operate within operating pressure
limits shown in the table below. Use caution, as operating the
cylinder above these pressures may lead to the breaking of the
magnetic coupling.
(The piston speed should be the allowable value or less.)
Bore size (mm)
6
0.65
10
Allowable pressure for the intermediate stop
with an external stopper (Ps)
(MPa)
0.55
15
20
(1 MPa = 145 psi, 1 Kg = 2.2 lbs)
Note1) Use caution, as operating the cylinder above the allowable pressure
may lead to the magnetic coupling separating and allowing the load to
fall.
Note 2) The allowable load mass above indicates the allowable load mass in
the vertical operation. The actual load mass must be determined by
referring to the model selection flow chart on front matter 1.
Note 3) As a guide, the load mass should be approximately 60% of the thrust
load factor.
25
0.65
32
40
Note 1) Exceeding the allowable pressure will lead to the breaking of the
magnetic coupling and cause the piston slider and external slider
becoming separated.
Note 2) Fine stroke adjustment for the external slider is also considered as an
intermediate stop, so pay attention to the operating pressure.
2. When an intermediate stop is performed with the
pneumatic circuit.
When an intermediate stop is performed with the pneumatic circuit
with 3-position solenoid valve, the kinetic energy should be as
stated or less than the values in the table below.
(The piston speed should be the allowable value or less.)
Bore size (mm)
Allowable kinetic energy for the intermediate stop
with the pneumatic circuit (Es)
(J)
6
0.007
10
0.03
15
0.13
20
0.24
25
0.45
32
0.88
40
1.53
(1 J = 0.74 lbf•ft)
Note 1) Exceeding the allowable kinetic energy will lead to the breaking of the
magnetic coupling and cause the piston slider and external slider
becoming separated.
Front matter 11
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Slider Type: Slide Bearing
CY1S
ø6, ø10, ø15, ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
Series
RoHS
How to Order
Slide bearing
CY1S
25
300
Z M9BW
Made to Order
Slider type
Refer to page 2
for details.
(Slide bearing type)
Number of auto switches
Piping
Bilateral piping type
Nil
P1
P2
Nil
2 pcs.
S
n
“n” pcs.
1 pc.
Auto switch
Centralized piping type
Nil
Plate
P1
P2
G
Stopper type
Note) For centralized piping, the port will be
placed on the plate A side.
Bumper bolt (resin tipped):
Mounted on both sides
Nil
Bore size
6
10
15
20
25
32
40
Bumper bolt (Same as the opposite side)
6 mm
10 mm
Port thread type
15 mm
Symbol
20 mm
Nil
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
Without auto switch
Refer to the table below for the applicable
auto switch model.
Note) Auto switch rail and magnet for auto
switch included as standard.
Type
Bore size (mm)
M thread
6,10,15
Adjustment bolt (Same as the opposite side)
Rc
TN
TF
NPT
Shock absorber/
Adjustment bolt (metal ended):
Mounted on both sides
B
20, 25, 32, 40
Shock absorber (Same as the opposite side)
G
Standard stroke
Refer to the next page for the standard strokes.
BS
Shock absorber/
Adjustment bolt (metal ended):
Plate A side
Bumper bolt
Bumper bolt (resin tipped):
Plate B side or C side
Adjustment bolt
Shock absorber
Reed
auto switch
Solid state auto switch
Type
Special function
Electrical
entry
Indicator light
Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to pages 1263 to 1371 in Best Pneumatics No. 2 for further information on auto switches.
Load voltage
Wiring
(Output)
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
2-wire
3-wire (NPN)
Diagnostic indication
Grommet Yes 3-wire (PNP)
(2-color indication)
2-wire
3-wire (NPN)
Water resistant
3-wire (PNP)
(2-color indication)
2-wire
3-wire
Yes (NPN equivalent)
—
Grommet
2-wire
No
DC
Auto switch model
AC
Perpendicular
In-line
—
M9NV
M9PV
M9BV
M9NWV
M9PWV
M9BWV
M9NAV
M9PAV
M9BAV
M9N
M9P
M9B
M9NW
M9PW
M9BW
M9NA
M9PA
M9BA
5 V, 12 V
—
12 V
24 V
5 V, 12 V
12 V
5 V,12 V
12 V
Lead wire length (m)
Pre-wired
0.5 1 3 5
connector
(Nil) (M) (L) (Z)
# # # >
>
# # # >
>
# # # >
>
# # # >
>
# # # >
>
# # # >
>
> > # >
>
> > # >
>
> > # >
>
Applicable load
IC circuit
—
IC circuit
—
IC circuit
—
—
5V
—
A96V
A96
#
— # —
—
IC circuit
—
24 V
12 V
100 V
100 V or less
A93V
A90V
A93
A90
#
#
— # #
— # —
—
—
—
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
Water resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but in such case SMC cannot guarantee water resistance.
Please consult with SMC regarding water resistant types with the above model numbers.
Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m …………… Nil
1 m …………… M
3 m …………… L
5 m …………… Z
(Example) M9NW
(Example) M9NWM
(Example) M9NWL
(Example) M9NWZ
Solid state auto switches marked with “>” are produced upon receipt of order.
There are other applicable auto switches other than listed above. For details, refer to page 7.
For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to pages 1328 and 1329 in Best Pneumatics No. 2.
Auto switches are shipped together, (but not assembled).
1
Relay,
PLC
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Slider Type: Slide Bearing
Series CY1S
Specifications
6
Bore size (mm)
10
15
20
Fluid
Proof pressure
152 psi (1.05 MPa)
Maximum operating pressure
102 psi (0.7 MPa)
Minimum operating pressure
40
14 to 140°F (−10 to 60nC) (No freezing)
Piston speed
50 to 400 mm/s
Cushion
Rubber bumper/Shock absorber
Lubrication
Non-lube
+1.4
+1.0
Stroke length tolerance (mm)
Rubber bumper
(Magnet type)
32
26 psi (0.18 MPa)
Ambient and fluid temperature
JIS Symbol
25
Air
+1.8
0 to 250 st: 0 , 251 to 1000 st: 0 , 1001st or longer: 0
4.4
12.1
30.8
51.9
81.6
132
207
Magnetic holding force lbf (N)
(19.6)
(53.9)
(137)
(231)
(363)
(588)
(922)
In the case of setting an auto switch at the intermediate position, the maximum piston speed is subject
to restrict for detection upon the response time of a load (relays, sequence controller, etc.).
Standard Strokes
Madeeto
Ord r Made to Order
(For details, refer to pages 9 and 10.)
Symbol
-XB9
-XB13
-X116
-X168
-X210
-X322
-X324
-X431
-X2423
Specifications
Low speed (15 to 50 mm/s)
Ultra low speed (7 to 50 mm/s)
Air-hydro
Helical insert thread
Non-lubricated exterior (without dust seal)
Outside of cylinder tube with hard chrome plated
Non-lubricated exterior (with dust seal)
Switch rails on both sides (with 2 pcs.)
Mounting surface tapped hole type
Bore size
(mm)
Maximum
manufacturable
stroke (mm)
300
Standard stroke (mm)
6
50, 100, 150, 200
10
50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300
15
50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500
20
25
32
40
500
750
1000
100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450,
500, 600, 700, 800
1500
100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450,
500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000
1500
Note 1) Intermediate stroke is available by the 1 mm interval. (Produced upon receipt of order)
Note 2) Minimum stroke available without auto switch or with one auto switch is 15 mm and minimum 25
mm for with 2 auto switches.
Note 3) For 2 or more auto switches with stroke less than 25 mm (minimum 15 mm), consider “-X431” (2
switch rails).
Weights
lbs (kg)
Bore size (mm)
6
0.51
Basic weight
(0.231)
CY1S;
0.12
Additional weight for 50 stroke (0.053)
0.52
Basic weight
(0.236)
CY1SG;
0.11
Additional weight for 50 stroke (0.050)
10
0.94
(0.428)
0.18
(0.082)
0.96
(0.435)
0.17
(0.079)
15
1.64
(0.743)
0.24
(0.111)
1.64
(0.743)
0.24
(0.108)
20
2.90
(1.317)
0.41
(0.184)
2.93
(1.331)
0.39
(0.176)
25
3.62
(1.641)
0.41
(0.186)
3.66
(1.662)
0.39
(0.178)
Calculation: (Example) CY1SG25-500Z
Basic weight (At 0 stroke) … 1.662 kg Additional weight for 50 stroke … 0.178 kg
Cylinder stroke … 500 st
1.662 + 0.178 x 500 ÷ 50 = 3.442 kg
32
6.33
(2.870)
0.63
(0.284)
6.40
(2.903)
0.60
(0.273)
40
9.94
(4.508)
0.95
(0.430)
10.0
(4.534)
0.91
(0.411)
(1 Kg = 2.2 lbs )
Shock Absorber Specifications
Applicable cylinder
Shock absorber model
Max. absorbed energy (J)
Stroke absorption (mm)
Collision speed (m/s)
CY1S;6 CY1S;10 CY1S;15 CY1S;20 CY1S;25 CY1S;32 CY1S;40
RJ0604 RJ0806H RJ0806L RJ1007L RJ1412L RJ2015H RJ2015L
0.5
1
3
10
30
4
6
7
12
15
0.05 to 1 0.05 to 2 0.05 to 1 0.05 to 1 0.05 to 1 0.05 to 2 0.05 to 1
Max. operating frequency (cycle/min)
80
80
70
45
25
Max. allowable thrust lbf (N)
33.7
(150)
55.1
(245)
94.9
(422)
183.0
(814)
440.9
(1961)
Ambient temperature
14 to 140 °F (−10 to 60nC) (No freezing)
Note) The maximum absorbed energy and maximum operating frequency was measured at ordinary
temperature (approximately 68 to 77°F (20 to 25nC.))
2
Series CY1S
Construction
CY1S/Bilateral piping type
For ø6
For ø6
8
29a 23a
For ø10
; : @ . B = 2 > With bumper bolt
CY1SG/Centralized piping type
For ø6
For ø6
23b
29b
With bumper bolt
3
With shock absorber
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Slider Type: Slide Bearing
Series CY1S
Component Parts
No.
Description
1
Magnet A
2
Piston side yoke
3
Piston
4
Material
Note
No.
Description
—
24
Cylinder tube gasket
Material
Note
NBR
Rolled steel
25
Bumper bolt
Aluminum alloy
26
Bumper
Piston seal
NBR
27
Cylinder tube
Stainless steel
5
Wear ring A
Special resin
28
Guide shaft B
Carbon steel
Hard chrome plated
6
Lub-retainer A
Special resin
29a Guide shaft C
Carbon steel
Hard chrome plated
7
Shaft
29b Guide shaft A
Carbon steel
Hard chrome plated
8
Piston nut
Carbon steel
Except ø6, ø10
Stainless steel
Except ø6 to ø15
30
Switch rail
Chromium molybdenum steel
Urethane rubber
Aluminum alloy
9
Slide block
Aluminum alloy
31
Hexagon socket head set screw Chromium molybdenum steel
10
Bushing
Bearing alloy
32
Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel
11
Parallel pin
Carbon steel
33
Hexagon nut
Chromium molybdenum steel
12
Slider spacer
Rolled steel
34
Hexagon nut
Chromium molybdenum steel
13
Slider gasket
NBR
35
Square nut
Chromium molybdenum steel
14
Retaining ring
Carbon tool steel
36
Cross-recessed head machine screw with SW Chromium molybdenum steel
15
Magnet for switch
16
External slider tube
17
Magnet B
18
External slider side yoke
19
Wear ring B
Special resin
20
Lube-retainer B
Special resin
21
Spacer
Rolled steel
22
Plate A
Aluminum alloy
23a Plate C
Aluminum alloy
Bilateral piping
23b Plate B
Aluminum alloy
Centralized piping
—
37
Switch spacer
Aluminum alloy
38
Port plug
—
39
Guide shaft gasket
Rolled steel
40
Steel ball
41
Adjustment bolt
Except ø6
42
Auto switch
Except ø6
43
Shock absorber
44
Liner
45
Washer
Special resin
Chromium molybdenum steel ø6, Bilateral piping only
NBR
Centralized piping
Bearing steel
Centralized piping
Chromium molybdenum steel
—
—
Aluminum alloy
Rolled steel
Note 1) denotes parts that are included in the seal kit.
Note 2) Auto switch and switch spacer are shipped together with the product, but
not assembled.
Replacement Parts/Seal Kit
Bore size
(mm)
Seal kit
Kit no.
Contents
6
CY1S6-Z-PS
Set of the nos. 4, 5, 13, 19, 24, 39
10
CY1S10-Z-PS
Set of the nos. 4, 13, 19, 20, 24, 39
15
CY1S15-Z-PS
20
CY1S20-Z-PS
25
CY1S25-Z-PS
32
CY1S32-Z-PS
40
CY1S40-Z-PS
Set of the nos.
4, 5, 6, 13, 19,
20, 24, 39
Bumper bolt assembly
Kit no.
Contents
Switch spacer
Kit no.
Contents
CYS06-37-AJ024-R
CYS10-37-AJ025-R
CYS20-37-AJ027-R
CYS25-37-AJ028-R
Set of the nos.
25, 26, 33
BMY3-016
Set of the nos.
37
CYS32-37-AJ029-R
Note 1) Seal kit includes 4, 5, 13, 19, 24, 39 for ø6. 4, 13, 19, 20, 24, 39 for ø10. 4, 5, 6, 13, 19, 20, 24, 39 are for ø15 to ø40.
Order the seal kit, based on each bore size.
Note 2) Seal kit includes a grease pack (10 g).
Order with the following part number when only the grease pack is needed.
Grease pack part number: GR-S-010
Note 3) A switch spacer, as specified in the table above will be required if an auto switch is mounted afterward.
When ordering an additional auto switch, also order an additional switch spacer.
(Refer to “Auto Switch Mounting” on page 7 for details.)
4
CY1S
Series
Dimensions
CY1S/Bilateral piping type
6.1
K
R
L
GB
GP
HG
G
2 x 2 x Counterbore diameter øB
A
2 x 2 x Counterbore depth C
Q + Stroke
HA
HP
2 x P (Piping port)
GB
(NC)
2 x NN
(Adjustment bolt)
PW
QW
øD
Auto switch
A
18.5
2 x UU
(Bumper bolt)
GA
G
Square nut
14
HG
2 x JJ
HT
GA
2 x For holding switch rail
HC
ød
4 x MM Thread depth M
GA
ød
HT
(7.7)
PA
(Equal about center)
HB
T
PB
(Equal about center)
F
GA
QW
E
2 x Square nut groove
S + Stroke
W
HB
H
(NA)
Z + Stroke
T
4 x øLD
(NA)
(NC)
(NB)
(NB)
2 x Shock absorber
Amount of stroke adjustment
Y1
Y1
Adjustment bolt
Bumper bolt
R1
Shock absorber
R1
With bumper bolt
With shock absorber
Dimensions
(mm)
Model
A
B
C
D
CY1S6-Z
6
6.5
3.3
7.6
d
CY1S10-Z
7.5
8
4.4
12
CY1S15-Z
7.5
9.5
5.4
9.5
E
F
G
GA GB GP
25
5
5
5
30 27
20.5 20.5 15.5
10 2.5
31.5 6.5 5
6
40 34
25
27
16.6
12 2
38
6.5 5
6
52 40
28
5.4
21.6
16 2
44
8.5 5.5
8
62 46
36
8 2
H
HA
HB HC HG HP HT
NB
NC
3
40 3.5
6 M4 x 0.7 11
14
19
6
45 4.6
6 M4 x 0.7 10.5
16.5
28
29.5 20.5 15
39 20.5 M4 x 0.7 11
60 5.8
8 M5 x 0.8 10.5
16.5
28
37.5 24
45 20
M6 x 1
16
70 5.8 10
M6 x 1
10.5
22
28
M6 x 1
12.5
22
49
17
8
JJ
K
26 15.5 M4 x 0.7
13.5 33 17
M4 x 0.7
L
LD
M
CY1S20-Z
10
CY1S25-Z
10
11
6.5
26.4
16 2
52
8.5 5.5
8
70 54
40.5 40.5 27.5 21.5 53 21
M6 x 1
20
70 7
10
CY1S32-Z
12.5 14
8.6
33.6
20 2
64
9.5 5.5
9
86 66
50
CY1S40-Z
12.5 14
8.6
41.6
25 2
74
Model
NN
P
Nil
TN
TF
10.5 5.5 10 104 76
50
19
MM
NA
33
26
64 24
M8 x 1.25 26
85 9
12 M8 x 1.25 11.5
23.5
52
55.5 55.5 38
27
74 27
M8 x 1.25 28
95 9
12 M8 x 1.25 10.5
22.5
51
UU
Y1
PA PB PW Q QW R
R1
Bumper bolt
adjustable range S
(Both sides: R1 x 2)
T
W
Adjustment bolt
adjustable range Z
(Both sides: Y1 x 2)
Shock
absorber
CY1S6-Z
M4 x 0.7 M3×0.5
—
—
25
25
48
52 16 1
7.5
15
42 10
46 11.5
23
62 RJ0604N
CY1S10-Z
M4 x 0.7 M5×0.8
—
—
25
38
60
60 24 1
5.5
11
58 14
28
72 RJ0806HN
CY1S15-Z
M4 x 0.7 M5×0.8
—
—
30
50
75
75 30 1
5.5
11
47 12.5 M8 x 1
62 12.5 M8 x 1
73 14
28
87 RJ0806LN
CY1S20-Z
M6 x 1
Rc1/8
NPT1/8
G1/8
40
70
89
90 38 1.5 4.5
9
87 18.5
37
106 RJ1007LN
CY1S25-Z
M6 x 1
Rc1/8
NPT1/8
G1/8
40
70
98
90 42 1.5 4.5
73 16.5 M10 x 1
73 16.5 M14 x 1.5
106 RJ1412LN
M8 x 1.25
Rc1/8
NPT1/8
G1/8
40
75 118 110 50 3
5.5
11
37
128 RJ2015HN
CY1S40-Z
M8 x 1.25
Rc1/4
NPT1/4
G1/4
65 105 141 120 64 2
4.5
9
96 18.5
91 18.5 M20 x 1.5 116 18.5
99 20.5 M20 x 1.5 139 17.5
37
CY1S32-Z
35
140 RJ2015LN
9
M6 x 0.75
Note) The above figures show the product with auto switches. Auto switch and switch spacer are shipped together with the product, but not assembled.
5
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Slider Type: Slide Bearing
Series CY1S
Dimensions
CY1SG/Centralized piping type
2 x P (Piping port)
6.1
(7.7)
14
K
ød
R
HG
G
2 x 2 x Counterbore diameter øB
A
2 x 2 x Counterbore depth C
Q + Stroke
HA
HP
GB
(NC)
(NC)
(NF)
2 x NN
(Adjustment bolt)
GP
QW
øD
2 x UU
(Bumper bolt)
GA
L
GB
HG
2 x JJ
HT
Auto switch
A
(NA)
18.5
HC
4 x MM Thread depth M
G
Square nut
HB
PW
PA
(Equal about center)
GA
2 x For holding switch rail
T
GA
PB
(Equal about center)
F
H
ød
GA
QW
E
S + Stroke
TT
2 x Square nut groove
W
HB
(NA)
ZZ + Stroke
4 x øLD
(ND)
(NB)
(NE)
2 x Shock absorber
Amount of stroke adjustment
Y2
Y1
Adjustment bolt
Shock absorber
Bumper bolt
R1
R1
With bumper bolt
With shock absorber
Dimensions
(mm)
A
B
CY1SG6-Z
6
6.5 3.3
CY1SG10-Z
7.5 8
Model
CY1SG15-Z
D
7.6
4.4 12
E
d
8 2
F
25
G GA GB GP H
5
HA
HB
HC
5
5
30 27 20.5 20.5 15.5
10 2.5 31.5 6.5 5
6
40 34 25
27
7.5 9.5 5.4 16.6 12 2
17
HG HP HT
8
JJ
K
26 15.5 M4 x 0.7
13.5 33 17
M4 x 0.7
L
LD M
6 45 4.6
6 M4 x 0.7 10.5 16.5 28 6.5 12.5
8 M5 x 0.8 10.5 16.5 28 5.5 11.5
6.5 5
6
52 40 28
29.5 20.5 15
39 20.5 M4 x 0.7 11 60 5.8
8.5 5.5
8
62 46 36
37.5 24
45 20
6.5 26.4 16 2
52
8.5 5.5
8
12.5 14
8.6 33.6 20 2
64
9.5 5.5
9
12.5 14
8.6 41.6 25 2
74
CY1SG25-Z
10
11
CY1SG32-Z
CY1SG40-Z
NF
9.5 5.4 21.6 16 2
NN
P
Nil
TN
TF
14
19 7
10
M6 x 1 16 70 5.8 10 M6 x 1 10.5 22
28 5.5 17
70 54 40.5 40.5 27.5 21.5 53 21
M6 x 1 20 70 7
10 M6 x 1 12.5 22
49 7.5 17
86 66 50
50
19
NA NB NC ND NE
6 M4 x 0.7 11
44
10
MM
3 40 3.5
38
CY1SG20-Z
Model
C
33
26
64 24
M8 x 1.25 26 85 9
12 M8 x 1.25 11.5 23.5 52 5.5 17.5
10.5 5.5 10 104 76 55.5 55.5 38
27
74 27
M8 x 1.25 28 95 9
12 M8 x 1.25 10.5 22.5 51 4.5 16.5
PA PB PW Q QW R
Bumper bolt
R1 adjustable range S
(Both sides: R1 x 2)
T
TT
UU
Adjustment bolt
W Y1 Y2 adjustable range ZZ
(Both sides: Y1 + Y2)
Shock
absorber
CY1SG6-Z
15 M4 x 0.7 M3 × 0.5
—
—
25
25
48
52 16 1
7.5
15
42 10
46 11.5 7.5
19
66 RJ0604N
CY1SG10-Z
24 M4 x 0.7 M5 × 0.8
—
—
25
38
60
60 24 1
5.5
11
47 12.5 16.5 M8 x 1
58 14
10
24
76 RJ0806HN
CY1SG15-Z
23 M4 x 0.7 M5 × 0.8
—
—
30
50
75
75 30 1
5.5
11
62 12.5 17.5 M8 x 1
73 14
9
23
92 RJ0806LN
CY1SG20-Z
23 M6 x 1 Rc1/8 NPT1/8 G1/8
40
70
89
90 38 1.5 4.5
9
73 16.5 21.5 M10 x 1
87 18.5 13.5
32
111 RJ1007LN
CY1SG25-Z
44 M6 x 1 Rc1/8 NPT1/8 G1/8
40
70
98
90 42 1.5 4.5
9
73 16.5 21.5 M14 x 1.5 96 18.5 13.5
32
111 RJ1412LN
CY1SG32-Z
46 M8 x 1.25 Rc1/8 NPT1/8 G1/8
40
75 118 110 50 3
5.5
11
91 18.5 24.5 M20 x 1.5 116 18.5 12.5
31
134 RJ2015HN
CY1SG40-Z
45 M8 x 1.25 Rc1/4 NPT1/4 G1/4
65 105 141 120 64 2
4.5
9
99 20.5 26.5 M20 x 1.5 139 17.5 11.5
29
146 RJ2015LN
14
M6 x 0.75
Note) The above figures show the product with auto switches. Auto switch and switch spacer are shipped together with the product, but not assembled.
6
Series
CY1S
Auto Switch Mounting
K
K
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end)
A
C
B
D
Note 1) The minimum stroke when 2 in-line auto switches are mounted as shown above is 50 mm.
The minimum stroke when the mounting screws of the auto switches face each other is 25 mm.
Note 2) The minimum stroke when no auto switch is mounted is 15 mm.
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position
(mm)
A
Auto switch
model
D-M9;
D-A9;
D-A9;V
K dimension D-M9;V
(Switch
rail height)
Bore size
6
10
15
20
25
32
40
3
6
11
16
20
26
28
B
D-M9;W
D-M9;WV
D-M9;A
D-M9;AV
5.5
5.5
5.5
6
6
7.5
6.5
D-M9;
D-M9;V
D-M9;W
D-M9;WV
D-M9;A
D-M9;AV
36.5
41.5
56.5
67
67
83.5
92.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2
2
3.5
2.5
C
D-A9;
D-A9;V
D-M9;
D-M9;V
D-M9;W
D-M9;WV
D-M9;A
D-M9;AV
17.5
17.5
17.5
18
18
19.5
18.5
40.5
45.5
60.5
71
71
87.5
96.5
D
D-A9;
D-A9;V
21.5
21.5
21.5
22
22
23.5
22.5
D-M9;
D-M9;V
D-M9;W
D-M9;WV
D-M9;A
D-M9;AV
24.5
29.5
44.5
55
55
71.5
80.5
D-A9;
D-A9;V
20.5
25.5
40.5
51
51
67.5
76.5
Note 1) The values in the above list are used as a guide for the auto switch mounting position for end of stroke detection.
Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting.
Note 2) If the switch rail is reassembled or mounted on the other side of the cylinder, maintain the K dimension (switch rail height) in the table above.
The switch rail is secured by screwing the cross-recessed round head screw into a square nut in the T-slots of the end plates. Care must be taken when
removing the switch rail so that the washers, screws or nuts are not lost.
Auto Switch Mounting Bracket (Switch spacer)
Operating Range
Auto switch
model
D-M9;
D-M9;V
D-M9;W
D-M9;WV
D-M9;A
D-M9;AV
D-A9;
D-A9;V
6
3
5.5
10
3
5.5
Bore size (mm)
15
2.5
5.5
20
2.5
5.5
25
3
5.5
32
2.5
5.5
40
3
6
Note) Values which include hysteresis are for guideline purposes only,
they are not a guarantee (assuming approximately o30% dispersion)
and may change substantially depending on the ambient environment.
Auto switch
model
D-M9;
D-M9;V
D-M9;W
D-M9;WV
D-M9;A
D-M9;AV
D-A9;
D-A9;V
Bore size (mm)
6 to 40
BMY3-016
Note) The part number above is the order number for the switch spacer.
Auto Switch Mounting
As shown in the figure to the right, combine the auto switch with the
switch spacer (BMY3-016) to secure the auto switch in the mounting
groove of the switch rail. Combine the auto switch with the switch
spacer and secure into position by tightening the auto switch
mounting screw with a flat blade watchmakers’ screwdriver.
Note) When tightening the auto switch mounting screw, use watchmakers’
screwdriver with a handle diameter of 5 to 6 mm.
Set the tightening torque to 0.07 to 0.11 lbf·ft (0.1 to 0.15 N·m). As a
guide, turn 90n from when the mounting screw starts to become tight.
Switch spacer
Flat head
watchmakers’ screwdriver
Auto switch mounting screw
(M2.5 x 4L)
Accessory
Other than the applicable auto switches listed in “How to Order”, the following auto switches are mountable.
Normally closed (NC = b contact) solid state auto switches (D-F9G/F9H) are also available. For details, refer to page 1290 in Best Pneumatics No. 2.
With pre-wired connector is also available for solid state auto switches. For details, refer to pages 1328 and 1329 in Best Pneumatics No. 2.
7
Prior to Use
Auto Switch Connection and Example
Sink Input Specifications
3-wire, NPN
Source Input Specifications
3-wire, PNP
Brown Input
Auto switch
Black
Brown Input
Auto switch
Black
Blue
Blue
COM
2-wire
COM
PLC internal circuit
2-wire
Brown Input
PLC internal circuit
Brown COM
Auto switch
Auto switch
Blue
Blue
COM
Input
PLC internal circuit
PLC internal circuit
Connect according to the applicable PLC input specifications, as the connection method will vary depending on the PLC input specifications.
Example of AND (Series) and OR (Parallel) Connection
3-wire,
AND connection for NPN output
(Using relays)
Auto switch 1
Auto switch 2
Brown
Relay
Black
(Performed with auto switches only)
Brown
Load
Auto switch 1
Brown
Black Load
Auto switch 1
Blue
Blue
Brown
Brown
Brown
Black
Auto switch 2
Black
Auto switch 2
Blue
Black
3-wire,
OR connection for PNP output
(Using relays)
(Performed with auto switches only)
Brown
Brown
Relay
Black
Auto switch 1
Black
Brown
Auto switch 1
Black
Blue
Blue
Blue
Brown
Brown
Brown
Black
Auto switch 2
Load
Blue
2-wire,
AND connection
Brown
Auto switch 2
Blue
Auto switch 2
Black
Load
Blue
2-wire,
OR connection
Brown
Load
Blue
Black Load
Blue
Brown
Auto switch 1
Load
Blue
3-wire,
AND connection for PNP output
Auto switch 2
Black
Blue
Blue
Auto switch 1
3-wire,
OR connection for NPN output
When two auto switches
are connected in series,
malfunction may occur
because the load voltage
will decrease in the ON
state. The indicator lights
will light up when both of
the auto switches are in
the ON state.
Load
Auto switch 1
Blue
Brown
(Solid state)
(Reed)
When two auto switches
are connected in parallel,
malfunction may occur
because the load voltage
will increase in the OFF
state.
Because there is no leakage current, the load voltage will not increase in
the OFF state. However,
depending on the number of auto switches in
the ON state, the indicator lights may sometimes
grow dim or not light up,
due to the dispersion and
reduction of the current
flowing to the auto
switches.
Auto switch 2
Blue
Load voltage at ON = Power supply voltage – Residual voltage x 2 pcs.
= 24 V – 4 V x 2 pcs.
= 16 V
Load voltage at OFF = Leakage current x 2 pcs. x Load impedance
= 1 mA x 2 pcs. x 3 k7
=6V
Example: Power supply voltage 24 VDC
Auto switch internal voltage drop 4 V
Example: Load impedance 3 k7
Auto switch leakage current 1 mA
8
Series
CY1S
Made to Order
Madeeto
Ord r
Please contact SMC for detailed dimensions, specifications and lead times.
Made-to-Order List
Bore size
(mm)
Low
speed
Ultra low
speed
Air-hydro
Helical insert
thread
-XB9
-XB13
-X116
-X168
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
6
10
15
20
25
32
40
Non-lubricated exterior Outside of cylinder tube Non-lubricated exterior Auto switch rails on Mounting surface
(without dust seal) with hard chrome plated
(with dust seal)
both sides
tapped hole type
-X210
-X322
-X324
-X431
-X2423
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
Note) # indicates “applicable” and blank indicates “not applicable”.
1 Low speed (15 to 50 mm/s)
Symbol
-XB9
Even if driving at lower speeds 15 to 50 mm/s, there would be no
stick-slip phenomenon and it can run smoothly.
Standard model no.
XB9
2 Ultra low speed (7 to 50 mm/s)
Symbol
-XB13
Even if driving at lower speeds 7 to 50 mm/s, there would be no
stick-slip phenomenon and it can run smoothly.
Standard model no.
XB13
Ultra low speed (7 to 50 mm/s)
Low speed (15 to 50 mm/s)
Dimensions: Same as standard type
Dimensions: Same as standard type
Note 1) The operating performance may vary depending on the operating
conditions.
Note 2) Do not operate the product with speeds exceeding the maximum
operating speed as it may lead to failure.
Note 1) The operating performance may vary depending on the operating
conditions.
Note 2) Do not operate the product with speeds exceeding the maximum
operating speed as it may lead to failure.
Warning
Precautions
Be aware that smoking cigarettes etc. after your hands have come
into contact with the grease used in this cylinder can create a gas
that is hazardous to humans.
Symbol
3 Air-hydro
-X116
Air-hydro type is suitable for precise low speed feeding, intermediate
stop and skip feeding.
Standard model no.
X116
Orifice diameter (mm)
Fluid
Piston speed (mm/s)
Dimensions
Dimensions: Same as standard type
25
8
32
40
8
11
Turbine oil class 1 (ISO VG32)
15 to 300
The same dimensions as the bilateral piping type
Note 1) This product is only applicable to the bilateral piping type.
Note 2) When an intermediate stop is performed in the air-hydro circuit, the
kinetic energy of the load should be the allowable value or less.
(Refer to “When an intermediate stop is performed with the pneumatic
circuit” for the allowable values.)
Note 3) Do not use machine oil or spindle oil.
9
X168
Helical insert thread
Specifications
Symbol
-X168
Change mounting thread on the external slider to helical insert thread.
Standard model no.
Air-hydro
Bore size (mm)
4 Helical insert thread
Made to Order
Symbol
5 Non-lubricated exterior (without dust seal) -X210
6 Outside of cylinder tube with hard chrome plated
Suitable for environments where oil is not tolerated.
It is recommended to use this type in a special environment where
standard product causes lubrication failure.
Standard model no.
Series CY1S
X210
Symbol
-X322
The cylinder tube outer circumference is plated with hard chrome, which
further reduces bearing abrasion.
Standard model no.
X322
Non-lubricated exterior
(without dust seal)
Outside of cylinder tube with hard
chrome plated
Dimensions: Same as standard type
Dimensions: Same as standard type
Note) Consider installing a protective cover if the product is used in an
environment where foreign matter such as paper powder might be
caught in the sliding parts of the cylinder.
Outside of cylinder tube with hard chrome plated
Special bearing
7 Non-lubricated exterior (with dust seal)
Symbol
8 Switch rails on both sides (with 2 pcs.)
-X324
No grease is applied to the external surface of the cylinder.
Suitable for environments where oil is not tolerated.
A felt dust seal is mounted to the external sliding part of the cylinder tube.
Standard model no.
Symbol
-X431
Applicable for short stroke with auto switch.
Standard model no.
X431
X324
Switch rails on both sides
(with 2 pcs.)
Non-lubricated exterior
(with dust seal)
Note) Although a felt dust seal is installed, foreign matter might be caught in
the sliding parts of the cylinder. In that instance, consider installing a
protective cover.
Switch rail
7.1
Special bearing
Dust seal
(Felt)
(7.7)
Dimensions: Same as standard type
Switch rail
Symbol
9 Mounting surface tapped hole type
-X2423
The through hole mounting holes on both plates are tapped to allow the cylinders
to also be mounted from the equipment side (cylinder mounted surface).
Plate
2x2xJ
Maximum screw-in depth: R
Bore size
(mm)
Dimension is
the same as
the standard
Dimension is the same
as the standard
6
10
15
20
25
32
40
J
R
M4 x 0.7
6.5
M5 x 0.8
9.5
M6 x 1
9.5
(Thread size) (Maximum screw-in depth)
M6 x 1
9.5
M8 x 1.25
10
M10 x 1.5
15
M10 x 1.5
15
10
CY1S
Specific Product Precautions 1
Series
Be sure to read the below before handling. Refer to back cover for Safety Instructions. For Actuator and Auto Switch
Precautions, refer to “Handling Precautions for SMC Products” (M-E03-3) and Operation Manual.
Operating Precautions
Warning
Disassembly and Maintenance
Warning
1. Be careful to the space between the plates and the slide
block.
1. Use caution as the attractive power of the magnets is
very strong.
Take sufficient care to avoid getting your hands or fingers caught
when the cylinder is operated.
When removing the external slider and piston slider from the cylinder
tube for maintenance etc., handle with caution, since the magnets
installed in each slider have a very strong attractive force.
2. Do not apply a load to a cylinder which is greater than the
allowable value stated in the “Model Selection” pages.
This can cause a malfunction.
3. Be careful to the supply pressure and kinetic energy
when performing an intermediate stop.
Fine end stroke adjustment is considered as an intermediate stop,
so the considerations for an intermediate stop must be observed
when making any fine adjustments.
When stopping the external slider in an intermediate position
with an external stopper.
If the allowable pressure values are exceeded, the
stopper position might be displaced or the external
slider may become detached from the magnetic
coupling and drop.
When stopping the piston slider in an intermediate
position with the pneumatic circuit.
If the allowable kinetic energy values are exceeded,
the stopper position might be displaced or the
external slider may become detached from the
magnetic coupling and drop.
Caution
1. Use caution when taking off the external slider, as the
piston slider will be directly attracted to it.
When removing the external slider or piston slider from the cylinder
tube, first force the sliders out of their magnetically coupled positions,
and then remove them individually when there is no longer any
holding force. If they are removed while still magnetically coupled,
they will be directly attracted to one another and will not come apart.
2. Do not disassemble the magnetic components (piston
slider, external slider).
This can cause a loss of holding force and malfunction.
3. When disassembling to replace the seals and wear ring,
refer to the separate disassembly instructions.
4. The set screws in the figure below are for securing the
guide shaft, so do not loosen them except for the
purposes of replacing the seals.
This can cause a malfunction.
Caution
Guide shaft holding screws
(Hexagon socket head set screws)
1. Do not use the cylinder in an environment where the
cylinder is expose to moisture, adhesive foreign matter,
dust or liquid such as water or cutting fluid.
If the cylinder is used in an environment where the lubrication of the
cylinders sliding parts is compromised, please consult SMC.
Mounting
Caution
1. Avoid operation with the external slider secured to the
surface.
Secure the cylinder with the plates on both sides.
2. Make sure that the cylinder mounting surface has a
flatness of 0.2 mm or less.
If the flatness of the mounting surface is not appropriate, the 2 guide
shafts will become twisted and have an adverse effect to the
performance of the product. This results in reduction of product life
due to the increase in sliding resistance and premature wearing of
the bushing.
5. Use caution to the direction of the external slider and the
piston slider.
There are an odd number of magnets for ø6 and ø10 (ø6: 5 pcs, ø10: 3
pcs), so the assembly direction is important. Refer to the figure below
when performing disassembly or maintenance. Put the external slider
and the internal slider together and insert the piston slider into the
cylinder tube ensuring the positional relationship is correct as shown in
Fig.1.
If assembled incorrectly as shown in Fig. 2, remove and rotate the
piston slider by 180n, then re-insert in the correct position. If the
direction is not correct, it will be impossible to obtain the specified
holding force.
The flatness of the cylinder mounting surface should be 0.2 mm or
less, and the product should be mounted so that it can operate
smoothly over the full stroke with the minimum operating pressure
(26 psi (0.18 MPa) or less).
Fig. 1 Correct position
11
Fig. 2 Incorrect position
CY1S
Specific Product Precautions 2
Series
Be sure to read the below before handling. Refer to back cover for Safety Instructions. For Actuator and Auto Switch
Precautions, refer to “Handling Precautions for SMCProducts” (M-E03-3) and Operation Manual.
Stroke Setting
Caution when Replacing Shock Absorber
Caution
Caution
With bumper bolt
Loosen the hexagon nut, and move the bumper bolt to the set stroke
position with a hexagon wrench or by hand. Tighten the hexagon nut
to the torque values shown in the table below.
With shock absorber
The cylinder stroke is controlled by the position of the adjustment
bolt. Parallel pins of smaller size to the rod diameter of the shock
absorber are mounted on the slide block, and these pins collide with
the adjustment bolt and shock absorber. Therefore, the stopper of
the shock absorber should not come into contact with the slide block
directly. (See the figure below.)
It is possible to adjust the stroke time of the shock absorber by
adjusting the position of the shock absorber and adjustment bolt.
However, if the effective stroke of the shock absorber is extremely
short, the ability to absorb the impact will be reduced, leading to
failure. Therefore, the position of the shock absorber is
recommended to be approximately 0.2 mm behind the contact
surface of the adjustment bolt (See figure below).
For the cylinder specification of shock absorber with
adjustment bolt, the stroke will be maintained even when
the shock absorber is replaced. However, if the position
of the adjustment bolt is also changed, it will be
necessary to reset the stroke position of the cylinder and
shock absorber.
Service Life and Replacement Period of Shock Absorber
Caution
1. If the shock absorbing ability of the shock absorber is
insufficient at the end of stroke, the cylinder, equipment
or workpiece maybe damaged.
2. Perform maintenance for the shock absorber (RJ series)
setting approximately 3 million operating cycles as a
guide.
Note 1) The performance may vary depending on the operating
conditions of the shock absorber.
Note 2) As a guide, the maintenance check for the shock absorber
(RJ series) should be carried out after approximately 3
million operating cycles, and replace if necessary.
Adjustment bolt
3. Refer to the RJ series catalog for Specific Product
Precautions of the shock absorber.
Shock absorber
y 0.2 mm
Bore size
(mm)
6
10
15
20
25
32
40
Nut for bumper bolt Nut for shock absorber Nut for adjustment bolt
Tightening
Tightening
Tightening
Thread
Thread
Thread
torque
torque
torque
size
size
size
lbf·ft (N·m)
lbf·ft (N·m)
lbf·ft (N·m)
M6 x 0.75 3.84 (5.2) M6 x 0.75 0.63 (0.85)
M4 x 0.7 1.10 (1.5)
M8 x 1 9.22 (12.5) M8 x 1
1.23 (1.67)
M10 x 1
18.1 (24.5) M10 x 1
2.32 (3.14)
M14 x 1.5 50.2 (68.0) M14 x 1.5 7.96 (10.80)
M6 x 1
3.68 (5.2)
M20 x 1.5 150 (204.0) M20 x 1.5 17.3 (23.50) M8 x 1.25 9.22 (12.5)
12
Safety Instructions
These safety instructions are intended to prevent hazardous situations and/or
equipment damage. These instructions indicate the level of potential hazard with
the labels of “Caution,” “Warning” or “Danger.” They are all important notes for
safety and must be followed in addition to International Standards (ISO/IEC) 1),
and other safety regulations.
Caution:
Caution indicates a hazard with a low level of risk
Warning:
Warning indicates a hazard with a medium level of
Danger :
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk
which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
risk which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
1) ISO 4414: Pneumatic fluid power – General rules relating to systems.
ISO 4413: Hydraulic fluid power – General rules relating to systems.
IEC 60204-1: Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines.
(Part 1: General requirements)
ISO 10218-1: Manipulating industrial robots – Safety.
etc.
which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.
Caution
Warning
1. The compatibility of the product is the responsibility of the
person who designs the equipment or decides its specifications.
Since the product specified here is used under various operating conditions, its
compatibility with specific equipment must be decided by the person who designs
the equipment or decides its specifications based on necessary analysis and test
results. The expected performance and safety assurance of the equipment will be
the responsibility of the person who has determined its compatibility with the
product. This person should also continuously review all specifications of the
product referring to its latest catalog information, with a view to giving due
consideration to any possibility of equipment failure when configuring the
equipment.
2. Only personnel with appropriate training should operate
machinery and equipment.
The product specified here may become unsafe if handled incorrectly. The
assembly, operation and maintenance of machines or equipment including our
products must be performed by an operator who is appropriately trained and
experienced.
3. Do not service or attempt to remove product and machinery/
equipment until safety is confirmed.
1. The inspection and maintenance of machinery/equipment should only be
performed after measures to prevent falling or runaway of the driven objects
have been confirmed.
2. When the product is to be removed, confirm that the safety measures as
mentioned above are implemented and the power from any appropriate source
is cut, and read and understand the specific product precautions of all relevant
products carefully.
3. Before machinery/equipment is restarted, take measures to prevent
unexpected operation and malfunction.
4. Contact SMC beforehand and take special consideration of safety
measures if the product is to be used in any of the following
conditions.
1. Conditions and environments outside of the given specifications, or use
outdoors or in a place exposed to direct sunlight.
2. Installation on equipment in conjunction with atomic energy, railways, air
navigation, space, shipping, vehicles, military, medical treatment, combustion
and recreation, or equipment in contact with food and beverages, emergency
stop circuits, clutch and brake circuits in press applications, safety equipment
or other applications unsuitable for the standard specifications described in the
product catalog.
3. An application which could have negative effects on people, property, or
animals requiring special safety analysis.
4. Use in an interlock circuit, which requires the provision of double interlock for
possible failure by using a mechanical protective function, and periodical
checks to confirm proper operation.
1. The product is provided for use in manufacturing industries.
The product herein described is basically provided for peaceful use in
manufacturing industries.
If considering using the product in other industries, consult SMC beforehand and
exchange specifications or a contract if necessary.
If anything is unclear, contact your nearest sales branch.
Limited warranty and Disclaimer/
Compliance Requirements
The product used is subject to the following “Limited warranty and Disclaimer”
and “Compliance Requirements”.
Read and accept them before using the product.
Limited warranty and Disclaimer
1. The warranty period of the product is 1 year in service or 1.5 years after the
product is delivered, whichever is first. 2)
Also, the product may have specified durability, running distance or
replacement parts. Please consult your nearest sales branch.
2. For any failure or damage reported within the warranty period which is
clearly our responsibility, a replacement product or necessary parts will be
provided.
This limited warranty applies only to our product independently, and not to
any other damage incurred due to the failure of the product.
3. Prior to using SMC products, please read and understand the warranty
terms and disclaimers noted in the specified catalog for the particular
products.
2) Vacuum pads are excluded from this 1 year warranty.
A vacuum pad is a consumable part, so it is warranted for a year after it is delivered.
Also, even within the warranty period, the wear of a product due to the use of the vacuum pad
or failure due to the deterioration of rubber material are not covered by the limited warranty.
Compliance Requirements
1. The use of SMC products with production equipment for the manufacture of
weapons of mass destruction (WMD) or any other weapon is strictly prohibited.
2. The exports of SMC products or technology from one country to another are
governed by the relevant security laws and regulations of the countries
involved in the transaction. Prior to the shipment of a SMC product to
another country, assure that all local rules governing that export are known
and followed.
Safety Instructions Be sure to read “Handling Precautions for SMC Products” (M-E03-3) before using.
SMC Corporation of America
10100 SMC Blvd., Noblesville, IN 46060
www.smcusa.com
SMC Pneumatics (Canada) Ltd.
www.smcpneumatics.ca
(800) SMC.SMC1 (762-7621)
e-mail: sales@smcusa.com
For International inquiries: www.smcworld.com
© 2012 SMC Corporation of America, All Rights Reserved.
RO-5M-RRD
All reasonable efforts to ensure the accuracy of the information detailed in this catalog were made at the time of publishing. However, SMC can in no way warrant the information herein contained as specifications are subject to change without notice.
Slider Type/Ball Bushing Bearing
Series CY1L
ø6, ø10, ø15, ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
CY3B
CY3R
CY1S
CY1L
CY1H
CY1F
CYP
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1201
Series CY1L
Model Selection 1
Operating Conditions
E: Kinetic energy of load (J)
2
W
V
E = ———— · ———
2
1000
Es: Allowable kinetic energy for intermediate stop using an air pressure circuit (J)
Ps: Operating pressure limit for intermediate stop using an external stopper, etc. (MPa)
Pv: Maximum operating pressure for vertical operation (MPa)
WA: Allowable load mass based on these operating conditions (kg)
Wv: Allowable load mass for vertical operation (kg)
FA: Allowable drive resisting force at pusher (kg)
σ: Stroke coefficient
(
)
• W: Load mass (kg)
• V: Speed (mm/s)
• P: Operating pressure (MPa)
• Stroke (mm)
• L0: Distance from slide block mounting surface to workpiece center of gravity (cm)
• Mode of operation (Horizontal, Inclined, Vertical)
• F: Drive resisting force (kg)
Load mass in stroke
σ = ——————————
Maximum load mass
Mode of operation
Note 1)
Inclined operation
Horizontal operation
Vertical operation
Review of load mass
and operating pressure
First tentative bore size determination
øD ≥ 1.6 x
W
—
P
First tentative bore size determination
øD ≥ 5.0 x
0.1 x Wcosθ + Wsinθ
—
P
First tentative bore size determination
øD ≥ 5.0 x
0.1 x W + W
P
—
W
Determination
of allowable load
mass & pressure
θ° θ°
W > Wv
P > Pv
Inclined operation
W ≤ Wv
P ≤ Pv
(For vertical operation,
refer to page 1205.)
(For method to find σ, refer to page 1203.)
Calculate stroke coefficient (σ) with stroke
and tentatively determined bore size
Load mass in stroke
σ = ————————————
Maximum load mass
Select an example calculation
for allowable mass based on
cylinder mounting orientation.
(Refer to pages 1203 and 1204.)
Review of bore size, stroke and L0
Calculate (WA) from the
formula for the tentatively
determined bore size
W > WA
F > FA
W ≤ WA
F ≤ FA
Review with magnet holding force (H)
Yes
Stop with external stopper
Intermediate
stopping method
Stop with air pressure circuit
E > Es
Tentative determination of L type
P > Ps
(For intermediate stops,
None
refer to page 1205.)
Determination
E ≤ Es
of kinetic energy
Bore size determination
of load (E)
V 2
W
E = — · (—)
2
1000
Determination of
P ≤ Ps
pressure (P) when making
intermediate stop
Tentative
determination
of L type
P > Ps
(For intermediate stops,
refer to page 1205.)
Tentative determination of H type
Tentative determination of H type
Review of larger bore size
1202
Note 1)
Intermediate stop?
E > Es
Note 1) This cylinder cannot perform an intermediate
stop using an air pressure circuit in vertical
operation. In this case, an intermediate stop
can be performed only by using an external
stopper, etc.
Note 2) Made-to-order products should be considered,
too, depending on an operating environment,
etc.
Note 2)
Consider made-to-order products,
depending on an operating condition.
(Refer to page 1207.)
Model selected
Series CY1L
Model Selection 2
Caution on Design (1)
How to Find σ when Selecting
the Allowable Load Mass
Examples of Allowable Load Mass Calculation
Based on Cylinder Mounting Orientation
Since the maximum load mass with respect to the cylinder stroke
changes as shown in the table below, σ should be considered as a
coefficient determined in accordance with each stroke.
Example) CY1L25-650
(1) Maximum load mass = 20 kg
(2) Load mass for 650 st = 13.6 kg
13.6
(3) σ = ——— = 0.68 is the result.
20
1. Horizontal Operation (Floor mounting)
Calculation Formula for σ (σ ≤ 1)
Maximum Load Mass (Center of slide block)
CY1L6
Model
σ=
10
1
ST: Stroke (mm)
CY1L10
CY1L15
(0.86 – 1.3 x 10–3 x ST)
(1.5 – 1.3 x 10–3 x ST)
10
3
CY1L25
CY1L20
Model
σ=
10
(1.71 – 1.3 x
10–3
7
x ST)
10
(1.98 – 1.3 x
10–3
CY1L32
x ST)
10
20
12
(2.26 – 1.3 x 10–3 x ST)
(kg)
Bore size
(mm)
6
10
15
20
25
32
40
Max. load
mass (kg)
1.8
3
7
12
20
30
50
Stroke
(Max)
Up to 300 st Up to 300 st Up to 500 st Up to 500 st Up to 500 st Up to 600 st Up to 600 st
The above maximum load mass values will change with the stroke length for
each cylinder size, due to limitation from warping of the guide shafts. (Take
note of the coefficient σ.)
Moreover, depending on the operating direction, the allowable load mass may
be different
30
2. Horizontal Operation (Wall mounting)
CY1L40
Model
(2.48 – 1.3 x 10–3 x ST)
σ=
10
CY3B
CY3R
50
Note) Calculate with σ = 1 for all applications up to ø10 – 300 mmST, ø15 –
500 mmST, ø20 – 500 mmST, ø25 – 500 mmST, ø32 – 600 mmST
and ø40 – 600 mmST.
CY1S
CY1L
Bore size
(mm)
50
Lo: Distance from mounting surface
to load center of gravity (cm)
30
10
CY
20
1L
CY
40
1L
32
CY
1L
CY
25
CY
1L
1L
20
15
(13.6)
10
Load mass (kg)
6
5
4
15
20
25
32
CY
1L
10
3
2
40
Allowable load mass (WA) (kg)
σ · 6.48
6.8 + 2Lo
σ · 15.0
8.9 + 2Lo
σ · 45.5
11.3 + 2Lo
σ · 101
13.6 + 2Lo
σ · 180
15.2 + 2Lo
σ · 330
18.9 + 2Lo
σ · 624
22.5 + 2Lo
CY1H
CY1F
CYP
3. Vertical Operation
CY1L6
1
0
500 (650) 750
1000
Cylinder stroke (mm)
1500
Bore size
(mm)
6
10
15
20
25
32
40
Allowable load mass (Wv) (kg)
σ · 1.53
1.6 + Lo
σ · 5.00
1.95 + Lo
σ · 15.96
2.4 + Lo
σ · 31.1
2.8 + Lo
σ · 54.48
3.1 + Lo
σ · 112.57
3.95 + Lo
σ · 212.09
4.75 + Lo
Lo: Distance from mounting surface to load center of gravity (cm)
Note) Operating pressure should be equal to or less than the maximum
operating pressure in the article, “Vertical Operation” listed on page
1205.
1203
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
Series CY1L
Model Selection 3
Caution on Design (2)
Example of Allowable Load Mass Calculation Based on Cylinder Mounting Orientation
7. Horizontal Operation (Pushing load, Pusher)
4. Inclined Operation (In operating direction)
Bore size
(mm)
6
10
15
20
25
Angle up to 45° up to 60° up to 75° up to 90°
k
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
32
Allowable load mass (WA) (kg)
σ·4.05·K
1.7 cosθ + 2 (1.6 + Lo) sinθ
σ·10.2·K
2.8 cos θ + 2 (1.95 + Lo) sinθ
σ·31.1·K
2.9 cos θ + 2 (2.4 + Lo) sinθ
σ·86.4·K
6 cos θ + 2 (2.8 + Lo) sinθ
σ·105.4·K
3.55 cos θ + 2 (3.1 + Lo) sinθ
σ·178·K
4 cos θ + 2 (3.95 + Lo) sinθ
σ·361.9·K
5.7 cos θ + 2 (4.75 + Lo) sinθ
Angle coefficient (k) : k = [to 45° (= θ)] = 1,
40
[to 60°] = 0.9, [to 75°] = 0.8,
[to 90°] = 0.7
Lo: Distance from mounting surface to load center of gravity (cm)
W
μ
F: Drive (from slide block to position Lo) resistance force W x μ (kg)
Lo: Distance from mounting surface to load center of gravity (cm)
μ: Friction coefficient
Bore size (mm)
Allowable drive resisting force
(FA) (kg)
5. Inclined Operation (At a right angle to operating direction)
Bore size (mm)
Allowable drive resisting force
(FA) (kg)
6
10
15
20
σ·2.72
σ·5.55
σ·15.96
σ·41.7
1.6 + Lo
1.95 + Lo
2.4 + Lo
2.8 + Lo
25
32
40
σ·58.9
σ·106.65
σ·228
3.1 + Lo
3.95 + Lo
4.75 + Lo
8. Horizontal Operation (Load, Lateral offset Lo)
Bore size
(mm)
Lo: Distance from mounting surface
to load center of gravity (cm)
6
10
15
20
25
32
40
Allowable load mass (WA) (kg)
σ·6.48
3.6 + 2 (1.6 + Lo) sinθ
σ·15
5 + 2 (1.95 + Lo) sinθ
σ·45.5
6.5 + 2 (2.4 + Lo) sinθ
σ·115
8 + 2 (2.8 + Lo) sinθ
σ·180
9 + 2 (3.1 + Lo) sinθ
σ·330
11 + 2 (3.95 + Lo) sinθ
σ·624
13 + 2 (4.75 + Lo) sinθ
6. Load Center Offset in Operating Direction (Lo)
Lo: Distance from center of side block to load's center of gravity (cm)
Bore size (mm)
Allowable load mass
(WA) (kg)
Bore size (mm)
Allowable load mass
(WA) (kg)
Bore size Allowable load mass (WA) (kg)
(mm)
σ·2
6
Lo + 1.7
Lo: Distance from center of slide block
to load's center of gravity (cm)
1204
10
σ·5.6
Lo + 2.8
15
σ·13.34
Lo + 2.9
20
σ·43.2
25
σ·46.15
Lo + 6
Lo + 3.55
32
σ·80
Lo + 4
40
σ·188.1
Lo + 5.7
6
10
15
20
σ·6.48
σ·15
σ·45.5
σ·80.7
3.6 + Lo
5 + Lo
6.5 + Lo
8 + Lo
25
32
40
σ·144
σ·275
σ·520
9 + Lo
11 + Lo
13 + Lo
Series CY1L
Model Selection 4
Caution on Design (3)
Vertical Operation
Intermediate Stop
When operating a load vertically, it should be operated within the allowable
load mass and maximum operating pressures shown in the table below.
Use caution, as operating above the prescribed values may lead to
dropping of the load.
When the cylinder is mounted vertically or sidelong, sliders may move
downwards due to the self-weight or workpiece mass. If an accurate
stopping position is required at the stroke end or the middle-stroke, use an
external stopper to secure accurate positioning.
Bore size
(mm)
Model
Allowable load mass (Wv)
(kg)
Maximum operating
pressure (Pv)
(MPa)
1. Intermediate stopping of load with an external stopper, etc.
When stopping a load in mid-stroke using an external stopper
(adjusting bolt, etc.), operate within the operating pressure limits shown
in the table below. Use caution, as operation at a pressure exceeding
these limits can result in breaking of the magnetic coupling.
Bore size
(mm)
Model
Operating pressure limit for intermediate stop (Ps)
(MPa)
6
CY1L 6H
0.55
10
CY1L10H
0.55
6
CY1L 6H
1.0
0.55
CY1L15H
0.65
10
CY1L10H
2.7
0.55
CY1L15L
0.40
CY1L15H
7.0
0.65
CY1L20H
0.65
0.40
CY1L20L
0.40
11.0
0.65
CY1L25H
0.65
15
20
25
32
40
CY1L15L
CY1L20H
4.1
15
20
25
CY1L20L
7.0
0.40
CY1L25L
0.40
CY1L25H
18.5
0.65
CY1L32H
0.65
CY1L25L
11.2
0.40
CY1L32L
0.40
CY1L32H
30.0
0.65
CY1L40H
0.65
CY1L40L
0.40
CY1L32L
18.2
0.40
CY1L40H
47.0
0.65
CY1L40L
29.0
0.40
Note 1) Use caution, since the magnetic coupling may be dislocated if it is
used over the maximum operating pressure.
Note 2) Allowable load mass above indicates the maximum load mass
when loaded. The actual loadable mass must be determined
referring to the flow chart in the Model Selection 1.
32
40
CY3B
CY3R
CY1S
2. Intermediate stopping of load with an air pressure circuit
When stopping a load using an air pressure circuit, operate at or below
the kinetic energy shown in the table below. Use caution, as operation
when exceeding the allowable value can result in breaking of the
magnetic coupling.
(Reference values)
Bore size
(mm)
Model
Allowable kinetic energy for intermediate stop (Es)
(J)
6
CY1L 6H
0.007
10
CY1L10H
0.03
CY1L15H
0.13
15
20
25
32
40
CY1L15L
0.076
CY1L20H
0.24
CY1L20L
0.16
CY1L25H
0.45
CY1L25L
0.27
CY1L32H
0.88
CY1L32L
0.53
CY1L40H
1.53
CY1L40L
0.95
CY1L
CY1H
CY1F
CYP
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1205
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Slider Type: Ball Bushing Bearing
Series
CY1L
ø6, ø10, ø15, ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
How to Order
Ball Bushing Bearing
CY1L 25
H
300
J79W
Made to Order
Slider type
(Ball bushing bearing)
Refer to page 1207
for details.
Number of auto switches
Bore size
6
6 mm
25
25 mm
10
10 mm
32
32 mm
15
15 mm
40
40 mm
20
20 mm
Nil
2 pcs.
S
1 pc.
n
“n” pcs.
Auto switch
Nil
Port thread type
Symbol
Nil
TN
TF
Type
M thread
Rc
NPT
G
Without auto switch (Built-in magnet)
∗ For the applicable auto switch model,
refer to the table below.
Bore size
ø6, ø10, ø15
ø20, ø25,
ø32, ø40
Adjustment type
Magnetic holding force
Nil
With adjusting bolt
B
With shock absorbers (2 pcs.)
With shock absorber (With plate A)
∗ Installed on side A at time of shipment.
BS
Refer to page 1207 for specifications.
Standard stroke
Refer to “Standard Stroke” on page 1207.
Special function
—
Electrical
entry
Grommet
Connector
Diagnostic indication
(2-color indication)
Water resistant
(2-color indication)
Yes
Solid state switch
Type
Indicator light
Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to pages 1263 to 1371 for further information on auto switches.
Grommet
Grommet
Yes
Reed switch
With diagnostic output
(2-color indication)
Load voltage
Wiring
(Output)
DC
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
5 V, 12 V
2-wire
12 V
3-wire (NPN)
5 V, 12 V
3-wire (PNP) 24 V
2-wire
12 V
4-wire (NPN)
5 V, 12 V
3-wire
(NPN equivalent)
—
—
5V
AC
—
Auto switch model
Perpendicular
F7NV
F7PV
F7BV
J79C
F7NWV
—
F7BWV
In-line
F79
F7P
J79
—
F79W
F7PW
J79W
F7BAV
F7BA
—
F79F
IC
circuit
—
A76H
IC
circuit
—
1206
No Yes No
IC
circuit
—
Relay,
IC
PLC
circuit
—
—
A72H
A72
200 V
—
A73H
A73
100 V
Relay,
A80H
A80
IC circuit
100 V or less
PLC
—
—
A73C
—
IC circuit
—
A80C
∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “” are produced upon receipt of order.
—
12 V
2-wire
5 V, 12 V
24 V
12 V
Connector
5 V, 12 V
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m·········· Nil
(Example) J79W
3 m·········· L
(Example) J79WL
5 m·········· Z
(Example) J79WZ
None·········· N
(Example) J79CN
• Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed, refer to page 1210 for details.
• For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to pages 1328 and 1329.
∗ Auto switches are shipped together, (but not assembled).
—
Lead wire length (m) ∗
0.5 3 5 None Pre-wired Applicable load
(Nil) (L) (Z) (N) connector
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Slider Type: Ball Bushing Bearing
Series
CY1L
Specifications
6
Bore size (mm)
10
15
20
Fluid
Maximum operating pressure
0.7 MPa
Minimum operating pressure
0.18 MPa
Piston speed ∗
50 to 500 mm/s
Rubber bumper/Shock absorber
Cushion
Not required (Non-lube)
Easy piping and wiring
Lubrication
Hollow shafts are used, and centralization of
ports on one side makes piping easy.
Auto switches can be mounted through the
use of special switch rails.
Stroke length tolerance
19.6
53.9
137
231
363
588
922
Type L
–
–
81.4
154
221
358
569
Bore size
(mm)
50, 100, 150, 200
50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300
50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350
400, 450, 500
20
25
32
100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350
400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800
40
100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350
400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800
900, 1000
—X322 Outside of cylinder tube with hard chrome plated
Plate B
1000
CY3B
CY3R
1500
CY1S
1500
CY1L
CY1H
(kg)
Bore size (mm)
6
10
15
20
25
32
40
CY1LH
0.324
0.580
1.10
1.85
2.21
4.36
4.83
CY1LL
–
–
1.02
1.66
2.04
4.18
4.61
0.044
0.077
0.104
0.138
0.172
0.267
0.406
Number of magnets
Shock
absorbers
Basic mass
Additional mass per each
50mm of stroke
R
Bore size Amount of adjustment by adjusting bolt: R(mm)
(mm)
Single side
Both sides
6
10
15
20
25
32
40
750
Mass
Adjusting
bolt
Plate A
300
500
Note) Intermediate stroke is available by the 1 mm interval.
Amount of Adjustment
by Adjusting Bolt
CY1L
Maximum available
stroke (mm)
Standard stroke (mm)
—X116 Hydro specifications rodless cylinder
—X168 Helical insert thread specifications
Auto switch mounting rail
Standard Stroke
15
—XB13 Low speed cylinder (7 to 50 mm/s)
Type H
∗ In the case of setting an auto switch at the intermediate position, the maximum piston speed is subject
to restrict for detection upon the response time of a load (Relays, Sequence controller, etc.).
(For details, refer to pages 1395 to 1565.)
Low speed cylinder (15 to 50 mm/s)
+1.4
+1.8
0 to 250 st: +1.0
0 , 251 to 1000 st: 0 , 1001 st and up: 0
Standard equipment
6
10
Symbol
—XB9
Holding force
Made to Order Specifications
Specifications
40
–10 to 60°C
Ambient and fluid temperature
Impacts at stroke end due to high speed use
can be absorbed, and fine adjustment of the
stroke is possible.
32
1.05 MPa
Proof pressure
Shock absorbers and
adjusting bolt are standard
equipment
25
Air
CYP
Calculation
(Example) CY1L32H-500
• Basic mass ···· 4.36 kg • Additional mass ······ 0.267/50 st • Cylinder stroke ······ 500 st
4.36 + 0.267 x 500 ÷ 50 = 7.03 kg
Shock Absorber Specifications
6
12
5.5
11
3.5
7
5.5
11
5
10
Shock absorber model
5.5
11
Maximum energy absorption: (J)
4.5
9
∗ Since the cylinder is in an intermediate stop
condition when stroke adjustment is performed,
use caution regarding the operating pressure
and the kinetic energy of the load.
∗ The amount of adjustment for adjustment bolts is
the total amount when adjusted on both plate
ends. For the adjustment on a single plate end,
the amount of adjustment is half of the figures in
the table above.
∗ Adjust the stroke adjustment with an adjustment
bolt. It cannot be adjusted by a shock absorber.
CY1F
Refer to the Series RB in Best Pneumatics No. 3 for the details on shock absorbers.
Applicable rodless cylinder
Stroke absorption: (mm)
6
CY1L10
15
RB0805
CY1L20
CY1L25
CY1L32
40
RB1006
RB1411
RB2015
0.98
3.92
14.7
58.8
5
6
11
15
45
25
D-
-X
Collision speed: (m/s)
Max. operating frequency: (cycle/min) ∗
0.05 to 5
80
Spring force: (N)
70
–10 to 80 °C
Ambient temperature range
Extended
1.96
4.22
6.86
8.34
Retracted
3.83
6.18
15.3
20.50
∗ It denotes the values at the maximum energy absorption per one cycle. Therefore, the operating
frequency can be increased according to the energy absorption.
The shock absorber service life is different from that of the CY1L cylinder. Refer to the Specific Product Precautions for the replacement period.
1207
Individual
-X
Technical
data
Series
CY1L
Construction
Slider type/Ball bushing bearing
CY1L6
@2 #3 #9 $0 t #4
@3 @5 @6 e y r
CY1L10 to 40
$0
!9 #8 !0 !2 !6 @4 @1
u q o !1 #2 i @9 w $1
@2 #9 @0 $0 t !4 !5
G
@8
#1 #0 @7
!9 #5$2 #8 !2 !0 !6 !7 @4 @1 !8 @8
$1 #6 #7
F
Area G (ø10)
Enlarged view F
ø10, 15
$1
@3 @5 @6 e y r !3 q #2
#1 @7 #0
!1 o i u w
ø10
Component Parts
No.
Description
Material
Note
Description
Slide block
Material
Aluminum alloy
Note
Anodized
No.
1
29
Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel
2
Plate A
Aluminum alloy
Anodized
30
Switch mounting rail
3
Plate B
Aluminum alloy
Anodized
31
Auto switch
——
4
Cylinder tube
Stainless steel
32
Magnet for auto switch
——
5
Guide shaft A
Carbon steel
Hard chrome plated
33
Steel ball
6
Guide shaft B
Carbon steel
Hard chrome plated
34
Side cover
Carbon steel
ø6 only
7
Piston
Aluminum alloy Note 1)
Chromated
35
Grease cup
Carbon steel
ø15 or larger
8
Shaft
Stainless steel
36 ∗
Wear ring A
Special resin
9
Piston side yoke
Rolled steel
Zinc chromated
37 ∗
Wear ring
Special resin
10
External slider side yoke
Rolled steel
Zinc chromated
38 ∗
Wear ring B
Special resin
11
Magnet A
——
39 ∗
Cylinder tube gasket
NBR
12
Magnet B
——
40 ∗
Guide shaft gasket
NBR
13
Piston nut
Carbon steel
Zinc chromated ø25 to ø40
41 ∗
Piston seal
NBR
14
Retaining ring
Carbon tool steel
Nickel plated
42 ∗
Scraper
NBR
15
Retaining ring
Carbon tool steel
Nickel plated
16
External slider tube
17
Slider spacer
Rolled steel
Nickel plated
Bore size (mm)
Kit no.
Contents
18
Spacer
Rolled steel
Nickel plated
6
CY1S6-PS-N
Set of nos. above #8, #9, $0, $1
19
Ball bushing
——
10
CY1L10-PS-N
Set of nos. above
20
Plug
Brass
ø25, ø32, ø40 only
15
CY1L15-PS-N
#6, #8, #9, $0, $1, $2
21
Adjusting bolt A
Chromium molybdenum steel
Nickel plated
20
CY1L20-PS-N
22
Adjusting bolt B
Chromium molybdenum steel
Nickel plated
25
CY1L25-PS-N
23
Shock absorber
——
32
CY1L32-PS-N
Carbon steel
40
CY1L40-PS-N
24
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
25
Hexagon nut
26
Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel
Nickel plated
27
Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel
Nickel plated
28
Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel
Nickel plated
Note 1) Brass for ø6, ø10 and ø15
1208
Carbon steel
Aluminum alloy
ø6, ø10, ø15 only
——
Replacement Parts: Seal Kit
Aluminum alloy
Hexagon nut
Nickel plated
Set of nos. above
#6, #7, #8, #9, $0,
$1, $2
∗ Seal kit includes #86, #9, $0, $1 for ø6. #6, #8 to $2 are for ø10, ø15. #6 to
$2 are for ø20 to ø40. Order the seal kit, based on each bore size.
∗ ø6: Same for CY1S6
∗ Seal kit includes a grease pack (ø6, ø10: 5 and 10 g, ø15 to ø40: 10 g).
Order with the following part number when only the grease pack is needed.
Grease pack part no. for ø6, ø10: GR-F-005 (5 g) for external sliding parts,
GR-S-010 (10 g) for tube interior
Grease pack part no. for ø15 to ø40: GR-S-010 (10 g)
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Slider Type: Ball Bushing Bearing
Series
CY1L
Dimensions
Slider type/Ball bushing bearing
Z + Stroke
Hollow shaft for piping
4 x MM
Depth M
2 x M5 x 0.8
4xJ
Depth JK
Auto switch mountable
4 x øLD
CY1L6/10
4 x Counterbore dia. øB
4 x Counterbore depth. C
Q + Stroke
Shock absorber
Shock absorber
Side plate
Section IF (CY1L6)
(mm)
Model
A
B
C
D
d
EA
EB
FA
FB
G
GP
H
HA
HB
HG
HI
HO
HP
HS
HT
J
JK
CY1L6
CY1L10
7
6.5
3
7.6
8
—
—
—
—
6
36
27
6
10
11
9
25
26
14
16
M4 x 0.7
6.5
8.5
8
4
10
6
12
3
5
7.5
50
34
6
17.5 14.5 13.5
33
33
21.5 18
M5 x 0.8
9.5
(NA) (NB)
12
Model
L
LD
M
MM
(N)
CY1L6
CY1L10
40
3.5
6
M4 x 0.7
68
4.3
8
M4 x 0.7
11
10.5
30
27
24
19
NN
PA∗
PB
PW
Q
M8 x 1.0
24
40
60
54
M8 x 1.0
30
60
80
85
QW RW
20 12
26
T
TT
ta
tb
W
10
16
—
—
56
68
17.5 12.5 20.5 0.5
1.0
77
103
Z
∗ PA dimensions are for split from center.
CY1L15/20/25/32/40
Z + Stroke
Hollow shaft for piping
Auto switch mountable
2xP
4xJ
Depth JK
4 x MM
Depth M
CY3B
CY3R
CY1S
CY1L
CY1H
CY1F
CYP
4 x Counterbore dia. øB
4 x Counterbore depth. C
Q + Stroke
Shock absorber
Shock absorber
(mm)
Model
CY1L15
CY1L20
CY1L25
CY1L32
CY1L40
Model
CY1L15
CY1L20
CY1L25
CY1L32
CY1L40
A
B
C
D
9.5 5 16.6
9.5 9.5 5.2 21.6
9.5 11
6.5 26.4
7.5
10.5 14
8
11.5 14
8
M
MM
8 M5 x 0.8
10 M6 x 1.0
33.6
41.6
(N)
d
EA EB FA FB G GP
12 6 13 3
6 6.5 65
16 — — — — 8.5 80
16 8 14 4
7 8.5 90
20 8 16 5
7 9.5 110
25 10 20
(NA) (NB)
5
10 10.5 130
NN
P
8.5
27
17
10.5
10 M6 x 1.0 12.5
12 M8 x 1.25 13.5
12 M8 x 1.25 12.5
29
20
49
40
52
42
M5 x 0.8
M10 x 1.0 Rc 1/8
M14 x 1.5 Rc 1/8
M20 x 1.5 Rc 1/8
51
36
M20 x 1.5
M8 x 1.0
Rc 1/4
H
HA
HB
HG
HI
HO
HP HS HT
40
6.5
4
16
14
38
39
25
16
M6 x 1.0
46
9
10
18
16
44
45
31
20
M6 x 1.0
54
9
18
23
21
52
53
39
20
26.5 26.5 24.5 64
30.5 28.5 76
35
64
74
56
66 12
78 12
PA∗
PB
PW
Q
45
70
95
90
50
90
120
105
60
100
130
105
50
22
70
120
160
121
60
90
140
190
159
84
JK
L
LD
9.5
75
5.6
10
86
5.6
M8 x 1.25
10
86
47.5 25
M10 x 1.5
15
100
9.2
30
M10 x 1.5
15
136
9.2
ta
T
QW RW
30 15 12.5 0.5
40 28 16.5 —
J
tb
TT
W
1.0
22.5
92
—
25.5 117
25.5 127
1.0
33
16.5 0.5
18.5 0.5
35
20.5 1.0
1.0
1.0
28.5 157
35.5 187
7
Z Shock absorber
112 RB0805
130 RB1006
D-
130 RB1411
149
194
RB2015
∗ PA dimensions are for split from center.
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1209
Series
CY1L
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position
(Detection at stroke end)
Operating Range
(mm)
Auto switch model
D-A7/A8
D-F7/J7
D-F79F
B
A
(mm)
Applicable auto switch
Bore size
(mm)
D-A73/A80
D-A72
D-A7H/A80H
D-A73C/A80C
D-F7/J79
D-F7V/J79C
D-F7W/J79W
D-F7WV
D-F7BAL/F7BAVL
D-F79F
D-F7NTL
B
A
B
A
B
6
23
45
23.5
44.5
28.5
39.5
10
58
45
58.5
44.5
63.5
39.5
15
65
47
65.5
46.5
70.5
41.5
20
76
54
76.5
53.5
81.5
48.5
25
76
54
76.5
53.5
81.5
48.5
32
92
57
92.5
56.5
97.5
51.5
40
130
64
130.5
63.5
135.5
58.5
Note 1) 50 mm is the minimum stroke available with 2 auto switches mounted.
In the case of a stroke less than this, please contact SMC.
Note 2) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the
actual setting.
Mounting of Auto Switch
When mounting an auto switch, the auto switch mounting screw should be
screwed into a hexagon nut (M3 x 0.5) which has been inserted into the groove
of the switch mounting rail. (Tightening torque: Approx. 0.5 to 0.7 N • m)
Phillips head
screwdriver
Hexagon nut (M3)
(Included as accessory)
Auto switch mounting screw (M3 x 8l)
(Included as accessory)
1210
6
10
15
20
25
32
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
3
3
4
3
3
3
3.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
40
∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to be
guaranteed. (Assuming approximately ±30% dispersion)
There may be the case it will vary substantially depending on an
ambient environment.
Other than the models listed in “How to Order”, the
following auto switches are applicable.
For detailed specifications, refer to page 1314.
Type
A
Auto switch
Bore size
Solid state auto switch
Model
Electrical entry
(Fetching direction)
Features
D-F7NTL
Grommet
(In-line)
With timer
∗ With pre-wired connector is available for D-F7NTL type, too.
For details, refer to pages 1328 and 1329.
Series CY1L
Specific Product Precautions
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matters 54 and 55 for Safety Instructions
and pages 3 to 11 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
Operation
Disassembly and Maintenance
Warning
Warning
1. Be aware of the space between the plates and the
slide block.
1. Use caution as the attractive power of the magnets
is very strong.
Take sufficient care to avoid getting your hands or fingers
caught when the cylinder is operated.
When removing the external slider and piston slider from the
cylinder tube for maintenance, etc., handle with caution, since
the magnets installed in each slider have a very strong
attractive force.
2. Do not apply a load to a cylinder which is greater
than the allowable value stated in the “Model
Selection” pages.
This may cause malfunctions.
3. When the cylinder is used in a place where water or
cutting oil may splash or the lubrication condition on the
cylinder sliding parts would be deteriorated, please
consult with SMC.
4. When applying grease to the cylinder, use the grease that
has already been applied to the product. Contact SMC for
available grease packs.
Mounting
Caution
1. Avoid operation with the external slider fixed to the
mounting surface.
The cylinder should be operated with the plates fixed to the
mounting surface.
2. Make sure that the cylinder mounting surface is a
flatness of 0.2 mm or less.
If the flatness of the cylinder mounting surface is not
appropriate, 2 guide shafts may be twisted. This may
adversely affect the operating conditions and shorten the
service life due to the increase of sliding resistance and the
early abrasion of bearings.
The cylinder mounting surface must be a flatness of 0.2 mm
or less, and the cylinder must be mounted as it smoothly
operates through the full stroke at the minimum operating
pressure (0.18 MPa or less).
Caution
1. Use caution when removing the external slider, as
the piston slider will be directly attracted to it.
When removing the external slider or piston slider from the
cylinder tube, first force the sliders out of their magnetically
coupled positions, and then remove them individually when
there is no longer any holding force. If they are removed while
still magnetically coupled, they will be directly attracted to one
another and will not come apart.
2. Since the magnetic holding force can be changed
(for example, from CY1L25L to CY1L25H), please
contact SMC if this is necessary.
3. Do not disassemble the magnetic components
CY3B
(piston slider, external slider).
CY3R
This can cause a loss of holding force and malfunction.
4. When disassembling to replace the seals and wear
ring, refer to the separate disassembly
instructions.
5. Use caution to the direction of the external slider
and the piston slider.
Since the external slider and piston slider are directional for
ø6, ø10 and holding force type L, refer to the figures below
when performing disassembly or maintenance. Put the
external slider and piston slider together, and insert the piston
slider into the cylinder tube so that they will have the correct
positional relationship as shown in Fig. (1). If they align as
shown in Fig. (2), insert the piston slider after turning it
around 180°. If the direction is not correct, it will be
impossible to obtain the specified holding force.
CY1S
CY1L
CY1H
CY1F
CYP
Service Life and Replacement Period of Shock Absorber
Caution
1. Allowable operating cycle under the specifications
set in this catalog is shown below.
1.2 million times RB08
2 million times RB10 to RB2725
Note) Specified service life (suitable replacement period) is the value at
room temperature (20 to 25°C).
The period may vary depending on the temperature and other
conditions. In some cases the absorber may need to be replaced
before the allowable operating cycle above.
Fig. (1) Correct position
Fig. (2) Incorrect position
Example of ø15 with holding force type L
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1211
Linear Guide Type
Series CY1H
Single axis type: ø10, ø15, ø20, ø25
Double axes type: ø25, ø32
CY3B
CY3R
CY1S
CY1L
CY1H
CY1F
CYP
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1213
Series CY1H
Model Selection 1
Operating Conditions
E: Kinetic energy of load (J)
W
V
E=—· —
2
1000
(
2
)
Es: Allowable kinetic energy for intermediate stop using an air pressure circuit (J)
Ps: Operating pressure limit for intermediate stop using an external stopper, etc. (MPa)
Pv: Maximum operating pressure for vertical operation (MPa)
Wv: Allowable load mass for vertical operation (kg)
α: Load factor
• W: Load mass (kg)
• V: Speed (mm/s)
• P: Operating pressure (MPa) • Stroke (mm)
• Position of workpiece center of gravity (m)
• Mode of operation (Horizontal, Inclined, Vertical)
∑α = — + — + —
Load mass (W)
Max. load mass (Wmax)
Static moment (M)
Dynamic moment (Me)
Allowable static moment (Mmax) Allowable dynamic moment (Memax)
Mode of operation
Note 1)
Horizontal operation
Inclined operation
Vertical operation
Review of load mass
and operating pressure
First tentative bore size determination
øD ≥1.6 x
First tentative bore size determination
W
P
0.1 x Wcosθ + Wsinθ
—
P
øD ≥ 5.0 x
First tentative bore size determination
øD ≥ 5.0 x
0.1 x W + W
P
—
W
Determination of
allowable load
mass & pressure
θ° θ°
Inclined operation
W ≤ Wv
P ≤ Pv
W > Wv
P > Pv
(For vertical operation,
refer to page 1217.)
(Refer to page 1215.)
∑α > 1
Review of operating conditions
∑α =
Load mass (W)
Static moment (M)
Dynamic moment (Me)
—+—+—
Max. load mass (Wmax)
Allowable static moment (Mmax) Allowable dynamic moment (Memax)
Determination of
load factor (∑α)
∑α
Yes
≤1
Note 1)
Intermediate stop?
None
Stop with external stopper
Review of larger bore size
Intermediate
stopping method
E > Es
Stop with air pressure circuit
(For intermediate stops,
refer to page 1217.)
Determination
of kinetic energy
of load (E)
W
V 2
E = — · (—)
2
1000
P > Ps
Determination of
P ≤ Ps
pressure (P) when making
intermediate stop
(For intermediate stops, refer to page 1217.)
Review of larger bore
size and operating pressure
1214
E ≤ Es
Note 1) This cylinder cannot perform
an interm ediate stop using
an pneumatic circuit in
vertical operation.
In this case, an intermediate
Note 2)
stop can be performed only
Consider made-to-order products,
by using an external stopper,
depending on an operating condition.
etc.
Note 2) Made-to-order
products
(Refer to page 1219.)
should be considered, too,
depending on an operating
environment, etc.
Bore size determination
Model selected
Series CY1H
Model Selection 2
Caution on Design (1)
The maximum load mass and allowable moment will differ depending on the workpiece mounting method, cylinder mounting orientation and piston speed.
A determination of usability is performed based on the operating limit values in the graphs with respect to operating conditions, but the total (Σ αn) of the
load factors (αn) for each mass and moment should not exceed 1.
∑αn =
Load mass (W)
Static moment (M)
+
Maximum load mass (W max)
Allowable static moment (M max)
+
Dynamic moment (Me)
≤1
Allowable dynamic moment (Me max)
Wmax, Mmax and Me max values are according to graph (1), (2) and (3) below.
Load Mass
W
Maximum Load
(kg)
Mass
Wmax
CY1H10
4.0
CY1H15
9.0
CY1H20
16.0
CY1H25
40
25
CY1HT32
CY1H20
20
16
CY1H15
10
W
25.0
CY1HT25
CY1H25, CY1HT25
30
Load mass kg
Model
CY1HT32
50
W
9
CY1H10
5
4
3
2
1
0.5
40.0
70
W
100
300
500
1000
Piston speed mm/s
Graph (1)
Moment
M1,M3
Allowable Moment
(Static moment/Dynamic moment)
M3
Model M1
1.5 CY1H25 28
10
CY1HT25 56
13
CY1HT32 64
M2
26
85
96
M3
28
56
64
100 96
85
30 28
CY1H20
13
10
16
CY1H15
5
4
3
2
CY1H10
1.5
1
0.5
Static Moment
10
CY1S
5
4
3
CY1H10
2.5
CY1L
2
1
CY1H
0.5
70
M1
CY3B
CY3R
CY1H25
CY1H20
CY1H15
26
20
20
M3
CY1HT32
CY1HT25
50
40
30
Moment N·m
M2
2.5
16
16
(N·m)
CY1HT32
CY1HT25
CY1H25
64
50 56
40
Moment N·m
Model M1
CY1H10 1.5
CY1H15 10
CY1H20 13
M2
100
100
M2
300
500
70
1000
100
300
Piston speed mm/s
Piston speed mm/s
Graph (2)
Graph (3)
500
1000
CY1F
CYP
Moment generated by the workpiece weight even when the cylinder is stopped
Pitch moment
M1 = W · L
Roll moment
M2 = W · L
Yaw moment
M3 = W (L – A)
L
L
Model
CY1H10
CY1H15
CY1H20
CY1H25
CY1HT25
CY1HT32
A
L
M2
M1
M3
∗ Since there are 2 guides,
the guides’ central axis
and the cylinder’s central
axis are the same.
W
W
(mm)
A
15
17.5
19.5
23.5
0∗
0∗
W
Guide central axis
Moment generated by the load equivalent to impact at the stroke end
We: Load equivalent to impact [N]
δ : Bumper coefficient
With adjusting bolt (standard) = 4/100
With shock absorber = 1/100
W : Load mass [kg]
V : Collision speed [mm/s]
Va : Average speed [mm/s]
Pitch moment
Me1 = 1/3∗ · We · L
Yaw moment
Me3 = 1/3∗ · We (L – A)
∗ Average load coefficient
Me3
Me1
Guide central
axis
We
We
L
A
We = δ · W · V
V = 1.4 Va
L
Dynamic Moment
V
V
Model
CY1H10
CY1H15
CY1H20
CY1H25
CY1HT25
CY1HT32
(mm)
A
15
17.5
19.5
23.5
0∗
0∗
∗ Since there are 2 guides,
the guides’ central axis
and the cylinder’s central
axis are the same.
1215
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
Series CY1H
Model Selection 3
Selection Calculation
The selection calculation finds the load factors (αn) of the items below, where the total (Σαn) does not exceed 1.
∑αn = α1 + α2 + α3 ≤ 1
Item
Load factor
αn
Note
1. Max. load mass
α1 = W/Wmax
Examine W.
Wmax is the max. load mass for Va.
2. Static moment
α2 = M/Mmax
Examine M1, M2, M3.
Mmax is the allowable moment for Va.
3. Dynamic moment
α3 = Me/Memax
Examine Me1, Me3.
Memax is the allowable moment for V.
V : Collision speed
Va : Average speed
Va
Calculation Example
W
Operating Conditions
L1
Load factor αn
Item
zMaximum
load mass
L2
Cylinder: CY1H15
Cushion: Standard (Adjusting bolt)
Mounting: Horizontal wall mounting
Speed (average): Va = 300 [mm/s]
Load mass: W = 1 [kg] (excluding mass of arm section)
L1 = 50 [mm]
L2 = 50 [mm]
L2
W
α1 = W/Wmax
Note
Examine W.
Find the value of Wmax when
Va = 300 mm/s from Graph (1).
= 1/9
= 0.111
L1
xStatic moment
W
M
L1
cDynamic moment
Guide central axis
A
W
We
L2
Me3
Me1
W
L1
We
Σαn = α1 + α2 + α3 + α4
= 0.111 + 0.031 + 0.250 + 0.389
= 0.781
Can be used based on Σαn = 0.781 ≤ 1
1216
M2 = W · L1
= 10 · 0.05
= 0.5 [N·m]
α2 = M2/M2 max
= 0.5/16
= 0.031
W = 1 [kg]
= 10 [N]
Examine M2.
Since M1 & M3 are not generated,
investigation is unnecessary.
Find the value M2 max when
Va = 300 mm/s
from Graph (3).
From V = 1.4 Va
We = δ · W · V
= 4/100 · 10 · 1.4 · 300
= 168 [N]
Me3 = 1/3 · We (L2 – A)
= 1/3 · 168·0.032
= 1.8 [N·m]
α3 = Me3/Me3 max
= 1.8/7.2
= 0.250
Me1 = 1/3 · We · L1
= 1/3 · 168 · 0.05
= 2.8 [N·m]
α4 = Me1/Me1 max
= 2.8/7.2
= 0.389
Examine Me3.
Find the load equivalent to impact We.
Damper coefficient δ = 4/100
(urethane damper)
Find the value of Me3 max when
V = 1.4 and Va = 420 mm/s
from Graph (2).
Examine Me1.
From above, We = 168
Find the value of Me3 max when
V = 1.4 and Va = 420 mm/s
from Graph (2).
Series CY1H
Model Selection 4
Caution on Design (2)
Table Deflection
Table Displacement due to
Roll Moment Load
Table Displacement due to
Pitch Moment Load
Displacement of Section A when force
acts on Section F
Table Displacement due to
Yaw Moment Load
Displacement of Section A when force
acts on Section F
A
Displacement of Section A when force
acts on Section F
F
F Guide central axis (1 axis type)
∗ For the double axis type, this is the
cylinder’s central axis.
L
L
F
A
L
Opposite port side
Guide central axis (1 axis type)
∗ For the double axis type, this is the
cylinder’s central axis.
M1 = F x L
CY1H10
M2 = F x L
CY1H10
Port side
A
0.01
0
0.5
1.0
Deflection (mm)
Deflection (mm)
Deflection (mm)
0.08
0.02
0.06
0.04
0.02
0
1.5
0.5
1.0
Moment (N·m)
1.5
2.0
CY1H15/20/25
CY1H15/20
CY1H25
Deflection (mm)
Deflection (mm)
Deflection (mm)
0.01
0.06
0.04
0
25
20
5
10
Moment (N·m)
15
20
CY1L
0.01
CY1H
0
5
10
0.01
20
25
0.04
0.03
CY1HT32
0.02
CY1F
CYP
CY1HT25/32
CY1HT25 CY1HT32
Deflection (mm)
Deflection (mm)
0.02
15
Moment (N·m)
CY1HT25
0.05
CY3B
CY3R
CY1S
0.02
25
CY1HT25/32
CY1HT25 CY1HT32
CY1H25
0.03
Moment (N·m)
CY1HT25/32
1.5
1.0
Moment (N·m)
0.02
Deflection (mm)
0.5
CY1H15/20
CY1H25
0.02
15
0.01
0
0.08
10
0.02
2.5
CY1H15/20/25
CY1H15/20
5
0.03
Moment (N·m)
CY1H15/20/25
0
M3 = F x L
CY1H10
0.03
0.02
0.01
0.01
0
20
40
60
0
Moment (N·m)
20
40
Vertical Operation
When using in vertical operation, prevention of workpiece dropping due to
breaking of the magnetic coupling should be considered. The allowable load
mass and maximum operating pressure should be as shown in the table below.
When the cylinder is mounted vertically or sidelong, sliders may move
downwards due to the self-weight or workpiece mass. If an accurate stopping
position is required at the stroke end or the middle-stroke, use an external
stopper to secure accurate positioning.
Maximum operating
Allowable load mass
Model
(Wv) (kg)
pressure Pv (MPa)
CY1H10
2.7
0.55
CY1H15
7.0
0.65
CY1H20
11.0
0.65
CY1H25
18.5
0.65
CY1HT25
18.5
0.65
CY1HT32
30.0
0.65
60
0
80
Moment (N·m)
20
40
60
Moment (N·m)
Intermediate Stop
(1) Intermediate Stopping of Load with External Stopper, etc.
(2) Intermediate Stopping of Load with Air Pressure Circuit
When stopping a load in mid-stroke using an
external stopper, etc.,operate within the operating
pressure limits shown in the table below. The
magnetic coupling will break if operated at a
pressure exceeding these limits.
When stopping a load using an air pressure
circuit, operate at or below the kinetic energy
shown in the table below. The magnetic
coupling will break if the allowable value is
exceeded.
Operating pressure limit
for intermediate stop Ps (MPa)
CY1H10
0.55
CY1H15
0.65
CY1H20
0.65
CY1H25
0.65
CY1HT25
0.65
CY1HT32
0.65
Model
Model
CY1H10
CY1H15
CY1H20
CY1H25
CY1HT25
CY1HT32
Allowable kinetic energy for
intermediate stop Es (J)
0.03
0.13
0.24
0.45
0.45
0.88
1217
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Linear Guide Type
Series
CY1H
Single axis: ø10, ø15, ø20, ø25/Double axes: ø25, ø32
How to Order
CY1H
25
300
Y7BW
Made to Order
Linear guide type
Refer to page 1219
for details.
Guide
Bore size
Symbol
Nil
T
(mm)
10
15
20
25
32
1 axis
2 axes
—
—
—
—
Number of auto switches
Nil
S
n
Bore size
10
15
20
25
32
Auto switch
10 mm
15 mm
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
Nil
Nil
TN
TF
Adjustment type
Bore size
ø10, ø15
Type
M thread
Rc
NPT
G
Without auto switch (Built-in magnet)
∗ For the applicable auto switch model,
refer to the table below.
Port thread type
Symbol
2 pcs.
1 pc.
“n” pcs.
With adjusting bolt
Nil
With shock absorbers (2 pcs.)
B
BS
With shock absorber (1 pc. on port side)
∗ The adjusting bolt is installed even when B or
BS is selected.(Except ø10)
ø20, ø25, ø32
Standard stroke (mm)
Refer to “Standard Stroke” on page 1219.
Grommet
Indicator light
—
Electrical
entry
Yes
Special function
Diagnostic indication
(2-color indication)
—
Grommet
Yes
Reed
switch
Type
Solid state
switch
Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to pages 1263 to 1371 for further information on auto switches.
—
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m·········· Nil
3 m·········· L
5 m·········· Z
Load voltage
Wiring
(Output)
DC
3-wire (NPN)
5 V, 12 V
3-wire (PNP)
2-wire
12 V
24 V
3-wire (NPN)
5 V, 12 V
3-wire (PNP)
2-wire
12 V
3-wire
5V
(NPN equivalent) —
2-wire
24 V
AC
—
—
100 V
12 V
5 V, 12 V 100 V or less
(Example) Y7BW
(Example) Y7BWL
(Example) Y7BWZ
Auto switch model Lead wire length (m)∗
Pre-wired
Electrical entry direction
0.5
3 5 connector Applicable load
(Nil)
(L) (Z)
Perpendicular In-line
Y59A
Y69A
IC
circuit
Y7P
Y7PV
—
Y59B
Y69B
Relay,
Y7NWV Y7NW
PLC
IC
circuit
Y7PW
Y7PWV
—
Y7BWV Y7BW
IC
—
Z76
—
circuit
—
—
Z73
Z80
∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “” are produced upon receipt of order.
• For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to pages 1328 and 1329.
• Normally closed (NC = b contact) solid state auto switches (D-Y7G/Y7H types) are also available. Refer to page 1292 for details.
∗ Auto switches are shipped together, (but not assembled).
1218
—
Relay, PLC
IC circuit
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Linear Guide Type
Series
CY1H
Specifications
10
Bore size (mm)
15
20
0.7 MPa
Maximum operating pressure
Minimum operating pressure
0.2 MPa
Proof pressure
1.05 MPa
–10 to 60°C
Ambient and fluid temperature
70 to 1000 mm/s
Piston speed
Made to Order Specifications
Cushion (External stopper)
(For details, refer to pages 1401,
1405 and 1549.)
Lubrication
Specifications
Urethane bumpers on both ends (Standard), Shock absorber (Option)
Not required (Non-lube)
0 to 1.8 mm
Stroke length tolerance
53.9
Holding force N
—XB10 Intermediate stroke (Using exclusive body)
—XB11 Long stroke
137
231
363
588
Centralized piping type
Piping
Rc 1/8
M5 x 0.8
Piping port size
—X168 Helical insert thread specifications
32
Double acting
Action
Symbol
25
Air
Fluid
Standard Stroke
Theoretical Output
(N)
Bore size Piston area
(mm2)
(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
Operating pressure (MPa)
10
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
15
Number
of axes
500
100, 200, 300
100, 200, 300, 400, 500
1 axis
750
10
78
15
23
31
39
54
20
100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600
15
176
35
52
70
88 105 123
25
100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 800
20
314
62
94 125 157 188 219
46
25
490
98 147 196 245 294 343
32
804
161 241 322 402 483 563
Note) Theoretical output (N) = Pressure (MPa) x
Piston area (mm2)
Amount of Adjustment
by Adjusting Bolt
25
Maximum
available stroke (mm)
Standard stroke (mm) Note)
1000
1200
100, 200, 300, 400, 500,
600, 800, 1000
2 axes
32
CY3B
CY3R
1500
Note) Strokes are manufacturable in 1 mm increments up to the maximum strokes. Suffix “-XB10” to the end
of the part number for intermediate strokes excluding standard strokes and “XB11” for strokes
exceeding standard strokes up to the manufacturable maximum strokes.
(kg)
Standard stroke (mm)
Model
100
200
300
400
500
600
800
1000
CY1H10
1.0
1.3
1.6
—
—
—
—
—
CY1H15
2.2
2.7
3.2
3.6
4.1
—
—
—
CY1H20
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.4
4.9
5.4
—
—
CY1H25
4.6
5.3
6.0
6.6
7.3
8.0
9.4
—
CY1HT25
5.1
6.2
7.3
8.3
9.4
10.4
12.5
14.6
CY1HT32
8.4
9.6
10.7
11.9
13.0
14.2
16.5
18.8
Adjusting bolt
Shock absorber model
L
Maximum energy absorption (J)
Stroke absorption (mm)
RB0806
RB1006
RB1411
RB2015
0.98
2.94
3.92
14.7
58.8
5
6
6
11
15
45
25
0.05 to 5
Max. operating frequency (cycle/min)
(mm)
CY1H10, CY1H15,
CY1H20
CY1H25, CY1HT25,
CY1HT32
Spring force (N)
Stroke adjustment range L
Mass (g)
0 to 15
0 to 30
CYP
32
RB0805
Collision speed (m/s) ∗
Model
CY1F
Shock Absorber Specifications
Refer to the Series RB in Best Pneumatics No. 3 for the details on shock absorbers.
Applicable cylinder size (mm)
10
15
20
25
Stopper
CY1L
CY1H
Mass
Stroke adjustment on one side of 15 mm
(CY1H10/15/20) or 30 mm (CY1H25,
CY1HT25, CY1HT32) can be performed
with the adjustment bolt, but when the
amount of adjustment exceeds 3 mm, the
magnetic coupling may be broken
depending on the operating conditions.
Therefore, operation should conform to
the intermediate stop conditions on page
1217.
Do not adjust strokes by moving the
stopper, as this can cause cylinder
damage.
CY1S
80
Extended
Retracted
70
1.96
3.83
22
15
4.22
6.86
8.34
6.18
15.30
20.50
25
65
150
D-
-X
∗ It denotes the values at the maximum energy absorption per one cycle. Therefore, the operating
frequency can be increased according to the energy absorption.
Individual
-X
The shock absorber service life is different from that of the CY1H cylinder. Refer to the Specific
Product Precautions for the replacement period.
Technical
data
1219
Series
CY1H
Construction
Single axis type / CY1H
w !9
#3
@5 @7
@0
#4
q
!6
@1 @2
@44
r
!5 u i !0
t #1 @9 !2
y
o !1 #0
!7
!4
#2 !3
!8
@6
CY1H10-B
CY1H10-BS
CY1H10
@3
e
@8
#0
t
CY1H10-
Component Parts
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
1220
Description
Body
Plate A
Plate B
Cylinder tube
Material
Note
Anodized
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Anodized
Aluminum alloy
Anodized
Stainless steel
Brass
Electroless nickel plated (CY1H10/15)
Piston
Aluminum alloy
Chromated (CY1H20/25)
Carbon steel
Zinc chromated (Except CY1H10/15)
Piston nut
Stainless steel
Shaft
Rolled steel plate
Piston side yoke
Zinc chromated
External slider side yoke Rolled steel plate
Zinc chromated
—
Magnet A
—
Magnet B
Aluminum alloy
External slider tube
Rolled steel plate
Spacer
Nickel plated
Aluminum alloy
Space ring
Chromated (Except CY1H10)
Aluminum alloy
Slide table
Anodized
Aluminum alloy
Side plate A
Anodized
Aluminum alloy
Side plate B
Anodized
Aluminum alloy
Internal stopper
Anodized
Aluminum alloy
Stopper
Anodized
—
Shock absorber
Series RB
Chrome molybdenum steel
Adjusting bolt
Nickel plated
Urethane rubber
Adjusting bumper
—
Linear guide
Aluminum alloy
Top cover
Anodized
Special resin
Dust cover
No.
26
27
28
29 ∗
30 ∗
31 ∗
32 ∗
33 ∗
34 ∗
Description
Magnet (For auto switch)
Parallel pin
Square nut for body mounting
Wear ring A
Wear ring B
Piston seal
Scraper
O-ring
O-ring
Material
—
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Special resin
Special resin
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
Note
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Note) 4 square nuts for body mounting are included regardless of strokes.
Replacement Parts: Seal Kit
Bore size (mm)
10
15
20
25
Kit no.
CY1H10-PS
CY1H15-PS
CY1H20-PS
CY1H25-PS
Contents
Set of the above nos.
@9, #0, #1, #2, #3, #4
∗ Seal kit includes @9 to #4. Order the seal kit, based on each bore size.
∗ Seal kit includes a grease pack (ø10: 5 and 10 g, ø15 to ø25: 10 g).
Order with the following part number when only the grease pack is needed.
Grease pack part no. for ø10: GR-F-005 (5 g) for external sliding parts,
GR-S-010 (10 g) for tube interior
Grease pack part no. for ø15 to ø25: GR-S-010 (10 g)
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Linear Guide Type
Series
CY1H
Construction
Double axes type / CY1HT
!9
#3
@0
!6
!8
q
e
!5
#1 @9 #0 i
#2
r
@1
@2
!4
@8 u
!0
!77
!3 !1 !2
w
@7
t
o y
CY3B
CY3R
@5 @4 @3
CY1S
CY1L
CY1H
CY1HT32
CY1F
@6
CYP
Component Parts
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Description
Material
Aluminum alloy
Body
Aluminum alloy
Plate
Stainless steel
Cylinder tube
Aluminum alloy
Piston
Carbon steel
Piston nut
Stainless steel
Shaft
Rolled steel plate
Piston side yoke
Rolled steel plate
External slider side yoke
—
Magnet A
—
Magnet B
Aluminum alloy
External slider tube
Rolled steel plate
Spacer
Aluminum alloy
Space ring
Aluminum alloy
Slide table
Aluminum alloy
Side plate
Aluminum alloy
Internal stopper
Aluminum alloy
Stopper
—
Shock absorber
Chrome molybdenum steel
Adjusting bolt
Urethane rubber
Adjusting bumper
—
Linear guide
Aluminum alloy
Top cover
Special resin
Dust cover
—
Magnet (For auto switch)
Stainless steel
Parallel pin
Material
Anodized
Anodized
Chromated
Zinc chromated
Zinc chromated
Zinc chromated
No.
26
27
28 ∗
29 ∗
30 ∗
31 ∗
32 ∗
33 ∗
Description
Square nut for body mounting
Hexagon socket head taper plug
Wear ring A
Wear ring B
Piston seal
Scraper
O-ring
O-ring
Material
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Special resin
Special resin
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
Material
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Note) 4 square nuts for body mounting are included regardless of strokes.
Nickel plated
Chromated (Except CY1HT32)
Anodized
Anodized (Except CY1HT32)
Anodized
Anodized
Series RB
Nickel plated
Replacement Parts: Seal Kit
Bore size (mm)
25
32
Kit no.
CY1HT25-PS
CY1HT32-PS
Contents
Set of the above nos.
@8, @9, #0, #1, #2,2 #3
∗ Seal kit includes @8 to #3. Order the seal kit, based on each bore size.
∗ Seal kit includes a grease pack (10 g).
Order with the following part number when only the grease pack is needed.
Grease pack part no.: GR-S-010 (10 g)
D-
-X
Anodized
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1221
Series
CY1H
Dimensions
Single axis type / ø10
CY1H10
4 x M4 x 0.7 thread depth 6
CY1H10-B
46
39.5
23
1
15
Guide central axis
46
1.3
Piping port surface
95 + Stroke
17
36
39.5
17
20.5
17.5
27
7
Square nut for
body mounting
M4 x 0.7
39
2 x M5 x 0.8
54
15
7.5
69
Square nut insertion
12
54
1222
62.5
125 + Stroke
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Linear Guide Type
CY1H
Series
Dimensions
Single axis type / ø15,
ø20, ø25
CY1H15/20/25
L
4 x M thread depth MM
15
CY1H 20 -B
25
LL
PA
PB
ZZ
Guide central axis
XA
XB
Piping port surface
S + Stroke
LW
2xP
PP
HP
HA
H
HT
HG
Square nut for
body mounting J
HC
EB
HB
NT
EA
8
N
A
W
CY3B
CY3R
Z + Stroke
CY1S
CY1L
Square nut insertion
TW
CY1H
NL
CY1F
CYP
(mm)
Model
A
EA
EB
H
HA
HB
HC
HG
HP
HT
J
L
LL
LW
M
MM
N
NL
NT
CY1H15
CY1H20
CY1H25
97
102.5
125
26.5
26.5
29
21
22
24
46
54
63
33.5
42.5
46
33.5
41.5
46
45
53
61.5
17
16
25
42
50
58.5
19
23.5
28
M5 x 0.8
M5 x 0.8
M6 x 1.0
106
108
138
44
48.5
56
71.5
75.5
86
M5 x 0.8
M5 x 0.8
M6 x 1.0
8
8
10
16.5
18
20.5
15
15
18
8
8
9
Model
P
PA
PB
PP
S
TW
W
XA
XB
Z
ZZ
CY1H15
CY1H20
CY1H25
M5 x 0.8
Rc1/8
Rc1/8
50
50
65
62
65
75
21
23
27
161
169
209
65
70
75
88.5
92.5
103
—
—
—
—
11.3
9.5
194
205
250
17.5
19.5
23.5
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1223
Series
CY1H
Dimensions
Double axes type: / ø25,
ø32
CY1HT25/32
LL
138
PA
4 x M thread depth MM
25
CY1HT 32 -B
PB
XB
XA
S + Stroke
2 x Rc 1/8
LW
EB
NT
PP
W
Square nut for
body mounting J
HC
HP
HB
HG
HT
HA
H
EA
N
PS
A
Z + Stroke
Square nut insertion
Square nut insertion
NL
TW
(mm)
Model
A
EA
EB
H
HA
HB
HC
HG
HP
HT
J
LL
LW
M
MM
N
NL
NT
PA
CY1HT25
CY1HT32
125
132.5
28.5
30
79
90
63
75
46
52.5
46
57.5
61.5
72.5
19.5
25
58.5
69.5
35
43
M6 x 1.0
M8 x 1.25
56
63.5
119
130
M6 x 1.0
M8 x 1.25
10
12
20.5
23
18
22.5
9
12
65
66
Model
PB
PP
PS
S
TW
W
XA
XB
Z
CY1HT25
CY1HT32
108
115
18
14
51
61
209
219
110
124
136
150
11.3
9.7
9.5
2
250
265
1224
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Linear Guide Type
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position
(Detection at stroke end)
CY1H
Series
Operating Range
(mm)
Piping port surface
Cylinder model
CY1H
A
Cylinder model
CY1H10
B
CY1HT
A
B
59.5
CY1H15
72
122
CY1H20
77.5
127.5
CY1H25
86
164
CY1HT25
86
164
CY1HT32
82
183
10
15
20
25
32
D-Z7/ Z80
8
6
6
6
—
D-Y5/ Y6/ Y7
6
5
5
5
—
D-Z7/ Z80
—
—
—
6
9
D-Y5/ Y6/ Y7
—
—
—
5
6
∗ Some auto switches cannot be mounted.
∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to be guaranteed.
(Assuming approximately ±30% dispersion)
There may be the case it will vary substantially depending on an ambient
environment.
Applicable auto switch
D-Z7/ Z80/ Y5/ Y6/ Y7
65.5
Auto switch model
Bore size
∗ 50 mm is the minimum stroke available with 2 auto switches mounted. Please
contact SMC in the case of a stroke less than this.
Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the
actual setting.
Mounting of Auto Switch
To install the auto switch,
insert the auto switch into
the installation groove of the
cylinder from the direction
shown in the drawing on the
right, and tighten the auto
switch mounting screws
attached to the auto switch
with a watchmaker’s screwdriver after setting the
mounting position.
CY3B
CY3R
CY1S
CY1L
ø5
to
ø6
CY1H
CY1F
Auto switch
CYP
Auto switch mounting screw
(Included with auto switch)
Watchmaker’s screwdriver
Note) Use a watchmaker’s screwdriver with a grip diameter of 5 to 6 mm
to tighten the auto switch mounting screws (attached to the auto
switch).
The tightening torque should be 0.05 to 0.1 N•m.
Auto Switch Lead Wire
Containment Groove
On models CY1H20 and CY1H25 a groove is provided on the side of the
body (one side only) to contain auto switch lead wires. This should be
used for management of wiring.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Lead wire containment groove
Technical
data
1225
Series CY1H
Specific Product Precautions 1
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matters 54 and 55 for Safety Instructions
and pages 3 to 11 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
Mounting
Operation
Caution
Warning
1. The interior is protected to a certain extent by the
top cover, however, when performing maintenance,
etc., take care not to cause scratches or other
damage to the cylinder tube, slide table or linear
guide by striking them or placing objects on them.
Cylinder bores are manufactured to precise tolerances, so
that even a slight deformation may cause faulty operation.
2. Because the slider is supported by precision
bearings, take care not to apply strong impacts or
excessive moments to the table when loading a
workpiece.
3. Mounting of the cylinder body
The body is mounted using the square nuts, which are
included, in the two T-slots on the bottom of the body. Refer to
the table below for mounting bolt dimensions and tightening
torque.
1. Be aware of the space between the plates and the
slide block.
Take sufficient care to avoid getting your hands or fingers
caught when the cylinder is operated.
2. Do not apply a load to a cylinder which is greater
than the allowable value stated in the “Model
Selection” pages.
This may cause malfunctions.
3. When the cylinder is used in a place where water or
cutting oil may splash or the lubrication condition
on the cylinder sliding parts would be deteriorated,
please consult with SMC.
4. When applying grease to the cylinder, use the
grease that has already been applied to the product.
Contact SMC for available grease packs.
Caution
Model
Bolt dimensions
Tightening torque
CY1H10 CY1H15 CY1H20 CY1H25 CY1HT25 CY1HT32
Thread size M4 x 0.7
Dimension t
l-7
N·m
1.37
M6 x 1.0
M5 x 0.8
l-8
l-8
2.65
M8 x 1.25
l-9
l-12
4.4
13.2
1. The unit can be used with a direct load within the
allowable range, but when connecting to a load
which has an external guide mechanism, careful
alignment is necessary.
Since variation of the shaft center increases as the stroke
becomes longer, a connection method should be devised
which allows for this displacement.
t
l
Square nut
2. Since the guide is adjusted at the time of shipment,
unintentional movement of the adjustment setting
should be avoided.
3. This unit can be operated without lubrication. If
lubrication is performed, use turbine oil Class 1
(with no additives), ISO VG32. (Machine oil and
spindle oil cannot be used.)
4. Please contact SMC before operating in an
environment where there will be contact with
cutting chips, dust (paper debris, lint, etc.) or
cutting oil (gas oil, water, warm water, etc.).
5. Do not operate with the magnetic coupling out of
position.
In case the magnetic coupling is out of position, push the
external slider back into the correct position by hand at the
end of the stroke (or correct the piston slider with air
pressure).
6. Do not disassemble the magnetic components
(piston slider, external slider).
This can cause a loss of holding power and malfunction.
Service Life and Replacement Period of Shock Absorber
Caution
1. Allowable operating cycle under the specifications
set in this catalog is shown below.
1.2 million times RB08
2 million times RB10 to RB2725
Note) Specified service life (suitable replacement period) is the value at
room temperature (20 to 25°C).
The period may vary depending on the temperature and other
conditions. In some cases the absorber may need to be replaced
before the allowable operating cycle above.
1226
Series CY1H
Specific Product Precautions 2
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matters 54 and 55 for Safety Instructions
and pages 3 to 11 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
Stroke Adjustment Method
Loosen the round head Phillips Screws, and remove the top
cover and dust covers (4 pcs.).
Round head
Phillips screw
Top cover
Hexagon nut
Dust cover
Shock absorber
Hexagon nut
Adjusting bolt
Loosen the hexagon nut, adjust the stroke with a hexagon wrench
from the plate side, and secure by retightening the hexagon nut.
When there is a shock absorber, loosenthe hexagon nut, adjust
the stroke, and then retighten the hexagon nut.
Adjustment should be performed to make effective use of the
shock absorber’s absorption capacity, with its position relative to
the adjustment bolt as shown in the figure to the right.
CY3B
CY3R
CY1S
Caution
CY1L
1. If the effective stroke of the shock absorber is
shortened by the stroke adjustment, its absorption
capacity will be drastically reduced. Therefore, the
adjusting bolt should be secured at a position
where it projects about 0.5 mm farther than the
shock absorber.
Lock Nut Tightening Torque
Model
CY1H10
CY1H15
CY1H20
CY1H25
CY1HT25
CY1HT32
For shock absorber
1.67
CY1H
CY1F
CYP
N·m
For adjusting bolt
1.67
3.14
10.8
3.14
23.5
Shock absorber
0.5
Adjusting bolt
After completing the above adjustment, replace the top cover and dust
covers back into place.
The round head Phillips screws for securing the top cover should be
tightened with a torque of 0.58 N·m.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1227
CAT.NAS20-170 B
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Low Profile Guide Type
Series
CY1F
Size: ø10, ø15, ø25
Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder featuring compact and low profile design.
New Series of
magnetically
coupled
rodless
Magnetically
coupled
rodless
cylinder
Withmounting
reduced mounting
and overall
length,
With reduced
heightheight
and overall
length,
Low profile Height reduced by
Overall length reduced by
Compact body
29%
31%
CY1F
MY2H
CY1H
CY1H
CY1F
Height
mm
Overall length
mm
Series
ø10
ø15
ø25
Series
ø10
ø15
ø25
CY1F
CY1H
28
39.5
34
46
46
63
CY1F
CY1H
MY2H
198
225
s
205
294
260
240
350
310
∗For 100mm stroke cylinder
Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder: Low profile guide
Series CY1F: ø10,
ø15, ø25
Overall length reduced by 22% compared to Series MY2H
4 types of stroke adjustment are available.
Various concentrated piping ports are available.
Piping port position can be specified using a part number.
3 types of piping screws are available.
Conc
left
entrat
ing on
ed pip
p
i
p
d
e
ing on
entrat
right
Conc
Left
adjustment bolt
Both sides
standard type
Right
adjustment bolt
-1mm to 0mm
-1mm to 0mm
-25mm to 0mm
-1mm to 0mm
-1mm to 0mm
-25mm to 0mm
-25mm to 0mm
-25mm to 0mm
AL type
AR type
Piping port
Piping port
A type
Features 1
cylinder featuring
eaturing
compact
and profile
low profile
design.
featuring
compact
and low
design.
smallwork
work pieces
can
be transferred
with high
precision.
small
pieces
can
be transferred
with
high precision.
Lightweight Weight reduced by
50%
kg
Series
ø10
ø15
ø25
CY1F
CY1H
MY2H
0.7
1.0
s
1.1
2.2
1.3
2.5
4.6
3.2
∗For 100mm stroke cylinder
Available bore sizes ø10, 15, 25
Model
CY1F
Bore size
(mm)
Standard stroke (mm)
50
100 150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
550
600
Maximum
stroke
10
500
15
750
25
1200
Accumulated dust on the guide can be
removed easily without an end cover.
Cushion
Piping
directions
Concentrated
piping on right
Built-in
shock absorber Concentrated
piping on left
The cylinder and guide are integrated.
The cylinder portion can be replaced without interfering with the work piece.
Guide
Gasket for cylinder body
Actuator (cylinder)
f
Features 2
CY1F
Series
Model Selection 1
M2: Rolling
M1: Pitching
Standards for Tentative Model Selection
Cylinder model
Guide model
Standard for guide selection
Graph for related
allowable values
CY1F
High precision guide (Single axis)
Slide table accuracy approx. w0.05mm or less
Refer to page 28
M3: Yawing
Selection Flow Chart
Es: Allowable kinetic energy for intermediate stop by pneumatic circuit (J)
Ps: Operating pressure limit for intermediate stop by external stopper, etc.
Limit value(MPa)
Pv: Maximum operating pressure in vertical operation (MPa)
mv: Maximum allowable load mass in vertical operation (kg)
α : Load factor
Dynamic moment (ME)
Load mass (m)
+ Static moment (M) + Allowable dynamic moment (MEmax)
Σα =
Maximum allowable load (m max) Allowable static moment (Mmax)
E: Load kinetic energy (J)
E=
m
2
(
υa
1000
Operating conditions
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
m: Load mass (kg)
⋅ υa: Average speed
P: Operating pressure (MPa)
L: Center of gravity of the work piece (mm)
Mode of operation (Horizontal, Inclination, Vertical)
2
)
Mode of
operation
Note 1)
Horizontal actuation
Inclination actuation
Perpendicular actuation
Review of load mass
and operating pressure
First tentative bore size selection
m
øD M 1.6 x
P
First tentative bore size selection
0.1 x mcosθ + msinθ
øD M 5.0 x
P
First tentative bore size determination
0.1 x m + m
øD M 5.0 x
P
m
θ˚ θ˚
m m mv
P m Pv
Inclined operation
Σα L 1
Review of operating conditions
Σα =
Load mass (m)
Maximum allowable load (m max)
Static moment (M)
+ Allowable
+
static moment (Mmax)
Determination of
load factor (Σα)
Dynamic moment (ME)
Allowable dynamic moment (MEmax)
m L mv
Determination
P L Pv
of allowable load mass
& pressure (Refer to page 29)
(Refer to page 27)
Σα m 1
Note 1)
Yes
Stopped by external stopper
E=
1
No
m υa 2
2 1000
(
Determination of pressure
for intermediate stop (p)
Review of larger bore size
and operating pressure
Stopped by pneumatic circuit
Determination
of load's
kinetic energy (E)
E L Es
Review of larger bore size
P L Ps
Intermediate
stop method
Intermediate
stop
)
E m Es
Determination
bore size
of bore size
(Refer to page 29)
P m Ps
(Refer to page 29)
Model
determination
Note 1) This cylinder cannot be stopped at an
intermediate position by a pneumatic circuit.
The only possible way in that case is the use
of an external stopper.
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Low Profile Guide Type
CY1F
Series
Types of Moment Applied to Rodless Cylinders
Multiple moments may be generated depending on the mounting orientation load and position of the center of gravity.
z
Coordinates and Moments
M3: Yawing
M1: Pitching
y
x
M2: Rolling
Static moment
Ceiling mounting
Horizontal mounting
Wall mounting
M1
M2
x
Y
X
M2
y
M1
x
Y
y
x
X
m1 x g
M3
z
X
Z
m2 x g
Vertical mounting
m3 x g
Mounting
orientation
Horizontal
Ceiling
Wall
m1
m2
m3
Static load m
M1
z
Y
Static moment
M3
z
M2
y
Vertical
m4
M1
m1 x g x X m2 x g x X
m4 x g x Z
M2
m1 x g x Y m2 x g x Y m3 x g x Z
m3 x g x X m4 x g x Y
M3
m4 x g
g: Gravitational acceleration
Dynamic moment
z
Mounting
Horizontal Ceiling
orientation
M1
υa
υa
M3
mn x g
M1E
M3E
FE
FE
g: Gravitational acceleration, υa: Average speed
Dynamic moment
Dynamic load FE
M1E
Wall
1.4
x a x mn x
100
1
x FE x Z
3
υ
Vertical
g
M2E
Dynamic moment M2E is not generated.
M3E
1
x FE x Y
3
Note) Regardless of the mounting orientation, dynamic moment
is calculated with the formulas above.
mn x g
Y
2
Series
CY1F
Maximum Allowable Moment/Maximum Allowable Load
(1kg = 2.2lbs )
Model
Bore size
(mm)
CY1F
10
15
25
Maximum allowable moment (N⋅m)
M1
M2
Maximum allowable moment
Maximum allowable load (kg)
M3
m1
m2
m3
m4
1.4
1
2
1
2
2
2
1.5
3
1.5
5
5
5
2
14
20
14
12
12
12
12
The above values are the maximum allowable values for moment and load. Refer to each graph regarding the maximum
allowable moment and maximum allowable load for a particular piston speed.
Select the moment from within the range of
operating limits shown in the graphs. Note
that the maximum allowable load value may
sometimes be exceeded even within the
operating limits shown in the graphs.
Therefore, also check the allowable load for
the selected conditions.
Load (kg)
m1
m4
m2
m3
Moment (N⋅m)
M3=F3 x L3
M1=F1 x L1
M2=F2 x L2
F2
L2
L1
F1
L3
F3
<Calculation guide load factor>
1. Maximum allowable load (1), static moment (2), and dynamic moment (3) (at the time of impact with
stopper) must be examined for the selection calculations.
∗ To evaluate, use υa (average speed) for (1) and (2), and υ (impact speed υ = 1.4υa) for (3).
Calculate m max for (1) from the maximum allowable load graph (m1, m2, m3) and Mmax for (2) and (3) from the
maximum allowable moment graph (M1, M2, M3).
Sum of guide Σα =
load factors
Load mass [m]
Maximum allowable load [m max]
+
Static moment [M] Note 1)
Allowable static moment [Mmax]
+
Dynamic moment [ME] Note 2)
Allowable dynamic moment [MEmax]
m1
Note 1) Moment caused by the load, etc., with cylinder in resting condition.
Note 2) Moment caused by the impact load equivalent at the stroke end (at the time of impact with stopper).
Note 3) Depending on the shape of the work piece, multiple moments may occur. When this happens, the sum of the load
factors (Σα) is the total of all such moments.
2. Reference formulas [Dynamic moment at impact]
Use the following formulas to calculate dynamic moment when taking stopper impact into consideration.
m : Load mass (kg) (1kg =2.2 lbs)
υ : Impact speed (mm/s)
F : Load (N) (1N = 0.225 lbf)
L1 : Distance to the load's center of gravity (m)
FE : Load equivalent to impact (at impact with stopper) (N) ME : Dynamic moment (N⋅m)
υa: Average speed (mm/s)
g : Gravitational acceleration (9.8m/s2)
M : Static moment (N⋅m) (1N⋅m = 0.74 ft⋅lb)
FE =
1.4
100
υa⋅g⋅m Note 4)
1
∴ME =
⋅ FE ⋅ L1 = 0.05υa m L1 (N⋅m) Note 5)
3
Note 4)
1.4
100
υa is a dimensionless coefficient for calculating impact force.
Note 5) Average load coefficient (=
1 ):
3
This coefficient is for averaging the maximum load moment at
the time of stopper impact according to service life calculations.
3. Refer to page 30 and 31 for detailed selection procedures.
3
υ
m
L1
υ = 1.4υa (mm/s)
FE
ME
Maximum allowable load
Select the load from within the range of
limits shown in the graphs. Note that the
maximum allowable moment value may
sometimes be exceeded even within the
operating limits shown in the graphs.
Therefore, also check the allowable
moment for the selected conditions.
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Low Profile Guide Type
1 CY1F/M1
2 CY1F/M2
30
30
20
20
CY1F
3 CY1F/M3
30
CY1F25
20
CY1F25
CY1F25
10
5
5
5
4
3
Moment N⋅m
10
Moment N⋅m
10
Moment N⋅m
Series
4
CY1F15
3
4
3
CY1F10
2
2
2
CY1F15
CY1F15
CY1F10
1
1
1
0.5
0.5
0.5
50
100
300
500
CY1F10
50
100
Piston speed mm/s
300
50
500
100
Piston speed mm/s
300
500
Piston speed mm/s
(1N•m = 0.74 ft•lb)
4 CY1F/m1
5 CY1F/m2
7 CY1F/m4
30
30
30
30
20
20
20
20
CY1F25
CY1F15
Load mass kg
5
10
4
3
2
CY1F10
5
CY1F15
4
3
2
CY1F25
10
Load mass kg
10
CY1F25
CY1F10
5
10
CY1F15
Load mass kg
CY1F25
Load mass kg
6 CY1F/m3
4
3
2
CY1F10
5
4
3
2
CY1F15
CY1F10
1
1
0.5
1
0.5
50
100
300 500
Piston speed mm/s
1
0.5
50
100
300 500
Piston speed mm/s
0.5
50
100
300 500
Piston speed mm/s
50
100
300 500
Piston speed mm/s
(1 kg = 2.2 lbs))
4
Series
CY1F
Vertical Actuation
qVertical operation
In vertical operation, observe the maximum load mass and the maximum operating pressure shown in the table below to prevent a
drop due to slipping off of magnet couplings.
Caution
If the maximum load mass or maximum operating pressure is exceeded, it will cause the magnet coupling to slip off.
Bore size
(mm)
Maximum load weight mv
lb (kg)
Maximum operating pressure Pv
psi (MPa)
10
3.1 (1.4)
80 (0.55)
15
4..4 (2.0)
94 (0.65)
25
26.5 (12)
94 (0.65)
Intermediate Stop
qIntermediate stop by external stopper or stroke adjustment with adjustment bolt.
Observe the maximum pressure limit in the table below in case of intermediate stop by an external stopper or stroke adjsutment with
the attached adjustment bolt.
Caution
Be careful if the operating pressure limit is exceeded, it will cause the magnet coupling to slip off.
Bore size
(mm)
Holding force
lbf (N)
Operating pressure limit
for intermediate stop Ps psi (MPa)
10
12.1 (53.9)
80 (0.55)
15
30.8 (137)
94 (0.65)
25
81.6 (363)
94 (0.65)
wThe load is stopped by pneumatic circuit.
Observe the maximum kinetic energy in the table below in case the load is stopped at an intermediate position by a pneumatic circuit.
Note that intermediate stop by a pneumatic circuit is not available in vertical operation.
Caution
If the allowable kinetic energy is exceeded, it will cause the magnet coupling to slip off.
5
Bore size
(mm)
Allowable kinetic energy for intermediate stop Es
in•lbs (J)
10
0.27 (0.03)
15
1.15 (0.13)
25
3.98 (0.45)
Series
CY1F
Model Selection 2
Selection Calculation
The selection calculation finds the load factors (Σαn) of the items below, where the total (αn) does not exceed 1.
Σαn = α1 + α2 + α3 m 1
Item
Load factor
αn
Note
zMaximum load mass
α1=m/mmax
Review m
m max is the maximum load mass at υa
xStatic moment
α2=M/Mmax
Review M1, M2, M3
Mmax is the allowable moment at υa
cDynamic moment
α3=M /M max
Review M1E, M2E, M3E
MEmax is the allowable moment at υa
E
E
L1
υ: Collision speed υa: Average speed
Calculation example 1
υa
Operating conditions
Cylinder: CY1F15
Terminal butter mechanism: Standard (shock absorber)
Mounting: Wall mounting
Speed (average) : υa = 300 [mm/s]
Load mass: m = 0.5 [kg] (excluding weight of arm section)
L1 = 50 [mm]
L2 = 40 [mm]
m
Load factor αn
Item
L2
Note
zLoad mass
α1 = m/mmax
= 0.5/5
= 0.1
Investigate m.
Find the value of m max. at 300mm/s
in Graph 6 for m3 on page 28.
m
L1
xStatic moment
M2 = m x g x L1
= 0.5 x 9.8 x 0.05
= 0.245 [N⋅m]
M2
Investigate M2.
M1 and M3 are not required because
they are not generated.
α2 = M2/M2 max
= 0.245/3
= 0.082
mxg
cDynamic moment
M1E = 1/3 x FE x L1
L1
M1
υa
M1E
mxg
FE
υa
M3
M3E
FE
mxg
L2
(FE = 1.4/100 x υa x g x m)
= 0.05 x υa x m x L1
= 0.05 x 300 x 0.5 x 0.05
= 0.375 [N⋅m]
α3A = M1E/M1E max
= 0.375/1.07
= 0.350
M3E = 1/3 x FE x L2
(FE = 1.4/100 x υa x g x m)
= 0.05 x υa x m x L2
= 0.05 x 300 x 0.5 x 0.04
= 0.3 [N⋅m]
α3B = M3E/M3E max
= 0.3/1.07
= 0.28
From above,
Σαn = α1 + α2 + α3A + α3B = 0.1 + 0.082 + 0.35 + 0.28 = 0.812.
From Σαn = 0.812 m 1, it is applicable.
Find the value of M2 max. at 300mm/s
in Graph 2.
Investigate M1E.
Find the collision speed υ.
υ=1.4 x υa
=1.4 x 300
=420 [mm/s ]
Find the value of ME1 max. at 420mm/s
in Graph 1.
Investigate M3E.
From above, find the value of M3E max
at 420mm/s in Graph 3.
6
Series
CY1F
Model Selection 3
υa
Calculation example 2
Operating conditions
Cylinder: CY1F25
Terminal butter mechanism: Standard (shock absorber)
Mounting: Vertical mounting
Speed (average) : υa =300 [mm/s]
Load mass: m = 3 [kg] (excluding weight of arm section)
L1 = 50 [mm]
L2 = 40 [mm]
L2
m
L1
Load factor αn
Item
Note
zLoad mass
α1 = m/mmax
= 3/12
= 0.25
Investigate m.
Find the value of m max. at 300mm/s
in Graph 7 for m3.
m
xStatic moment
M 1 = m x g x L1
= 3 x 9.8 x 0.05
= 1.47 [N⋅m]
M1
α2a =M1/M1 max
Investigate M1.
Find the value of M2 max. at 300mm/s
in Graph 1.
=1.47/14
=0.105
L1
M3 = m x g x L2
= 3 x 9.8 x 0.04
= 1.176 [N⋅m]
mxg
M3
Investigate M3.
Find the value of M3 max. at 300mm/s
in Graph 3.
α2b = M3/M3 max
L2
= 1.176/14
= 0.084
mxg
cDynamic moment
υa
M1
mxg
L1
M1E = 1/3 x FE x L1
(FE =1.4/100 x υa x g x m)
=0.05 x υa x m x L1
=0.05 x 300 x 3 x 0.05
=2.25 [N⋅m]
α3A = M1E/M1E max
= 2.25/10
= 0.225
Investigate M1E.
Find the collision speed U
υ = 1.4 x υa
= 1.4 x 300
= 420 [mm/s]
Find the value of M1E max. at 420mm/s
in Graph 1.
M1E
FE
υa
M3
L2
M3E = 0.05 x υa x m x L2
(FE = 1.4/100 x υa x g x m)
= 0.05 x 300 x 3 x 0.04
= 1.8 [N⋅m]
α3B = M3E/M3E max
M3E
FE
mxg
= 1.8/10
= 0.18
From above,
Σαn = α1 + α2a + α2b + α3A + α3B = 0.25 + 0.105 + 0.084 + 0.225 + 0.18 = 0.844
From Σαn = 0.844 m 1, it is applicable.
7
Investigate M3E.
From above, find the value of M3E max.
at 420mm/s in Graph 3.
Magnetically Coupled Rodelss Cylinder
Series CY1F
Low Profile Guide Typ/ø10, ø15, ø25
How to order
CY1F 10
R
300
F9BW
Number of
auto switches
Nil
S
n
Bore size (mm)
10
15
25
10
15
25
2 pcs.
1 pc.
"n" pcs.
Auto switch
Nil
Without auto switch
∗Refer to the table below for auto
switch model numbers.
Piping thread type
Symbol
Nil
TN
TF
Type
M
Rc
NPT
G
Adjustment bolt suffix
Bore size (mm)
10, 15
Nil
AL
25
AR
A
Both sides are standard
Right: Standard
For 25 mm adjustment on left
For 25 mm adjustment on right
Left: Standard
For 25 mm adjustment on both sides
Piping direction
R: Concentrated piping on right
L: Concentrated piping on left
Plug
Piping port
Solid state switch
Reed switch
Special Electrical
function entry
Indicator light
Type
Applicable auto switches/Refer to pages 14 through 19 for detailed auto switch specifications.
Wiring
(output)
Load voltage
DC
No
s
2-wire
Grommet
Yes
s
Grommet Yes
Diagnostic
indication
2-color
display
24V
AC
Perpendicular
In-line
3
(L)
5
(Z)
Applicable load
A90
P
P
s
IC
circuit
12V 100V
A93V
A93
P
P
s
s
A96V
A96
P
P
s
IC
circuit
F9NV
F9N
P
P
p
F9PV
F9P
P
P
p
F9BV
F9B
P
P
p
F9NWV
F9NW
P
P
p
F9PWV
F9PW
P
P
p
F9BWV
F9BW
P
P
p
24V
5V
12V
12V
s
s
∗Lead wire length symbols 0.5m///////////// Nil (Example) F9NW
3m/////////////// L
F9NWL
5m/////////////// Z
F9NWZ
∗Solid state switches marked with a "p" symbol are produced upon receipt of order.
9
0.5
(Nil)
A90V
12V
2-wire
2-wire
Lead wire length (m)∗
5V 100V
12V or less
3-wire
(NPN equiv.) s 5V
3-wire
(NPN)
5V
12V
3-wire
(PNP)
3-wire
(NPN)
3-wire
(PNP)
Auto switch models
Electrical entry direction
Relay
PLC
s
IC
circuit
s
IC
circuit
s
Relay
PLC
Plug
(Canas bepipingused) (Canas bepipingused)
Piping port
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Low Profile Guide Type
Series
CY1F
Specifications
Bore size (mm)
10
15
25
Air
Fluid
Non-lube
Lubrication
Double acting
Actuation
101psi (0.7 MPa)
Maximum operating pressure
29psi (0.2MPa)
Minimum operating pressure
152psi (1.05MPa)
Proof pressure
14 to 140°F (–10 to 60°C)
Ambient and fluid temperature
50 to 500
Piston speed (mm/s)
Built-in shock absorber
Cushion
0 to 250st:
Stroke length tolerance (mm)
Stroke adjustment movable range (mm)
+1.0
0
251 to 1000st:
+1.4
0
s1.2 to 0.8
Note 1)
1001st to:
+1.8
0
s1.4 to 0.6
Centralized piping
Piping type
Port size Note 2)
M5 x 0.8
1/8
Note 1) The stroke adjustment movable range in the above table is that for the standard adjustment bolt.
For more information, please refer to page 31.
Note 2) With ø25, piping screws can be selected by the customer. (Refer to How to Order.)
Shock Absorber Specifications
10, 15
25
Shock absorber model
RB0805- X552
RB1006- X552
Max. energy absorption
8.6 ft•lb (0.98J)
34.7 ft•lb (3.92J)
5
6
Applicable bore size (mm)
Stroke absorption (mm)
Max. impact speed (m/s)
Note)
0.05 to 5
80
70
When expanded
0.44 lbf (1.96N)
0.95 lbf (4.22N)
When compressed
0.86 lbf (3.83N)
1.39 lbf (6.18N)
0.5oz. (15g)
0.88 oz. (25g)
Max. operating frequency (cycle/min)
Spring force
Weight
Note) Represents the maximum absorption energy per cycle. Thus, the operation frequency can be increased
with the absorption energy.
Standard Stroke
Bore size
(mm)
Maximum stroke
Standard stroke (mm)
available (mm)
10
50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300
15
50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500
750
25
100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600
1200
500
∗The stroke is available in 1 mm increments with the maximum stroke as the upper limit. For a stroke in
the standard stroke range, suffix the part number with-XB10. If the stroke does not fall within the
standard stroke range, suffix the part No. with-XB11.
Refer to the Made to Order Specifications on page 20.
Magnetic Holding Force
Unit: lbf (N)
Bore size (mm)
Holding force
Ordeer
Mad
10
12.1 (53.9)
15
25
30.8 (137)
81.6 (363)
Made to order Specifications
(Refer to page 20 regarding Made to Order Specifications for series CY1F)
10
Series
CY1F
Theoretical Output
Weights
Unit: kg
Unit: lbf (N)
Bore size Piston
area
(mm)
(mm2)
10
15
25
Operating pressure psi [MPa]
29 (0.2) 44 (0.3) 58 (0.4) 73 (0.5) 87 (0.6) 101 (0.7)
Model
Basic
weight
Additional weight
per 50 mm stroke
Standard adjustment Weight of adjustment bolt
bolt weight
for 25 mm adjustment
3.4
(15)
5.2
(23)
7.0
(31)
8.8
(39)
10.3
(46)
12.11
(54)
CY1F10 0.520
0.095
0.004
0.012
78
CY1F15 0.815
0.133
0.004
0.012
176
7.9
(35)
11.7
(52)
15.7
(70)
19.8
(88)
23.6
(105)
27.7
(123)
CY1F25 1.970
0.262
0.007
490
22
(98)
33
(147)
44.1
(196)
55.1
(245)
Note) Theoretical output (N) = Pressure (MPa) x Piston area
66.1
(294)
77.1
(343)
(mm2)
0.021
(1 kg = 2.2 lbs)
Calculation method example: CY1F15-150AL
Basic weight ////////////////////////// 0.815kg Cylinder stroke////////////// 150st
Additional weight ////////////////// 0.133kg/50st Left////////// 25 mm adjustment bolt
Right///// Standard adjustment bolt
Standard adjustment bolt weight /////// 0.004kg
Weight of adjustment bolt for 25 mm adjustment ////0.012kg
0.815 + 0.133 x 150 v 50 + 0.004 + 0.012 = 1.23 (kg)
Option
Replacement Parts
Adjustment bolt
Part number of replacement shock absorber
Bore size (mm)
Shock absorber model no.
Bore size (mm)
Standard adjustment bolt
25 mm adjustment bolt
10, 15
CYF-S10
CYF-L10
10, 15
RB0805- X552
25
CYF-S25
CYF-L25
25
RB1006- X552
Note) Order 2 units for each unit of cylinder.
Replacement Actuator (Cylinder)
CY1F B 10
R
Cylinder
identification symbol
Stroke
Piping direction suffix
R Centralized piping on right
L Centralized piping on left
Bore size (mm)
10
15
25
10
15
25
Piping thread type
Symbol
Nil
TN
TF
11
Thread type
M
Rc
NPT
G
Bore size (mm)
10, 15
25
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Low Profile Guide Type
Series
CY1F
Construction
A
A
CY1F15 Detailed view of driving cylinder
CY1F25 Detailed view of driving cylinder
Section A-A
Parts list
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Description
Body (rodless cylinder)
Body
End cover A
End cover B
Cylinder tube
6
Piston
7
8
Piston nut
Shaft
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Parts list
Material
Aluminium alloy
Aluminium alloy
Aluminium alloy
Aluminium alloy
Stainless steel
Aluminium alloy
Brass
Carbon steel
Stainless steel
Note
Anodized
Hard anodized
Hard anodized
Hard anodized
Chromate (ø25)
Electroless nickel plated (ø10, ø15)
(Only for ø25)
Zinc chromated (ø15, ø25)
Piston side yoke Rolled steel plate
Zinc chromated (ø10)
Zinc chromated (ø15, ø25)
External slider side yoke Rolled steel plate
Zinc chromated (ø10)
(ø15, ø25)
Rare earth magnet
Magnet A
(ø10)
(ø15, ø25)
Rare earth magnet
Magnet B
(ø10)
Chromate
Piston spacer
Aluminium alloy
Spacer
Rolled steel plate Nickel plated
Bumper
Urethane rubber
Attachment ring Aluminium alloy Hard anodized
Special resin
Wear ring A
Wear ring B
Special resin
Wear ring C
Special resin
Slide table
Aluminium alloy
Hard anodized
Adjuster holder
Electroless nickel plated
Carbon steel
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Description
Material
Adjustment bolt
Chrome molybdenum steel
Adjuster holder positioning key
Carbon steel
Magnet
Rare earth magnet
Guide
Shock absorber
Steel ball
Bearing steel
C type snap ring for hole Carbon tool steel
C type snap ring Hard steel wire
for shaft
Stainless steel
Snap ring
Stainless steel
Hexagon socket head set screw Chrome molybdenum steel
Hexagon socket head set screw Chrome molybdenum steel
Hexagon socket head bolt Chrome molybdenum steel
Hexagon socket head bolt Chrome molybdenum steel
Hexagon socket head bolt Chrome molybdenum steel
Hexagon socket head bolt Chrome molybdenum steel
Hexagon socket head bolt Chrome molybdenum steel
Flat washer
Rolled steel
Square nut
Carbon steel
Hexagon socket head plug Chrome molybdenum steel
41
Hexagon socket head plug Chrome molybdenum steel
42
43
44
45
Cylinder tube gasket
Piston seal
Scraper
Body (rodless cylinder) gasket
No.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Note
Nickel plated
Zinc chromated
Nickel plated
(ø15)
(ø10, ø25)
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
(Hexagon socket head taper plug for ø25)
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
12
Series
CY1F
Dimensions
QA
CY1F
Q + Stroke
1/2 (Q + Stroke)
LA
PA
4-MM thread depth ML
Cylinder mounting center
Guide center,
Work piece mounting center
XAH7
XY
Oval hole depth XL
PB
Note1)
Adjustment bolt
Note2)
6-øYA recessed area
6-øYB through hole
PC
MAX. approx. LZ LL
EB
Adjustment bolt
(Retraction end
approx. T
with no adjustment) EA
QW QB
(LL)
approx. T
CY1F10 to 25nn-nA-nn
nAL
For actuator cylinder
mounting
Hexagon socket head
set screw
øXAH7 depth XL
EA
EB
LL
LW
Adjustment bolt
Note1)
Adjustment bolt
Shock absorber (2 pcs.)
For shock absorber fixing
Set screws (4 positions)
Note1) approx. T
L
MAX. approx. LZ
(Retraction end with
no adjustment)
CY1F10 to 25nn-nA-nn
nAR
EA
EB
LL
Concentrated piping on right (CY1F10 to 25nR-nn-nn)
KB
ES
G
KW
N
Adjustment
bolt
GD
GA
HB
GB
EY
KH
KC EH
HW
GC
2-P
2-P
(Hexagon socket
(Piping port) head plug)
For adjustment bolt fixing
Hexagon socket head bolt
H
EW
HA
GB
GA
KA
N
A
Z + Stroke
Concentrated piping on left (CY1F10 to 25nL-nn-nn)
KB
For adjustment bolt fixing
Hexagon socket head bolt 2-P
(Hexagon socket head plug)
GA
HB
GA
KW
Adjustment
bolt
GD
HW
2-P
(Piping port)
G
N
H
GB
EY
KH
KC EH
ES
HA
EW
GB
KA
N
A
GC
Z + Stroke
Standard stroke
A
EA
EB
EH
ES
EW
EY
G
GA
GB
GC
CY1F10
50,100,150,200,250,300
49
10
16
7
6.5
16
27
9
7
19.5
14
CY1F15
50,100,150,200,250,300,350,400,450,500
52.5
10
16
7
6.5
16
29
9
8
23
17
CY1F25
50,100,150,200,250,300,350,400,450,500,550,600 70
13
17
10.5
8
22
40
10
12
33.5
22.5
Model
GD
H
HA
HB
HW
6
28
26
14
35.5
9
34
32
17
41.5
12
46
44
23.5
55
QW
Model
KA
KB
KC
KH
KW
L
LA
LW
LZ
ML
MM
N
PA
PB
PC
Q
QA
QB
CY1F10
6.5
44
8
19
59
38
58
20
86
19
5
M3 x 0.5
18.5
40
40
8.5
90
4
12
CY1F15
6.5
51
10
19
66
53
65
20
99
19
5
M3 x 0.5
18.5
50
50
7
97
4
12
40
CY1F25
7.5
66
13
27
84.5
70
89
25.5
128.5
17
9
M5 x 0.8
24
65
65
8
129
5.5
14.5
52
Model
T
XA
XL
XY
CY1F10
1
3 +0.012
0
4
CY1F15
1
3
+0.012
0
CY1F25
1
5
+0.012
0
LL
YA
YB
Z
Shock absorber
Model
4
6.5 depth 3.4
3.4
98
RB0805- X552
4
4
6.5 depth 3.4
3.4
105
5
7.5
9.5 depth 5.4
5.5
140
33
P (Piping port)
Nil
TN
TF
CY1F10
M5 x 0.8
s
s
RB0805- X552
CY1F15
M5 x 0.8
s
s
RB1006- X552
CY1F25
Rc1/8
NPT1/8
G1/8
Note 1) When adjusting the stroke, keep the T dimension within a 0 to 2 mm range. However, with the 25 mm adjustment bolt, an adjustment range of 0 to 26 mm is available.
Note 2) There are four øYA and øYB dimensions with a 50 mm stroke.
13
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder
Low Profile Guide Type
CY1F
Series
Proper Mounting Position for Stroke End Detection
D-A9n, D-A9nV
Bore size
(mm)
(mm)
Mounting patternq Mounting patternw Mounting patterne ∗
Operating range
10
15
25
A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
38
60
18
80
38
80
9
39
66
19
86
39
86
10
44.5
95.5
24.5
115.5
44.5
115.5
11
D-F9n, D-F9nV
Bore size
(mm)
(mm)
10
15
25
A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
34
64
22
76
34
76
5.5
35
70
23
82
35
82
5
40.5
99.5
28.5
111.5
40.5
111.5
5
(mm)
B1
A1
Mounting patternw
B2
A2
D-F9nW, D-F9nWV
Bore size
Mounting patternq
Mounting patternq Mounting patternw Mounting patterne ∗
Operating range
(mm)
Mounting patternq Mounting patternw Mounting patterne ∗
Operating range
10
15
25
A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
34
64
22
76
34
76
5.5
35
70
23
82
35
82
5
40.5
99.5
28.5
111.5
40.5
111.5
5
Mounting patterne
B3
A3
∗These values are given as a guideline including the hysteresis and are not guaranteed. They may
vary significantly depending on the ambient environment (with w30% variation).
Caution
qWhen adjusting the stroke, confirm the minimum stroke
for auto switch mounting.
See the table below for the minimum stroke for auto switch mounting.
Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting (1pc.)
Bore size
(mm)
(mm)
D-A9n, D-A9nV
D-F9n, D-F9nV
D-F9nW
D-F9nWV
5
10
10
15
25
Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting (2pcs.)
Bore size
(mm)
D-A90
D-A96
D-A93
Mounting patternq, w
32
35
Mounting patterne
(mm)
D-A90V
D-A96V
D-A93V
22
20
D-F9n
D-F9nW
D-F9nV
D-F9nWV
32
20
12
Auto Switch Mounting
As shown below, there are 3 ways to mount the auto switch
according to 3 types of electrical entries. Insert the auto switch
into the switch groove. Then use a flat head watchmaker's screw
driver to tighten the included fixing screws.
Mounting patternq
Mounting patternw
Note) When tightening the holding screw (included
with the auto switch), use a watchmakers screw
driver with a handle 5 to 6mm in diameter.
The tightening torque should be 0.1 to 0.2N⋅m.
Mounting patterne
Auto switch
Watchmakers screw driver
to
ø5
(included with the auto switch)
ø6
Mounting screw
14
CY1F
Series
Auto Switch Speicfications
Auto Switch Common Specifications
Type
Leakage current
Reed switch
Solid state switch
None
3wire: 100µA or less, 2-wire: 0.8mA or less
1.2ms
1ms or less
300m/s2
1000m/s2
Operating time
Impact resistance
Insulation resistance
50MΩ or more at 500VDC (between lead wire and case)
1500VAC for 1min.
(between lead wire and case)
Withstand voltage
1000VAC for 1min.
(between lead wire and case)
s10 to 60nC
Ambient temperature
Enclosure
IEC529 standard IP67, JISC0920 watertight construction
Lead Wire Length
Contact Protection Boxes/CD-P11, CD-P12
Lead wire length indication
<Applicable switches>
(Example)
D-F9P L
Lead wire length
Nil
L
Z
0.5m
3m
5m
Note 1) Lead wire length Z: 5m applicable auto switches
Solid state: All types are produced upon receipt of order
(standard availability)
Note 2) For solid state switches with flexible lead wire specification, add
"-61" at the end of the lead wire length.
(Example) D-F9PL- 61
D-A9/A9nV
The above auto switches do not have internal contact protection circuits.
qThe operating load is an induction load.
wThe length of wiring to load is 5m or more.
eThe load voltage is 100 or 200 VAC.
Use a contact protection box in any of the above situations.
The life of the contacts may otherwise be reduced. (The may stay ON all
the time.)
Specifications
CD-P11
100VAC
200VAC
Part no
Load voltage
Maximum load current
∗Lead wire length
25mA
12.5mA
CD-P12
24VDC
50mA
Switch connection side 0.5m
Load connection side 0.5m
Flexible specification
Internal circuits
CD-P11
Surge absorber
Choke
coil
OUT Brown
OUT Blue
Choke coil
CD-P12
Zener diodes
OUT (+)
Brown
OUT (s)
Blue
Dimensions
Connection
To connect a switch to a contact protection box, connect the lead wire from
the side of the contact protection box marked SWITCH to the lead wire
coming out of the switch. Furthermore, the switch unit should be kept as
close as possible to the contact protection box, with a lead wire length of no
more than 1 meter between them.
15
CY1F
Auto Switch
Connections and Examples
Series
Basic Wiring
Solid state 3-wire, PNP
Solid state 3-wire, NPN
2-wire
<Solid state>
2-wire
<Reed switch>
Brown
Brown
Main
switch
circuit
Brown
Load
Black
Main
switch
circuit
Brown
Load
Load
Indicator
light,
protection
circuit,
etc.
Main
switch
circuit
Black
Load
Blue
Blue
Blue
(Power supplies for switch and load
are separate.)
Blue
Brown
Brown
Brown
Main
switch
circuit
Load
Black
Indicator
light,
protection
circuit,
etc.
Main
switch
circuit
Load
Blue
Blue
Blue
Load
Examples of Connection to PLC
Sink input specifications
3-wire, NPN
Input
Black
Switch
Source input specifications
3-wire, PNP
Blue
Input
Black
Brown
Switch
Brown
Blue
COM
Connect
according
to
the
applicable PLC input specifications,
as the connection method will vary
depending on the PLC input
specifications.
COM
PLC internal circuit
PLC internal circuit
2-wire
2-wire
Brown
Input
Switch
Blue
Input
Brown
COM
Switch
Blue
COM
PLC internal circuit
PLC internal circuit
Connection Examples for AND (Series) and OR (Parallel)
3-wire
AND connection for NPN output
(Performed with switches only)
AND connection for NPN output
(Using relays)
Brown
Switch 1
Black
Blue
Switch 2
Black
Blue
Brown
Load
Relay
Relay
contact
OR connection for NPN output
Switch 1
Black
Blue
Brown
Switch 1
Load
Brown
Switch 2
Relay
Brown
Black
Blue
Load
Brown
Black
Blue
Switch 2
Black
Blue
The indicator lights will light up when
both switches are turned ON.
2-wire with 2 switch AND connection
Brown
Switch 1
Blue
Brown
Switch 2
Blue
Load
When two switches are
connected in series, a load
may malfunction because
the load voltage will
decline when in the ON
state.
The indicator lights will light
up if both of the switches
are in the ON state.
Internal
Load voltage at ON = Power supply s voltage x 2 pcs.
voltage
drop
= 24V s 4V x 2 pcs.
= 16V
Example: Power supply is 24VDC
Internal voltage drop in switch is 4V
2-wire with 2 switch OR connection
Brown
Switch 1
Switch 2
Blue
Brown
Blue
Load
<Solid state>
When two switches
are connected in
parallel, malfunction
may occur because
the load voltage will
increase when in
the OFF state.
Load
Load voltage at OFF = Leakage x 2 pcs. x
current
impedance
= 1mA x 2 pcs. x 3kΩ
= 6V
Example: Load impedance is 3kΩ
Leakage current from switch is 1mA
<Reed switch>
Because there is no current
leakage, the load voltage will
not increase when turned
OFF. However, depending
on the number of switches in
the ON state, the indicator
lights may sometimes dim or
not light up, because of
dispersion and reduction of
the current flowing to the
switches.
16
Reed Switches/Direct Mount Type
D-A90 (V), D-A93 (V), D-A96 (V)
Auto Switch Specifications
Grommet
Electrical entry direction: Side
D-A90, D-A90V (without indicator light)
D-A90, D-A90V
Auto switch part no.
Applicable load
IC circuit, Relay, PLC
24V AC
DC or less
Load voltage
Maximum load current
48V AC
DC or less
100V AC
DC or less
40mA
20mA
50mA
Contact protection circuit
None
Internal resistance
1Ω or less (including 3m lead wire length)
D-A93, D-A93V, D-A96, D-A96V (with indicator light)
D-A93, D-A93V
Auto switch part no.
Applicable load
Caution
Load voltage
Precautions
qBe sure to use fixing screws attached to
the auto switch to secure the switch. Use
of screws out of the specifications can
damage the switch.
Load current range and
maximum load current
D-A90V
Reed switch
Contact
protection
box
CD-P11
CD-P12
OUT (w)
Brown
OUT (w)
Blue
D-A93V
100VAC
4 to 8VDC
5 to 40mA
5 to 20mA
20mA
Contact protection circuit
None
D-A93 s 2.4V or less (to 20mA)/ 3V or less (to 40mA)
D-A93V s 2.7V or less
Internal voltage drop
0.8V or less
Red LED lights when ON
O Lead wire
D-A90(V), D-A93(V)sOil resistant vynil heavy duty cable ø2.7, 0.18mm2 x 2-wire (brown, blue), 0.5m
D-A96(V)
Oil resistant vynil heavy duty cable ø2.7, 0.15mm2 x 3-wire (brown, black, blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to page 15 for reed state switch common specifications.
Note 2) Refer to page 15 for lead wire length.
Auto Switch Weights
(g)
D-A90
Model
D-A90V
D-A93
D-A93V
D-A96
D-A96V
Lead wire length 0.5m
6
6
6
6
8
8
Lead wire length 3m
30
30
30
30
41
41
Auto Switch Dimensions
LED
Reed switch
IC circuit
24VDC
Indicator light
Auto Switch Internal Circuits
D-A96, D-A96V
Relay, PLC
Brown
Contact
protection
box
CD-P11
CD-P12
Resistor
Zener diode
Blue
OUT (+)
Brown
D-A90, D-A93, D-A96
OUT (s)
Blue
Indicator light
Slotted set screw
M2.5 x 4l
D-A96V
DC (+)
Brown
Resistor
OUT
Reverse
current
Black
prevention
diode
Load
DC (–)
Blue
(+)
DC power
Reed switch
LED
Type D-A90 is without indicator light
Most sensitive position
(s)
Note) qThe operating load is inductive load.
wThe wiring to the load is 5 m or longer.
eThe load voltage is 100VAC.
If any of the above conditions is applicable, the
life time of the contact may be shortened. Use
a contact protection box. (Refer to page 15
about the contact protection box.)
D-A90V, D-A93V, D-A96V
Type D-A93 dimensions are shown inside ( ).
Slotted set screw M2.5 x 4l
Indicator light
Type D-A90 is without
indicator light
Most sensitive position
17
Solid State Switches/Direct Mount Type
D-F9N(V), D-F9P(V), D-F9B(V)
Auto Switch Specifications
Grommet
D-F9n, D-F9nV (with indicator light)
Auto switch part no.
D-F9N
D-F9NV
D-F9P
D-F9PV
D-F9B
D-F9BV
Electrical entry direction
In-line
Perpendicular
In-line
Perpendicular
In-line
Perpendicular
Wiring type
3-wire
Output type
NPN
IC circuit, Relay, PLC
24VDC relay, PLC
5, 12, 24VDC (4.5 to 28V)
s
s
Applicable load
Power supply voltage
Current consumption
Caution
Be sure to use fixing screws attached to the
auto switch to secure the switch. Use of
screws out of the specifications can damage
the switch.
10mA or less
s
Load voltage
28VDC or less
Load current
40mA or less
80mA or less
5 to 40mA
1.5V or less
(0.8V or less at 10mA load current)
0.8V or less
4V or less
Internal voltage drop
Precautions
2-wire
s
PNP
24VDC (10 to 8V)
100µA or less at 24VDC
Leakage current
0.8mA or less
Red LED lights when ON
Indicator light
O Lead wiresOil proof heavy duty vinyl cord, ø2.7, 3 cores (brown, black, blue ), 0.15mm2, 2 cores
(brown, blue), 0.18 mm2, 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to page 15 for solid state switch common specifications.
Note 2) Refer to page 15 for lead wire length.
Auto Switch Weights
Auto Switch Internal Circuits
D-F9N, F9NV
DC (+)
Main
switch circuit
Brown
OUT
Black
Unit: g
D-F9N(V)
D-F9P(V)
0.5
7
7
6
3
37
37
31
5
61
61
51
Model
Lead wire
length
m
D-F9B(V)
Auto Switch Dimensions
D-F9n
Mounting screw M2.5 x 4l
Slotted set screw
DC (–)
2
Blue
Indicator light
DC (+)
2.6
Main
switch circuit
Brown
ø2.7
2.8
D-F9P, F9PV
22
4
OUT
6
Black
Most sensitive position
DC (–)
Blue
D-F9nV
D-F9B, F9BV
Mounting screw M2.5 x 4l
Slotted set screw
4.3
Indicator light
2
OUT (+)
20
OUT (–)
6.2
Blue
3.1
3.8
ø2.7
2.8
4.6
Main
switch circuit
Brown
4
6
Most sensitive position
18
2-Color Display
Solid State Switches/Direct Mount Type
D-F9NW(V), D-F9PW(V), D-F9BW(V)
Auto Switch Specifications
Grommet
D-F9nW, D-F9nWV (with Indicator light)
Auto switch part no. D-F9NW
Electrical entry direction
In-line
D-F9NWV
D-F9PW
D-F9PWV
D-F9BW
D-F9BWV
Perpendicular
In-line
Perpendicular
In-line
Perpendicular
Wiring type
Output type
IC circuit, Relay IC, PLC
24VDC relay, PLC
Power supply voltage
5, 12, 24VDC (4.5 to 28V)
s
Current consumption
10mA or less
28VDC or less
s
Load current
40mA or less
80mA or less
5 to 40mA
1.5V or less
(0.8V or less at 10mA load current)
0.8V or less
4V or less
Leakage current
DC (+)
s
Load voltage
Internal voltage drop
D-F9NW, F9NWV
s
PNP
NPN
Applicable load
Auto Switch Internal Circuits
2-wire
3-wire
24VDC (10 to 28V)
0.8mA or less
100µA or less at 24VDC
Actuated position ////////////// Red LED lights up
Optimum operating position /// Green LED lights up
Indicator light
O Lead wire sOil proof heavy duty vinyl cord, ø2.7, 3 cores (brown, black, blue), 0.15mm2,
2 cores (brown, blue), 0.18mm2, 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to page 15 for solid state switch common specifications.
Note 2) Refer to page 15 for lead wire length.
Main
switch circuit
Brown
OUT
Black
DC (s)
Auto Switch Weights
Lead wire
length
m
D-F9PW, F9PWV
D-F9NW(V)
D-F9PW(V)
D-F9BW(V)
0.5
7
7
7
3
34
34
32
5
56
56
52
Model
Blue
Unit: g
DC (+)
DC (s)
Auto Switch Dimensions
D-F9mW
Blue
Mounting screw M2.5 x 4l
Slotted set screw
DC (s)
Indicator light
2
2.6
D-F9BW, F9BWV
22
2.8
Blue
ø2.7
Main
switch circuit
Brown
4
OUT (+)
Brown
Most sensitive position
Main
switch circuit
6
D-F9mWV
OUT (s)
Blue
Mounting screw M2.5 x 4l
Slotted set screw
4.3
Indicator light/Display method
Indicator light
2
Optimum
operating position
19
20
3.8
Red
3.1
Green
6.2
Indicator
Red
ø2.7
2.8
OFF
4.6
ON
Operating
range
4
6
Most sensitive position
Series
CY1F
Made to Order Specifications
Ordeer
Mad
Contact SMC for detailed specification, lead times and prices.
1
Symbol
-XB10
Intermediate stroke
Intermediate strokes are available within the standard stroke range.
The stroke can be set in 1mm increments.
Stroke range
Bore size (mm)
Stroke range (mm)
10
51 to 299
15
51 to 499
25
101 to 599
CY1F Bore size Piping thread type Piping direction Stroke Adjustment bolt symbol Auto switch Symbol XB10
Example CY1F10Rs237ALsA93sXB10
2
Symbol
-XB11
Long stroke
Available with long strokes exceeding the standard strokes.
The stroke can be set in 1mm increments.
Stroke range
Bore size (mm)
Stroke range (mm)
10
301 to 500
15
501 to 750
25
601 to 1200
CY1F Bore size Piping thread type Piping direction Stroke Adjustment bolt symbol Auto switch Symbol XB11
Example CY1F25Ls777AsA93sXB11
20
Series CY1F
Safety Instructions
These safety instructions are intended to prevent a hazardous situation and/or
equipment damage. These instructions indicate the level of potential hazard by a
label of "Caution", "Warning" or "Danger". To ensure safety, be sure to observe
ISO 4414 Note 1), JIS B 8370 Note 2) and other safety practices.
Caution : Operator error could result in injury or equipment damage.
Warning : Operator error could result in serious injury or loss of life.
Danger :
In extreme conditions, there is a possible result of serious injury or loss of life.
Note 1) ISO 4414: Pneumatic fluid power -- Recommendations for the application of equipment to transmission and control
systems
Note 2) JIS B 8370: General Rules for Pneumatic Equipment
Warning
1. The compatibility of pneumatic equipment is the responsibility of the person
who designs the pneumatic system or decides its specifications.
Since the products specified here are used in various operating conditions, their compatibility for the
specific pneumatic system must be based on specifications or after analysis and/or tests to meet your
specific requirements.
2. Only trained personnel should operate pneumatically operated machinery and
equipment.
Compressed air can be dangerous if handled incorrectly. Assembly, handling or repair of pneumatic
systems should be performed by trained and experienced operators.
3. Do not service machinery/equipment or attempt to remove components until
safety is confirmed.
1. Inspection and maintenance of machinery/equipment should only be performed after confirmation of
safe locked-out control positions.
2. When equipment is to be removed, confirm the safety process as mentioned above. Cut the supply
pressure for this equipment and exhaust all residual compressed air in the system.
3. Before machinery/equipment is restarted, take measures to prevent shooting-out of cylinder piston
rod, etc. (Bleed air into the system gradually to create back pressure.)
4. Contact SMC if the product is to be used in any of the following conditions:
1. Conditions and environments beyond the given specifications, or if product is used outdoors.
2. Installation on equipment in conjunction with atomic energy, railway, air navigation, vehicles, medical
equipment, food and beverages, recreation equipment, emergency stop circuits, press applications, or
safety equipment.
3. An application which has the possibility of having negative effects on people, property, or animals,
requiring special safety analysis.
22
Series
CY1F
Actuator Precautions 1
Be sure to read before handling.
Precaution on Design
Caution
1. There is a danger of sudden action by air cylinders if sliding parts of machinery are twisted,
etc., and changes in forces occur.
In such cases, human injury may occur; e.g., by catching hands or
feet in the machinery, or damage to the machinery itself may occur.
Therefore, the machine should be designed to avoid such dangers.
2. Install a protective cover when there is a risk of
human injury.
If a driven object and moving parts of a cylinder pose a danger of
human injury, design the structure to avoid contact with the human
body.
3.Securely tighten all mounting parts and connecting parts so that they will not become loose.
Especially when a cylinder operates with high frequency or is
installed where there is a lot of vibration, ensure that all parts remain
secure.
4. A deceleration circuit or shock absorber, etc.,
may be required.
When a driven object is operated at high speed or the load is heavy,
a cylinder’s cushion will not be sufficient to absorb the impact. Install
a deceleration circuit to reduce the speed before cushioning, or
install an external shock absorber to relieve the impact. In this case,
the rigidity of the machinery should also be examined.
5. Consider a possible drop in operating pressure
due to a power outage, etc.
When a cylinder is used in a clamping mechanism, there is a danger
of work pieces dropping if there is a decrease in clamping force due
to a drop in circuit pressure caused by a power outage, etc. Therefore, safety equipment should be installed to prevent damage to
machinery and/or human injury. Suspension mechanisms and lifting
devices also require consideration for drop prevention.
6. Consider a possible loss of power source.
Measures should be taken to protect against human injury and
equipment damage in the event that there is a loss of power to
equipment controlled by air pressure, electricity or hydraulics, etc.
7. Design circuitry to prevent sudden lurching of
driven objects.
When a cylinder is driven by an exhaust center type directional
control valve or when starting up after residual pressure is
exhausted from the circuit, etc., the piston and its driven object will
lurch at high speed if pressure is applied to one side of the cylinder
because of the absence of air pressure inside the cylinder. In such
cases, human injury may occur; e.g., by catching hands or feet in the
machinery, or damage to the machinery itself may occur. Therefore,
equipment should be selected and circuits designed to prevent
sudden lurching.
8. Consider emergency stops.
Design so that human injury and/or damage to machinery and
equipment will not be caused when machinery is stopped by a
safety device under abnormal conditions, a power outage or a
manual emergency stop.
9. Consider the action when operation is restarted
after an emergency stop or abnormal stop.
Design the machinery so that human injury or equipment damage
will not occur upon restart of operation. When the cylinder has to be
reset at the starting position, install safe manual control equipment.
23
Selection
Warning
1. Confirm the specifications.
The products advertised in this catalog are designed according to
use in industrial compressed air systems. If the products are used in
conditions where pressure, temperature, etc., are out of specification, damage and/or malfunction may be caused. Do not use in these
conditions. (Refer to specifications.)
Consult SMC if you use a fluid other than compressed air.
2. Intermediate stops
When intermediate stopping of a cylinder piston is performed with a
3 position closed center type directional control valve, it is difficult to
achieve stopping positions as accurate and minute as with hydraulic
pressure due to the compressibility of air.
Furthermore, since valves and cylinders, etc., are not guaranteed for
zero air leakage, and it is not possible to hold a stopped position, do
not use for this purpose. In case it is necessary to hold a stopped
position, select equipment and design circuits to prevent movement.
Caution
1. Operate within the limits of the maximum usable
stroke.
Refer to the air cylinder model selection procedure for the maximum
useable stroke.
2. Operate the piston within a range such that collision damage will not occur at the stroke end.
Operate within a range such that damage will not occur when the
piston having inertial force stops by striking the cover at the stroke
end. Refer to the cylinder model selection procedure for the range
within which damage will not occur.
3.Use a speed controller to adjust the cylinder drive
speed, gradually increasing from a low speed to
the desired speed setting.
4. Provide intermediate supports for long stroke
cylinders.
Provide intermediate supports for cylinders with long strokes to
prevent bending of the tube, and deflection due to vibration and
external loads, etc.
CY1F
Series
Actuator Precautions 2
Be sure to read before handling.
Mounting
Lubrication
Caution
Caution
1.Do not apply strong impacts or excessive
moment to the slide table (slider).
The slide table (slider) is supported by precision bearings. Therefore, do not apply strong impacts or excessive moment, etc., when
mounting work pieces.
2. Align carefully when connecting to a load having
an external guide mechanism.
Magnetically coupled rodless cylinders (series CY1F) can be used
with a direct load within the allowable range for each type of guide,
but careful alignment is necessary when connecting to a load having
an external guide mechanism.
As the stroke becomes longer, variations in the center axis become
larger. Consider using a connection method (floating mechanism)
that is able to absorb these variations.
3. Do not scratch or gouge the cylinder tube by
striking or grasping it with other objects.
Cylinder bores are manufactured to precise tolerances, so that even
a slight deformation may cause malfunction.
4. Do not use until you can verify that equipment
can operate properly.
Verify correct mounting by suitable function and leakage inspections
after compressed air and power are connected following mounting,
maintenance or conversions.
5. Instruction manual
The product should be mounted and operated after thoroughly
reading the manual and understanding its contents.
Keep the instruction manual where it can be referred to as needed.
1. Lubrication of non-lube type cylinder
The cylinder is lubricated at the factory and can be used without any
further lubrication.
However, in the event that it will be lubricated, use class 1 turbine oil
(without additives) ISO VG32.
Stopping lubrication later may lead to malfunction due to the loss of
the original lubricant. Therefore, lubrication must be continued once
it has been started.
Air Supply
Warning
1. Use clean air.
Do not use compressed air which includes chemicals, synthetic oils
containing organic solvents, salt or corrosive gases, etc., as it can
cause damage or malfunction.
Caution
1. Install air filters.
Install air filters at the upstream side of valves. The filtration degree
should be 5µm or finer.
2.Install an after cooler, air dryer or water separator,
etc.
Air that includes excessive drainage may cause malfunction of
valves and other pneumatic equipment. To prevent this, install an
after cooler, air dryer or water separator, etc.
3. Use the product within the specified range of
fluid and ambient temperature.
Piping
Caution
1. Preparation before piping
Before piping is connected, it should be thoroughly blown out with air
(flushing) or washed to remove chips, cutting oil and other debris
from inside the pipe.
Take measures to prevent freezing, since moisture in circuits can be
frozen under 5°C, and this may cause damage to seals and lead to
malfunction.
Refer to SMC’s “Best Pneumatics vol.4” catalog for further details on
compressed air quality.
2. Wrapping of pipe tape
When screwing together pipes and fittings, etc., be certain that chips
from the pipe threads and sealing material do not get inside the
piping.
Also, when pipe tape is used, leave 1.5 to 2 thread ridges exposed
at the end of the threads.
Wrapping direction
Ex
po
se
Pipe tape
ap
pr
ox
.2
thr
ea
ds
24
Series
CY1F
Actuator Precautions 3
Be sure to read before handling.
Operating Environment
Warning
1. Do not use in environments where there is a
danger of corrosion.
Refer to the construction drawings regarding cylinder materials.
2.Provide a cover or other protection in dusty locations or where water, oil, etc., splash on the
equipment.
The cylinder may malfunction if operated in a location with a lot of
dirt, water droplets, coolant or paper dust, etc. Provide a cover or
other protective measure.
Maintenance
Warning
1. Maintenance should be performed according to
the procedure indicated in the instruction
manual.
If handled improperly, malfunction and damage of machinery or
equipment may occur.
2. Removal of equipment, and supply/exhaust of
compressed air.
When equipment is removed, first check measures to prevent
dropping of driven objects and run-away of equipment, etc. Then cut
off the supply pressure and electric power, and exhaust all
compressed air from the system.
When machinery is restarted, proceed with caution after confirming
measures to prevent cylinder lurching.
Caution
1. Drain flushing
Remove drainage from air filters regularly.
(Refer to specifications.)
25
Series
CY1F
Auto Switch Precautions 1
Be sure to read before handling.
Design and Selection
Caution
Warning
1. Confirm the specifications.
Read the specifications carefully and use this product appropriately.
The product may be damaged or malfunction if it is used outside the
range of specifications of current load, voltage, temperature or
impact.
2.Take precautions when multiple cylinders are
used close together.
When multiple auto switch cylinders are used in close proximity,
magnetic field interference may cause the switches to malfunction.
Maintain a minimum cylinder separation of 40mm. (When the
allowable separation is indicated for each cylinder series, use the
specified value.)
3. Pay attention to the length of time that a switch is
ON at an intermediate stroke position.
When an auto switch is placed at an intermediate position of the
stroke and a load is driven at the time the piston passes, the auto
switch will operate, but if the speed is too great the operating time will
be shortened and the load may not operate properly. The maximum
detectable piston speed is:
V(mm/s) =
Auto switch operating range (mm)
• In the same way, when operating below a specified voltage,
although an auto switch may operate normally, the load may not
operate. Therefore, the formula below should be satisfied after
confirming the minimum operating voltage of the load.
Supply
–
voltage
Minimum operating
Internal voltage
>
voltage of load
drop of switch
2) If the internal resistance of a light emitting diode causes a problem,
select a switch without an indicator light (Model A90, A90V).
<Solid state switch>
3) Generally, the internal voltage drop will be greater with a 2-wire solid
state auto switch than with a reed switch. Take the same precautions
as in 1).
Also, note that a 12VDC relay is not applicable.
6. Pay attention to leakage current.
<Solid state switch>
With a 2-wire solid state auto switch, current (leakage current) flows
to the load to operate the internal circuit even when in the OFF state.
Operating current of load (OFF condition) > Leakage current
x 1000
Load operating time
4. Keep wiring as short as possible.
<Reed switch>
As the length of the wiring to a load gets longer, the rush current at
switching ON becomes greater, and this may shorten the product’s
life. (The switch will stay ON all the time.)
1) Use a contact protection box when the wire length is 5m or longer.
<Solid state switch>
2) Although wire length does not affect switch function, use wiring
100m or shorter.
5. Take precautions for the internal voltage drop of
the switch.
<Reed switch>
1) Switches with an indicator light (Except D-A96, A96V)
• If auto switches are connected in series as shown below, take note
that there will be a large voltage drop because of internal resistance
in the light emitting diodes. (Refer to internal voltage drop in the
auto switch specifications.)
[The voltage drop will be “n” times larger when “n” auto switches are
connected.]
Even though an auto switch operates normally, the load may not
operate.
Load
If the criteria given in the above formula are not met, it will not reset
correctly (stays ON). Use a 3-wire switch if this specification will not
be satisfied.
Moreover, leakage current flow to the load will be “n” times larger
when “n” auto switches are connected in parallel.
7. Do not use a load that generates surge voltage.
<Reed switch>
If driving a load such as a relay that generates a surge voltage, use a
contact protection box.
<Solid state switch>
Although a zener diode for surge protection is connected at the
output side of a solid state auto switch, damage may still occur if the
surge is applied repeatedly. When a load, such as a relay or solenoid
valve, which generates surge is directly driven, use a type of switch
with a built-in surge absorbing element.
8. Cautions for use in an interlock circuit
When an auto switch is used for an interlock signal requiring high
reliability, devise a double interlock system to avoid trouble by providing a mechanical protection function, or by also using another switch
(sensor) together with the auto switch. Also perform periodic maintenance and confirm proper operation.
9. Ensure sufficient clearance for maintenance
activities.
When designing an application, be sure to allow sufficient clearance
for maintenance and inspections.
26
Series
CY1F
Auto Switch Precautions 2
Be sure to read before handling.
Mounting and Adjustment
Warning
Warning
1. Do not drop or bump.
Do not drop, bump or apply excessive impacts (300m/s2 or more for
reed switches and 1000m/s2 or more for solid state switches) while
handling.
Although the body of the switch may not be damaged, the inside of
the switch could be damaged and cause a malfunction.
2. Do not carry a cylinder by the auto switch lead
wires.
Never carry a cylinder by its lead wires. This may not only cause
broken lead wires, but it may cause internal elements of the switch
to be damaged by the stress.
3. Mount switches using the proper tightening
torque.
When a switch is tightened beyond the range of tightening torque,
the mounting screws or switch may be damaged. On the other hand,
tightening below the range of tightening torque may allow the switch
to slip out of position.
4. Mount a switch at the center of the operating
range.
Adjust the mounting position of an auto switch so that the piston
stops at the center of the operating range (the range in which a
switch is ON). (The mounting positions shown in the catalog indicate
the optimum positions at stroke end.) If mounted at the end of the
operating range (around the borderline of ON and OFF), operation
may be unstable.
Wiring
Warning
1.Avoid repeatedly bending or stretching lead
wires.
Broken lead wires will result from repeatedly applying bending
stress or stretching force to the lead wires.
2. Be sure to connect the load before power is
applied.
<2-wire type>
If the power is turned ON when an auto switch is not connected to a
load, the switch will be instantly damaged because of excess
current.
3. Confirm proper insulation of wiring.
Be certain that there is no faulty wiring insulation (contact with other
circuits, ground fault, improper insulation between terminals, etc.).
Damage may occur due to excess current flow into a switch.
4. Do not wire with power lines or high voltage
lines.
Wire separately from power lines or high voltage lines, avoiding
parallel wiring or wiring in the same conduit with these lines. Control
circuits containing auto switches may malfunction due to noise from
these other lines.
27
Wiring
5. Do not allow short circuit of loads.
<Reed switch>
If the power is turned ON with a load in a short circuit condition, the
switch will be instantly damaged because of excess current flow into
the switch.
<Solid state switch>
All models of PNP output type switches do not have built-in short
circuit protection circuits. If loads are short circuited, the switches will
be instantly damaged, as in the case of reed switches.
Take special care to avoid reverse wiring with the brown power
supply line and the black output line on 3-wire type switches.
6. Avoid incorrect wiring.
<Reed switch>
A 24VDC switch with indicator light has polarity. The brown lead
wire or terminal no. 1 is (+), and the blue lead wire or terminal no.
2 is (–).
1) If connections are reversed, a switch will operate, however, the
light emitting diode will not light up.
Also note that a current greater than that specified will damage a
light emitting diode and it will no longer operate.
Applicable models: D-A93, A93V
<Solid state switch>
1) If connections are reversed on a 2-wire type switch, the switch will
not be damaged if protected by a protection circuit, but the switch
will be in a normally ON state. However, note that the switch will
be damaged if reversed connections are made while the load is in
a short circuited condition.
2) If connections are reversed (power supply line + and power supply
line –) on a 3-wire type switch, the switch will be protected by a
protection circuit. However, if the power supply line (+) is
connected to the blue wire and the power supply line (–) is
connected to the black wire, the switch will be damaged.
∗ Lead wire color changes
Lead wire colors of SMC switches have been changed in order to
meet NECA Standard 0402 for production beginning September,
1996 and thereafter. Please refer to the tables provided.
Special care should be taken regarding wire polarity during the
time that the old colors still coexist with the new colors.
2-wire
Output (+)
Output (-)
3-wire
Old
Red
Black
New
Brown
Blue
Solid state
with diagnostic output
Power supply
GND
Output
Diagnostic output
Old
Red
Black
White
Yellow
New
Brown
Blue
Black
Orange
Power supply
GND
Output
Old
Red
Black
White
New
Brown
Blue
Black
Solid state with latch
type diagnostic output
Power supply
GND
Output
Old
Red
Black
White
New
Brown
Blue
Black
Latch type
diagnostic output
Yellow
Orange
Series
CY1F
Auto Switch Precautions 3
Be sure to read before handling.
Operating Environment
Warning
1. Never use in an atmosphere of explosive gases.
The construction of auto switches is not intended to prevent
explosion. Never use in an atmosphere with an explosive gas since
this may cause a serious explosion.
2. Do not use in an area where a magnetic field is
generated.
Auto switches will malfunction or magnets inside cylinders will
become demagnetized. (Consult SMC regarding the availability of a
magnetic field resistant auto switch.)
3.Do not use in an environment where the auto
switch will be continually exposed to water.
Although switches satisfy IEC standard IP67 construction (JIS C
0920: watertight construction), do not use switches in applications
where continually exposed to water splash or spray. Poor insulation
or swelling of the potting resin inside switches may cause malfunction.
4.Do not use in an environment with oil or chemicals.
Consult SMC if auto switches will be used in an environment with
coolant, cleaning solvent, various oils or chemicals. If auto switches
are used under these conditions for even a short time, they may be
adversely affected by improper insulation, malfunction due to
swelling of the potting resin, or hardening of the lead wires.
Maintenance
Warning
1. Perform the following maintenance periodically
in order to prevent possible danger due to unexpected auto switch malfunction.
1) Securely tighten switch mounting screws.
If screws become loose or the mounting position is dislocated,
retighten them after readjusting the mounting position.
2) Confirm that there is no damage to lead wires.
To prevent faulty insulation, replace switches or repair lead wires,
etc., if damage is discovered.
3) Confirm the lighting of the green light on a 2-color display type
switch.
Confirm that the green LED is on when stopped at the established
position. If the red LED is on, the mounting position is not appropriate. Readjust the mounting position until the green LED lights
up.
Other
Warning
1. Consult SMC concerning water resistance, elasticity of lead wires and usage at welding sites,
etc.
5.Do not use in an environment with temperature
cycles.
Consult SMC if switches are used where there are temperature
cycles other than normal air temperature changes, as they may be
adversely affected internally.
6.Do not use in an environment where there is
excessive impact shock.
<Reed switch>
When excessive impact (300m/s2 or more) is applied to a reed
switch during operation, the contact will malfunction and generate or
cut off a signal momentarily (1ms or less). Consult SMC regarding
the need to use a solid state switch depending upon the environment.
7. Do not use in an area where surges are generated.
<Solid state switch>
When there are units (solenoid type lifter, high frequency induction
furnace, motor, etc.) which generate a large amount of surge in the
area around cylinders with solid state auto switches, this may cause
deterioration or damage to internal circuit elements of the switch.
Avoid sources of surge generation and crossed lines.
8.Avoid accumulation of iron debris or close
contact with magnetic substances.
When a large amount of ferrous debris such as machining chips or
welding spatter is accumulated, or a magnetic substance
(something attracted by a magnet) is brought into close proximity
with an auto switch cylinder, it may cause auto switches to malfunction due to a loss of the magnetic force inside the cylinder.
28
Series
CY1F
Specific Product Precautions 1
Be sure to read before handling.
Mounting
Caution
Caution
1. Do not apply a large impact or excessive
moment to the slide table (slider).
Because the slide table (slider) is supported by a precision
bearing, do not apply a large impact or excessive moment when
mounting a work piece.
2. Align carefully when connecting to a load
with an external guide mechanism.
Altough a magnetic rodless cylinder (series CY1F) can directly
receive a load within the allowable range of the guide, it is
necessary to align sufficiently when connecting to a load with an
external guide mechanism.
The longer the stroke is, the greater the displacement of the shaft
center becomes. Therefore, adopt a connection method (floating
mechanism) that can ensure absorption of the displacement.
5. Long stroke operation causes deflection of
the path table or cylinder tube. In such a
case, provide an intermediate support.
Provide an intermediate support with the mounting holes on the
center of the path table so that the distance between supports
given as L in the figure will not exceed the value shown in the
graph.
⋅ If the counter surface lacks precision, malfunction may result so
adjust the level at the same time.
⋅ In an environment where vibration or impact occurs, provide an
intermediate support even if the distance is within the allowable
range in the graph.
W
3. Be sure to use the 4 mounting holes on both
ends of the guide body when mounting the
product on equipment.
L
The mounting hole at the center of the guide body is used to
mount an intermediate support. Be sure to use the 4 mounting
holes at both ends to secure the product.
In case the product is
installed on the ceiling,
regard the mounting
bolt pitch as L.
W
L
W
Mounting hole
Intermediate support
mounting hole
L
L
Distance between load and supports
Mounting
hole
140
130
ø25
120
110
100
90
According to (2) "Adjusting bolt adjustment" on page 31, move the
adjustment bolt to a position where it does not interfere with any
of the mounting holes and secure the cylinder with mounting
screws. After securing the cylinder, readjust the stroke with the
adjustment bolt.
80
Load [N]
4. When a 25 mm adjustment bolt is selected,
the mounting holes will be hidden behind it.
Adjust the adjustment bolt after the cylinder
is installed.
70
60
ø15
50
40
30
ø10
20
10
0
0
Adjuster holder
100
200 300 400 500 600 700
Distance between supports L [mm]
800
900
(1N = 0.22 lbf)
Adjustment bolt
29
25 mm adjustment bolt
6. There are limitations on the load mass and
operating pressure in case the product is
used in the vertical direction.
When using the product in the vertical direction, confirm the
allowable values in "Vertical Operation" in Model Selection (1). If
the allowable value is exceeded, the magnet coupling may slip off,
causing the work piece to drop down.
Series
CY1F
Specific Product Precautions 2
Be sure to read before handling.
Handling
Caution
Piping
Caution
1. Do not inadvertently move the guide
adjust-ing unit.
1. Be careful about the direction of the piping
port and that of the slide table movement.
The guide is installed at the proper tightening torque. Do not
loosen the mounting bolts of the guide.
The direction of the piping port and that of the slide table
movement differ between the right side centralized piping and left
side centralized piping.
2. Do not operate the magnetic rodless
cylin-der if the magnet couplings on the
actuator are displaced.
Centralized piping on right
If the magnet couplings are displaced by an external force beyond
the holding force, supply an air pressure of 0.7MPa to the cylinder
port to return the external slider to the right position of the stroke
end.
3. Take precautions to avoid getting your
hands caught in the unit.
R L
R
L
Be careful not to let your hand caught between the slide table and
adjuster holder at the stroke end. Install a protective cover or take
some other measures to keep any part of the human body from
directly touching the place.
L
R
Slide table actuation direction
Centralized piping on left
R L
L
R
L
R
Slide table actuation direction
4. Never disassemble the magnetic component
parts (external slider, internal slider) of the
actuator (cylinder).
If will cause decline of the holding force, etc.
2. The plug position of the piping port can be
changed to suit the operating conditions.
When screwing in the plug for the second time, wrap a sealant
tape around the plug to prevent leakage.
(1) M5
First tighten lightly until the rotation stops. Then tighten an
additional 1/6 to 1/4 turn.
(2) Rc1/8
Tighten with a 7 to 9N⋅m torque using tightening tools.
30
Series
CY1F
Specific Product Precautions 3
Be sure to read before handling.
Adjustment
Caution
Caution
1. Stroke adjustable range
The stroke of series CY1F can be controlled by adjusting the
attached adjustment bolt.
For stroke adjustment amount, please refer to the table below.
(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
Standard
adjustment bolt
25mm
adjustment bolt
10
15
25
s1.2 to 0.8
s25.2 to 0.8
s1.4 to 0.6
s25.4 to 0.6
The adjustment values above are those for one side.
2. Adjusting bolt adjustment
1) Loose the adjustment bolt fixing bolts.
2) Insert a hexagon wrench into a hexagon hole at the end of the
adjustment bolt to adjust the adjustment bolt.
3) After adjustment, tighten the adjustment bolt fixing bolts.
Bore size
(mm)
Adjustment bolt
fixing bolts
Tightening torque
Adjustment width
across flats
M3
1.0 to 1.3N⋅m
4
M5
4.6 to 6.2N⋅m
5
10
15
25
1. When adjusting the stroke, be careful about
the operating pressure limits.
When making the stroke smaller than the reference stroke with
the adjustment bolt, operate at a pressure below the operating
pressure limit in (1) "Intermediate stop by external stopper or
stroke adjustment with adjustment bolt." on page 5. If the
operating pressure limit is exceeded, the magnet coupling on the
actuator (cylinder) will slip off.
2. When adjusting the stroke, use the distance
from the end of the adjustment bolt to the
end of the adjuster holder as a guideline.
If dimension A is made smaller than 0, the slide table and adjuster
holder will collide, resulting in damage to the slide table such as
scratches or gouges.
(mm)
At the minimum stroke At the minimum stroke
Bore size
of standard
of 25 mm
(mm)
adjustment bolt
adjustment bolt
10
15
25
Basic stroke
Al2
A l 26
A = 0.8
Al2
A l 26
A = 0.6
Adjuster holder
Adjustment bolt
A
At maximum
stroke adjustment
AM0
Adjuster holder
Adjustment bolt
fixing bolts
Adjustment bolt
Standard adjustment bolt
Adjuster holder
A
Adjustment bolt
25 mm adjustment bolt
31
Series
CY1F
Specific Product Precautions 4
Be sure to read before handling.
Maintenance and Replacement
Caution
Caution
Replacement of actuator
Replacement of shock absorber
1. The actuator (cylinder) of series CY1F can
be replaced.
1. The shock absorber of series CY1F can be
replaced.
Refer to "Replacement Actuator (Cylinder)" on page 11 about how
to order .
The shock absorber should be replaced as a spare part if a deline
in the energy absorption capacity is observed.
Refer to the table below about how to order a replacement shock
absorber.
2. Replacement of actuator (cylinder) of series
CY1F.
1) Remove the 4 cylinder fixing bolts and pull out the actuator
from the guide.
2) Apply grease to the gaskets attached to the replacement
actuator (cylinder) and replace the installed gaskets with the
new ones.
3) Fit the slider of the replacement actuator into the recessed part
of the slide table. Align the surface C (on the side with round
mounting holes) of the end cover of the replacement actuator
and surface D of the stepped part on the guide.
4) In the condition described in (3), put surface A and surface B in
close contact with each other. Tighten the 4 cylinder fixing
bolts evenly.
Bore size
(mm)
Cylinder
fixing bolt
Tightening torque
M3
0.55 to 0.72N⋅m
M5
2.6 to 3.5N⋅m
10
15
25
(1N•m = 0.74 ft•lbs)
Enlarged view of stepped part
Surface D
Bore size (mm)
No.
10
15
25
RB0805-X552
RB1006-X552
2. Replacement of shock absorber
Follow the steps below to replace the shock absorber.
1) Remove the work piece from the slide table.
2) Loosen the 4 hexagon socket head screws on the top of the
slide table and pull out the shock absorber.
3) Insert the replacement shock absorber into the slide table until
it reaches the rear end and tighten 4 hexagon socket head
screws.
Bore size
(mm)
10
15
25
Hexagon socket
head set screw
Tightening torque
M3
0.37 to 0.45N⋅m
M5
0.54 to 0.64N⋅m
(1N•m = 0.74 ft•lbs)
q
3. Be careful about the tightening torque of the
hexagon socket head screws.
Surface B
Be careful excessive tightening may cause damage or
malfunction of the shock absorber.
q
Hexagon socket
head set screw
Slide table
Gasket
(apply grease)
Guide
Replacement
shock absorber
Cylinder fixing bolts
End cover
Surface B
Surface A
q
Surface C
q
q
Mounting hole
(round hole)
Slider
Mounting hole
(Oval hole)
Surface A
Actuator
(cylinder)
q
Enlarged view of end cover
Enlarged view end cover
3. Be sure to fasten the cylinder fixing bolts.
Fasten the cylinder fixing bolts firmly. If they become loose,
damage or malfunction may result. After replacing the actuator,
be sure to conduct a test run before actually using the product.
32
Global Manufacturing, Distribution and Service Network
Worldwide Subsidiaries
America
North
& South America
Asia/Oceania
Europe/Africa
U.S.A. SMC Corporation of America
SRI LANKA (Distributor) Electro-Serv(Pvt.)Ltd.
CZECH REPUBLIC SMC Industrial Automation CZ s.r.o.
CANADA SMC Pneumatics (Canada) Ltd.
IRAN (Distributor) Abzarchian Co. Ltd.
HUNGARY SMC Hungary Ipari Automatizálási Kft.
MEXICO SMC Corporation(México), S.A. de C.V.
U.A.E. (Distributor) Machinery People Trading Co. L.L.C.
POLAND SMC Industrial Automation Polska Sp. z o.o.
BRAZIL SMC Pneumãticos do Brasil Ltda.
KUWAIT (Distributor) Esco Kuwait Equip & Petroleum App. Est.
SLOVAKIA SMC Priemyselná Automatizácia Spol s.r.o.
CHILE SMC Pneumatics (Chile) S.A.
SAUDI ARABIA (Distributor) Assaggaff Trading Est.
SLOVENIA SMC Industrijska Avtomatika d.o.o.
COLOMBIA SMC Colombia Sucursal de SMC Chile S.A.
BAHRAIN (Distributor)
Mohammed Jalal & Sons W.L.L. Technical & Automative Services
BULGARIA SMC Industrial Automation Bulgaria EOOD
ARGENTINA SMC Argentina S.A.
BOLIVIA SMC Pneumatics Bolivia S.r.l.
VENEZUELA SMC Neumatica Venezuela S.A.
PERU (Distributor) IMPECO Automatización Industrial S.A.C.
ECUADOR (Distributor) ASSISTECH CIA. LTDA.
CROATIA SMC Industrijska Automatika d.o.o.
SYRIA (Distributor) Miak Corporation
BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA(Distributor) A.M. Pneumatik d.o.o.
JORDAN (Distributor) Atafawok Trading Est.
SERBIA(Distributor) Best Pneumatics d.o.o.
BANGLADESH (Distributor) Chemie International
UKRAINE(Distributor) PNEUMOTEC Corp.
AUSTRALIA SMC Pneumatics(Australia)Pty.Ltd.
FINLAND SMC Pneumatics Finland Oy
NEW ZEALAND SMC Pneumatics(N.Z.)Ltd.
Asia/Oceania
NORWAY SMC Pneumatics Norway AS
JAPAN SMC Corporation
SWEDEN SMC Pneumatics Sweden AB
CHINA SMC(China)Co.,Ltd.
CHINA SMC Pneumatics (Guangzhou) Ltd.
GERMANY SMC Pneumatik GmbH
TAIWAN SMC Pneumatics(Taiwan)Co.,Ltd.
SWITZERLAND SMC Pneumatik AG
KOREA SMC Pneumatics Korea Co., Ltd.
U.K. SMC Pneumatics (U.K.) Ltd.
SINGAPORE SMC Pneumatics(S.E.A.)Pte.Ltd.
FRANCE SMC Pneumatique SA
MALAYSIA SMC Pneumatics(S.E.A.)Sdn.Bhd.
ESTONIA SMC Pneumatics Estonia Oü
Europe/Africa
HONG KONG SMC Pneumatics(Hong Kong)Ltd.
LATVIA SMC Pneumatics Latvia SIA
LITHUANIA(LIETUVA) UAB “SMC Pneumatics”
ROMANIA SMC Romania S.r.l.
RUSSIA SMC Pneumatik LLC.
KAZAKHSTAN SMC Kazakhstan, LLC.
SPAIN / PORTUGAL SMC España S.A.
TURKEY (Distributor) Entek Pnömatik Sanayi ve. Ticaret Şirketi
THAILAND SMC (Thailand) Ltd.
ITALY SMC Italia S.p.A.
PHILIPPINES Shoketsu SMC Corporation
GREECE SMC HELLAS E.P.E
INDIA SMC Pneumatics(India)Pvt.Ltd.
IRELAND SMC Pneumatics (Ireland) Ltd.
ISRAEL (Distributor) Baccara Geva A.C.S. Ltd.
NETHERLANDS (Associated company) SMC Pneumatics BV
INDONESIA (Distributor) PT. Sinar Mutiara Cemerlang
BELGIUM (Associated company) SMC Pneumatics N.V./S.A.
VIETNAM (Distributor) Dy Dan Trading Co.,Ltd.
DENMARK SMC Pneumatik A/S
PAKISTAN (Distributor) Jubilee Corporation
AUSTRIA SMC Pneumatik GmbH (Austria)
MOROCCO (Distributor) Soraflex
TUNISIA (Distributor) Byms
EGYPT (Distributor) Saadani Trading & Industrial Services
NIGERIA (Distributor) Faraday Engineering Company Ltd.
SOUTH AFRICA (Distributor) Hyflo Southern Africa (Pty.) Ltd.
U.S. & Canadian Sales Offices
WEST
Austin
Dallas
Los Angeles
Phoenix
Portland
San Francisco
Vancouver
CENTRAL
Chicago
Cincinnati
Cleveland
Detroit
Indianapolis
Milwaukee
Minneapolis
St. Louis
Toronto
Windsor
EAST
Atlanta
Birmingham
Boston
Charlotte
Nashville
New Jersey
Richmond
Rochester
Tampa
Montreal
Vancouver
Toronto
Montreal
Detroit
Boston
Chicago
Livemore
Indianapolis
Atlanta
Sales Branches
Regional Distribution Centers
Central warehouse
Austin
SMC Corporation of America
10100 SMC Blvd., Noblesville, IN 46060
www.smcusa.com
SMC Pneumatics (Canada) Ltd.
www.smcpneumatics.ca
(800) SMC.SMC1 (762-7621)
e-mail: sales@smcusa.com
For International inquires: www.smcworld.com
© 2011 SMC Corporation of America, All Rights Reserved.
All reasonable efforts to ensure the accuracy of the information detailed in this catalog were made at the time of publishing. However, SMC can in no way warrant the information herein contained as specifications are subject to change without notice.
PW-5M-PP
Clean Room Rodless Cylinder
Series
CYP
ø15, ø32
MX
MTS
MY
CY
MG
CX
D-X
20Data
Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder for transfer in clean environments.
8-17-1
Low particle generation: 1/20
(compared to previous series)
Particle concentration (particles/m3)
High cleanliness is achieved with non-contact
construction of the cylinder tube exterior and a
stainless steel linear guide (specially treated).
Particle generation has been reduced to 1/20
compared to series 12-CY1B (previous SMC
product) even without vacuum suction.
Long stroke
(Max. 700 mm)
105
104
Class M3.5
[Class 100]
103
Class M2.5
[Class 10]
Stainless steel linear guide
(specially treated)
102
The specially treated linear guide
achieves low particulate generation, high
linearity and high precision.
Class M1.5
[Class 1]
101
Non-contact construction
100
0.01
0.1
1
10
Particle diameter (µm)
There is no particulate generation from sliding, because the
construction avoids contact between the cylinder tube’s
exterior surface and the slide table’s interior surface.
Note 1) This chart indicates the level of cleanliness inside the measurement chamber.
Note 2) The vertical axis shows the number of particles per unit volume (1 m3) of air which
are no smaller than the particle size shown on the horizontal axis.
Note 3) The gray lines show the upper concentration limit of the cleanliness class based
on Fed.Std.209E-1992.
No contact
Slide table
Note 4) The plots indicate the 95% upper reliability limit value for time series data up to
500 thousand operation cycles. (Cylinder: CYP32-200, Workpiece weight: 5 kg,
Average speed: 2000 mm/s)
Note 5) The data above provide a guide for selection but is not guaranteed.
Cylinder tube
Piping port variations provide a high
degree of freedom
Piping port positions can be selected to accommodate the installation.
a
Nil
b
L
c
d Operating direction
←Left Right→
e
R
f
h
S
g
Note) Plugs are installed in ports other than those indicated for the model.
Model
Piping port position
L
Nil
a
Operating direction Right
R
S
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Left
Right
Left
Right
Left
Right
Left
Cleaned, assembled and double
packaged in a clean room
8-17-2
A magnetically coupled rodless
cylinder that can be used for
transfer in clean environments
MX
Special cylinder tube
Shock-free
MTS
A sine cushion is used at the end of the stroke.
Smooth acceleration and deceleration are possible
at 0.5 G or less.
MY
A special cylinder tube is employed using extruded
aluminum material. Even long strokes are not subject to
deflection because of direct attachment to the cylinder
body, and non-contact construction is achieved through
combination with a linear guide.
Sine cushion
CY
MG
CX
D-X
Stroke adjustment screw
Stroke adjustment
The stroke adjustment screw
allows fine control of the stroke
(±1 mm on each side)
Series Variations
Clean environment level
High
Series
CYP
Series
12Standard products
Low
Light
Series
Guide type
Load weight
Heavy
Bore size (mm)
6 10 15 20 25 32 40 50 63
Clean room rodless
CYP
High precision
guide type
12-CY1B
Basic type
12-CY1R
Basic type
Direct mount type
8-17-3
20Data
Series CYP
Model Selection 1
Caution on Design (1)
The load mass allowable moment differs depending on the workpiece mounting method, cylinder mounting orientation and piston speed.
In making a determination of usability, do not allow the sum (Σαn) of the load factors (αn) for each mass and moment to exceed “1”.
Σαn =
Load mass (m)
Max. load mass (m max)
+
Dynamic moment (Me)
Static moment (M)
+
≤1
Allowable dynamic moment (Me max)
Allowable static moment (M max)
Moment
Load Mass
Allowable moment
Max. load mass (kg)
Model
m max
CYP15
1
CYP32
5
(Static moment/Dynamic moment)
m
M3
M1
m
Static Moment
(N⋅m)
M2
Model
CYP15
CYP32
m
M1 M2 M3
0.3 0.6 0.3
3
4
3
Moment generated by the workpiece weight even when the cylinder is stopped
Roll moment
M2 = m x g x (L + B) x 10–3
Pich moment
M1 = m x g x (L + B) x 10–3
Yaw moment
M3 = m x g x (L + A) x 10–3
(mm)
L
L
B
B
L
A
M1, 2, 3
m
L
A, B
g
M2
M1
Model
CYP15
CYP32
M3
A
16.5
27.0
B
25.5
48.0
: Moment [N⋅m]
: Load mass [kg]
: Distance to load center of gravity [mm]
: Distance to guide shaft [mm]
: Gravitational acceleration [9.8 m/s2]
mxg
mxg
Guide shaft mounting surface
mxg
Guide central axis
Cylinder central axis
Dynamic Moment
Moment generated by the load equivalent to impact at the stroke end
We = 5 x 10–3 x m x g x U
We: Load equivalent to impact [N]
m : Load mass [kg]
Pich moment
Me1 = 1/3∗ ⋅ We (L + B) ⋅ 10–3
∗ Average
U: Max. speed [mm/s]
g: Gravitational acceleration [9.8 m/s2]
Yaw moment
Me3 = 1/3∗ ⋅ We (L + A) ⋅ 10–3
load coefficient
Me3
Me1
(mm)
Model
CYP15
CYP32
A
16.5
27.0
B
L
L
We
We
Cylinder central axis
A
Guide shaft mounting surface
8-17-4
Guide central axis
B
25.5
48.0
Series CYP
Model Selection 2
Selection Calculation
The selection calculation finds the load factors (αn) of the items below, where the total (Σαn) does not exceed 1.
Σ αn = α1 + α2 + α3 ≤ 1
MX
Load factor αn
Note
1. Max. load mass
α1 = m/mmax
mmax is the maximum load mass
MTS
2. Static moment
α2 = M/Mmax
Review M1, M2, M3
Mmax is the allowable moment
MY
3. Dynamic moment
α3 = Me/Memax
Review Me1, Me3
Memax is the allowable moment
CY
Item
Review m
MG
Va
m
Calculation Example
CX
Operating Conditions
Cylinder: CYP32
Mounting: Horizontal wall mounting
Maximum speed: U = 300 [mm/s]
Load mass: m = 1 [kg] (excluding mass of arm section)
L1 = 50 [mm]
L2 = 50 [mm]
L2
D-
20Load factor αn
Item
1. Maximum
load mass
L2
m
-X
L1
Data
Note
α1 = m/mmax
= 1/5
= 0.20
Review m.
L1
2. Static moment
mxg
M
Guide shaft mounting surface
B
L1
3. Dynamic moment
W
A
We
L2
Me3
Guide central axis
M2 = m ⋅ g ⋅ (L1 + B) ⋅ 10–3
= 1 ⋅ 9.8 ⋅ (50 + 48) ⋅ 10–3
= 0.96 [N⋅m]
α2 = M2/M2 max
= 0.96/4
= 0.24
Review M2.
Since M1 & M3 are not generated,
review is unnecessary.
We = 5 x 10–3 m ⋅ g ⋅ U
= 5 x 10–3 ⋅ 1 ⋅ 9.8 ⋅ 300
= 14.7 [N]
Me3 = 1/3 ⋅ We (L2 + A) ⋅ 10–3
= 1/3 ⋅ 14.7 ⋅ (50 + 27) ⋅ 10–3
= 0.38 [N⋅m]
α3 = Me3/Me3 max
= 0.38/3
= 0.13
Review Me3.
Me1 = 1/3 ⋅ We ⋅ (L1 + B) ⋅ 10–3
= 1/3 ⋅ 14.7 ⋅ (50 + 48) ⋅ 10–3
= 0.48 [N⋅m]
α4 = Me1 /Me1 max
= 0.48/3
= 0.16
Review Me1.
Me1
L1
W
B
We
Guide shaft
mounting surface
Σαn = α1 + α2 + α3 + α4
= 0.20 + 0.24 + 0.13 + 0.16
= 0.73
Σαn = 0.73 ≤ 1 Therefore it can be used.
8-17-5
Series CYP
Model Selection 3
Caution on Design (2)
Table Deflection Note)
F
Guide central axis
F
F
A
L
L
Table deflection due to
yaw moment load
Table deflection due to
roll moment load
Table deflection due to
pitch moment load
A
L
Guide central axis
A
M1 = F x L
M3 = F x L
M2 = F x L
Note) Displacement of Section A when force acts on Section F
CYP15 (M2)
CYP15 (M3)
0.05
0.05
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
Deflection (mm)
0.05
Deflection (mm)
Deflection (mm)
CYP15 (M1)
0.03
0.02
0.01
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.02
0.01
0
0.1
Moment (N⋅m)
0.2
0.3
0
CYP32 (M2)
0.04
0.04
0.01
Deflection (mm)
0.04
Deflection (mm)
0.05
0.02
0.03
0.02
0.01
0.5
1
1.5
2
0
0.3
CYP32 (M3)
0.05
0.03
0.2
Moment (N⋅m)
0.05
0
0.1
Moment (N⋅m)
CYP32 (M1)
Deflection (mm)
0.03
0.03
0.02
0.01
0.5
Moment (N⋅m)
1
1.5
Moment (N⋅m)
2
0
0.5
1
1.5
Vertical Operation
Intermediate Stop
When using in vertical operation, prevention of
workpiece dropping due to breaking of the
magnetic coupling should be considered. The
allowable load mass and maximum operating
pressure should be as shown in the table
below.
The cushion effect (smooth start-up, soft stop) exists only before the stroke end in the stroke ranges
indicated in the table below.
Model
CYP15
CYP32
8-17-6
Allowable
load mass
mv (kg)
1
5
Maximum
operating pressure
Pv (MPa)
0.3
2
Moment (N⋅m)
The cushion effect (smooth start-up, soft stop) cannot be obtained in an intermediate stop or return
from an intermediate stop using an external stopper, etc.
When using an intermediate stop considering the above information, implement measures to prevent
particulate generation and set the operating pressure to no more than 0.3 MPa.
Cushion Stroke
Model
Stroke
(mm)
CYP15
CYP32
25
30
Clean Room Rodless Cylinder
Series
CYP
ø15, ø32
How to Order
CYP 15
MX
Z73
200
MTS
MY
Number of auto switches
Nil
S
n
2 pcs.
1 pc.
“n” pcs.
CY
MG
Bore size
15
32
15 mm
32 mm
CX
Auto switch
Without auto switch
Nil
D-
For the applicable auto switch
model, refer to the table below.
Standard stroke
Standard stroke (mm)
100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350
15, 32
400, 450, 500, 600, 700
Note 1) Please consult with SMC if the maximum
stroke is exceeded.
Note 2) Intermediate strokes are available as a
special order.
Bore size (mm)
-X
Piping port location
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Nil
L
R
S
Operating direction: Right
Operating direction: Left
Operating direction: Right
Operating direction: Left
Operating direction: Right
Operating direction: Left
Operating direction: Right
Operating direction: Left
20Data
Piping Port Locaition
Nil
a
b
c
L
d Operating direction
←Left
e
R
f
h
S
g
Right→
Note) Plugs are installed in ports other than those indicated for the model.
Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to page 8-30-1 for further information on auto switches.
Load voltage
Type
Special
function
Electrical
entry
Reed switch
—
Grommet
Indicator Wiring
light
(Output)
Yes
No
3-wire
2-wire
DC
—
24 V
AC
5V
—
—
Z76
—
IC circuit
—
100 V
—
Z73
—
Relay,
PLC
5 V, 12 V 100 V or less
Solid state
switch
2-wire
Diagnostic
indication
(2-color indication)
5 V, 12 V
3-wire (PNP)
Grommet
Yes
3-wire (NPN)
24 V
12 V
—
5 V , 12 V
3-wire (PNP)
2-wire
Applicable load
12 V
3-wire (NPN)
—
Auto switch model Lead wire length (mm)∗
Electrical entry direction 0.5
5
3
(Z)
(Nil)
(L)
Perpendicular In-line
12 V
—
Z80
—
IC circuit
Y69A
Y59A
IC circuit
Y7PV
Y7P
IC circuit
Y69B
Y59B
—
Y7NWV
Y7NW
Y7PWV
Y7PW
Y7BWV
Y7BW
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
—
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ········· Nil (Example) Y69B
3 m ········· L
Y69BL
5 m ········· Z
Y69BZ
∗∗ Auto switches marked with a “” symbol are produced upon receipt of order.
8-17-7
Series
CYP
Specifications
15
Bore size (mm)
32
Fluid
Air/Inert gas
Action
Double acting
Proof pressure
0.5MPa
Operating pressure range
0.05 to 0.3MPa
Ambient and fluid temperature
–10 to 60°C
Piston speed
50 to 300mm/s
Lubrication
Non-lube
Stroke adjustment
±1mm on each side (±2mm total)
Cushion
Sine cushion (Air cushion)
Port size
M5 x 0.8
Rc 1/8
Weight
(kg)
Standard stroke (mm)
Model
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
CYP15
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.7
1.9
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.5
2.8
3.2
CYP32
4.2
4.6
5.0
5.5
5.9
6.3
6.7
7.1
7.5
8.3
9.1
Magnetic Holding Force
Bore size (mm)
Magnetic holding force (N)
15
59
32
268
Theoretical Output
(N)
Bore size Piston area Operating pressure (MPa)
(mm)
(mm)
0.2
0.3
0.1
8-17-8
15
176
18
35
53
32
804
80
161
241
Clean Room Rodless Cylinder
Series
CYP
Construction
CYP15
MX
MTS
MY
CY
MG
CX
D-X
20CYP32
Data
Component Parts
No.
Description
q
Magnet A
w
Piston side yoke
Material
Note
Rare earth magnet
Rolled steel plate
Zinc chromated
Brass/Aluminum alloy ø15: Electroless nickel
plated, ø32: Chromated
No.
Description
Material
@3
Inner cover
@4
Cylinder tube gasket
NBR
@5
O-ring
NBR
@6
O-ring
Aluminum alloy
Note
Clear hard anodized
e
Piston
r
Piston seal
NBR
@7
Steel ball
Carbon steel
t
Wear ring A
Special resin
@8
Bumper
Polyurethane
y
Wear ring
Special resin
@9
Hexagon socket head set screw Chrome molybdenum steel
Nickel plated
u
Shaft
Stainless steel
#0
Hexagon socket head cap screw Chrome molybdenum steel
Nickel plated
i
Cushion ring
#1
Round head Phillips screw
o
Magnet B
#2
Hexagon socket head plug Chrome molybdenum steel
!0
External slider side yoke
!1
!2
Stainless steel/Brass ø15: Electroless nickel plated
Rare earth magnet
NBR
Stainless steel
Rolled steel
Electroless nickel plated
#3
Linear guide
External spacer
Aluminum alloy
Electroless nickel plated
#4
Hexagon socket head cap screw Chrome molybdenum steel
Slide table
Aluminum alloy
Electroless nickel plated
#5
Body
Aluminum alloy
!3
Insertion guide plate
Stainless steel
!4
Round head Phillips screw
!5
Hold spacer
!6
Magnet
!7
Side plate A
Aluminum alloy
!8
Side plate B
Aluminum alloy
!9
Hexagon socket head cap screw Chrome molybdenum steel
@0
Plate A
@1
Plate B
@2
Cushion seal
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Stainless steel
Nickel plated
Clear hard anodized
#6
Cylinder tube
Aluminum alloy
Hard anodized
Carbon steel
Nickel plated
#7
Tube attaching bracket
Aluminum alloy
Clear hard anodized
Aluminum alloy
Electroless nickel plated
#8
Hexagon socket head cap screw Chrome molybdenum steel
#9
Hexagon socket head cap screw Chrome molybdenum steel
Electroless nickel plated
$0
Top cover
Aluminum alloy
Electroless nickel plated
$1
Cushion seal holder
Aluminum alloy
Chromated
Nickel plated
$2
Bumper
Urethane
CYP32 only
Aluminum alloy
Clear hard anodized
$3
O-ring
Aluminum alloy
Clear hard anodized
$4
C type snap ring for shaft
$5
O-ring
Rare earth magnet
NBR
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Clear hard anodized
NBR
Carbon tool steel
NBR
8-17-9
Series
CYP
Dimensions
øE
Depth ED
T Y
4-MM
Thread depth M
L
K
T
PA
F
4-Counterbore dia øB
Counterbore depth C
A
N
PB
QW
4-øLD
G
Plug
Plug
[P (port e)]
Plug
[P (port c)]
A
Operating direction
P (port a)
P (port b)
0.5 Note 2)
Left
Right
[P (port g)]
0.5 Note 2)
Plug
WB
WA
[P (port h)]
HB
HA
HL
HA
HB
HI
HG
HT
HS
H
HP
Auto switch
mounting groove
4-J
Depth JK
TA
Plug
R
TB
WB
Plug
TA
TB
HT
HG
LW
A
HI
Stroke adjustment screw Note 3)
(inner cover)
E depth EK
Q + Stroke
Z + Stroke
[P (port f)]
WA
R
[P (port d)]
W
Inner cover Note 3)
holding screw
(mm)
Model
CYP15
CYP32
Model
CYP15
CYP32
G
F
ED EK
E
B
A
C
+0.030
9.5 4 12.5 6.5
9.5 5.4 4H9 0
8
+0.030
8.5
6 25
13
12 14
8.6 6H9 0
H HA HB HG
45 19.5 8.5 8.5
75 39 19 19
L
67
90
PA
25
50
LD
5.6
8.6
LW
69
115
MM
M4 x 0.7
M6 x 1
M
6
8
N
4.5
7.5
P
M5 x 0.8
Rc 1/8
HI
23
39
PB Q QW R
60 105 48 45
100 138 87 79.5
J
HL HP HS HT
38.6 44 27 19.5 M6 x 1
M10 x 1.5
64.9 73.5 49.5 39
JK
10
12
K
21
20
W WA WB
69 32 17
115 46 27
Y
2.5
3.5
Z
118
155
T
23
29
Note 1) These dimension drawings indicate the case of piping port location “Nil”.
Note 2) These dimensions indicate the protruding portion of the bumper.
Note 3) Refer to “Specific Product Precautions” [Cushion Effect (Sine Cushion) and Stroke Adjustment] on page 8-17-13.
8-17-10
TA
13
17
TB
18
22
Series CYP
With Auto Switch
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position Detection
(Detedtion at stroke end)
A
Operating Range
Auto switch
model
B
D-Z7
D-Z80
SMC
SMC
Cylinder model
D-Y7W
D-Y7WV
D-Y5
D-Y6
D-Y7P
D-Y7PV
CYP15
6.5
2.5
CYP32
9.5
3
Note) Operating ranges are standards including
hysteresis, and are not guaranteed. (variations on
the order of ±30%)
Large variations may occur depending on the
surrounding environment.
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position
D-Z7
D-Z80
D-Y7W
D-Y7WV
Cylinder model
CYP15
24.5
CYP32
33
MTS
MY
CY
MG
A
Auto switch
model
MX
B
D-Y5
D-Y6
D-Y7P
D-Y7PV
D-Z7
D-Z80
D-Y7W
D-Y7WV
CX
D-Y5
D-Y6
D-Y7P
D-Y7PV
D-
93.5
-X
122
20Data
Mounting of Auto Switch
When mounting auto switches, they should be
inserted into the cylinder's switch groove
from the direction shown in the drawing
on the right. After setting in the
mounting position, use a flat head
watchmakers’ screwdriver to
tighten the set screw which is
included.
Auto switch
Set screw (included with auto switch)
Watchmakers’ screwdriver
Note) When tightening the auto switch set screw (included with the auto switch), use a watchmakers’
screwdriver with a handle about 5 to 6 mm in diameter. The tightening torque should be
approximately 0.05 to 0.1 N⋅m.
8-17-11
Series CYP
Specific Product Precautions 1
Be sure to read before handing.
Handling
Operation
1. Open the inner package of the double packaged
clean series inside a clean room or other clean
environment.
2. Perform parts replacement and disassembly work in
a clean room after exhausting compressed air in the
piping outside the clean room.
3. When used for vertical operation, use caution
regarding possible dropping due to separation of
the magnetic coupling.
Mounting
4. Do not operate with the magnetic coupling out of
position.
Caution
Caution
Caution
1. Take care to avoid striking the cylinder tube with
other objects or handling it in a way that could
cause deformation.
The cylinder tube and slider units have a non-contact
construction. For this reason, even a slight deformation or
slippage of position can cause malfunction and loss of
durability, as well as a danger of degrading the particulate
generation characteristics.
2. Do not scratch or gouge the linear guide by striking
it with other objects.
Since the linear guide is specially treated for maximum
suppression of particulate generation due to sliding, even a
slight scratch can cause malfunction and loss of durability, as
well as a danger of degrading the particulate generation
characteristics.
3. Since the slide table is supported by precision
bearings, do not apply strong impacts or excessive
moment when mounting workpieces.
4. Be sure to operate the cylinder with the plates on
both sides secured.
Avoid applications in which the slide table or only one plate is
secured.
5. When changing the ports to be used, be sure that
unused ports are securely sealed.
Take sufficient care in sealing unused ports, because if ports
are not properly sealed air can leak from the ports and
particulate generation characteristics can be degraded.
When used for vertical operation, use caution as there is a
possibility of dropping due to separation of the magnetic
coupling if a load (pressure) greater than the allowable value is
applied.
If the magnetic coupling is out of position, push the external
slider by hand (or the piston slider with air pressure) back to
the proper position at the stroke end.
5. Do not supply lubrication, as this is a non-lube
product.
The interior of the cylinder is lubricated at the factory, and
lubrication with turbine oil, etc., will not satisfy the product's
specifications.
6. Never reapply lubricant.
Never reapply lubricant, as there may be a degradation of
particulate generation or operation characteristics.
Speed Adjustment
Caution
1. A throttle valve for clean room use is recommended
for speed adjustment. (Please consult with SMC
regarding equipment and methods to be used.)
Speed adjustment can also be performed with a meter-in or
meter-out type speed controller for clean room use, but it may
not be possible to obtain smooth starting and stopping
operation.
Throttle Valves and Dual Speed Controllers for
Recommended Speed Adjustment of CYP Cylinders
Throttle valve
Metal body
piping type
CYP15
10-AS1200-M5-X216
10-AS2200-01-X214
In-line type
10-AS1000-M5-X214
10-AS2000-01-X209
Elbow type
(throttle valve)
1. The maximum operating pressure for the clean
rodless cylinder is 0.3 MPa.
If the maximum operating pressure of 0.3 MPa for the clean
rodless cylinder is exceeded, the magnetic coupling can be
broken, causing a danger of malfunction or degradation of
particulate generation characteristics, etc.
2. The product can be used with a direct load applied
within the allowable range, but careful alignment is
necessary when connecting to a load having an
external guide mechanism.
Since alignment variations increase as the stroke gets longer,
use a connection method which can absorb these variations
and consider measures to control particulate generation.
8-17-12
Resin body
with
One-touch
fitting
CYP32
Elbow type
Operation
Caution
Model
Series
Universal type
(throttle valve)
In-line type
(throttle valve)
Dual type
(speed controller)
10-AS1201F-M5-04-X214 10-AS2201F-01-04-X214
10-AS1201F-M5-06-X214 10-AS2201F-01-06-X214
10-AS2201F-01-06-X214
10-AS1301F-M5-04-X214 10-AS2301F-01-04-X214
10-AS1301F-M5-06-X214 10-AS2301F-01-06-X214
10-AS2301F-01-06-X214
10-AS1001F-04-X214
10-AS2001F-04-X214
10-AS1001F-06-X214
10-AS2001F-06-X214
10-ASD230F-M5-04
10-ASD330F-01-06
10-ASD230F-M5-06
10-ASD330F-01-08
2. In the case of vertical mounting, a system with a
reduced pressure supply circuit installed on the
down side is recommended. (This is effective
against upward starting delays and for conservation
of air.)
Series CY1F
Specific Product Precautions 2
Be sure to read before handing.
Cushion Effect (Sine Cushion) and Stroke Adjustment
Caution
Due to the nature of a sine cushion, adjustment of the cushion
effect is not possible. There is no cushion needle adjustment
as in the case of conventional cushion mechanisms.
2. The stroke end adjustment is a mechanism to adapt
the slide table’s stroke end position to a mechanical
stopper on other equipment, etc.
(Adjustment range: Total of both sides ±2 mm) To
ensure safety, perform adjustment after shutting off
the drive air, releasing the residual pressure and
implementing drop prevention measures, etc.
1) Loosen the inner cover holding screw with a hexagon
wrench, etc.
2) To match the position with a mechanical stopper on other
equipment, etc., rotate the stroke adjustment screw (inner
cover) to the left or right with a flat head screwdriver to move
the inner stopper back and forth. Approximately 1 mm of
adjustment is possible with one rotation.
3) The maximum adjustment on one side is ±1 mm. A total
adjustment of approximately ±2 mm is possible using both
sides.
4) After completing the stroke end adjustment, tighten the inner
cover holding screw with a hexagon wrench, etc.
Inner Cover Holding Screw Tightening Torque [N⋅m]
Model
Screw size
Tightening torque
CYP15
M3 x 0.5
0.3
CYP32
M6 x 1
2.45
Plate
Stroke adjustment screw
(inner cover)
Flat head screwdriver
Hexagon
wrench
Inner cover
holding screw
Maintenance
Caution
1. Never disassemble the cylinder tube or linear guide,
etc.
If operation is continued beyond the recommended values,
lubrication failure of the linear guide and loss of particulate
generation characteristics may occur.
MX
MTS
MY
CY
Graph (1)
MG
100
Total operation cycles (10,000)
1. A sine cushion (smooth start, soft stop) function is
included in the standard specifications.
1. In order to maintain the particulate generation
grade, use operation of 500 thousand cycles or
travel distance of about 400 km as a standard.
(Graph (1) below)
CX
50
D-
40
30
-X
20
2010
100
200
300 400 500
Stroke (mm)
700
1000
Graph (2)
Particle concentration (particles/m3)
Caution
+
–
direction direction
Particulate Generation Characteristics
105
104
103
Class M3.5
[Class 100]
Class M2.5
[Class 10]
102
101
100
0.01
Class M1.5
[Class 1]
0.1
1
Particle diameter (µm)
10
Note 1) This chart indicates the level of cleanliness
inside the measurement chamber.
Note 2) The vertical axis shows the number of particles
per unit volume (1 m3) of air which are no
smaller than the particle size shown on the
horizontal axis.
Note 3) The gray lines show the upper concentration
limit of the cleanliness class based on Fed. Std.
209E-1992.
Note 4) The plots indicate the 95% upper reliability limit
value for time series data up to 500 thousand
operation cycles.
(Cylinder: CYP32-200, Workpiece weight: 5 kg,
Average speed: 200 mm/s)
Note 5) The data above provides a guide for selection
but is not guaranteed.
If disassembled, the slide table may touch the outside surface
of the cylinder tube resulting in a degradation of particulate
generation characteristics.
2. Please consult with SMC when replacing seals and
bearings (wear rings).
8-17-13
Data
Rodless Cylinder for Vacuum
Series
CYV
ø15, ø32
MX
MTS
MY
CY
MG
CX
D-X
20Data
Air cylinder for transfer
in vacuum environments (1.3 x 10-4 Pa)
Simplifies and reduces
the size of equipment
Since the cylinder can be installed inside a vacuum
chamber, it contributes to simplifying
and reducing the size of a transfer system.
Vacuum chamber
(Transfer unit)
Series CYV
(Conceptual drawing)
8-18-1
Air cylinder for transfer
Rodless Cylinder for Vacuum
Series CYV
Low particulate generation
Average particle generation (particles > 0.1 µ) is
0.1 particles/cycle. (Atmospheric conditions)
ø15, ø32
Note 1) This data indicates deterioration with age of the average number
of particles per operation under the following test conditions.
Particulate generation [particles/cycle]
5.0
<Test conditions>
• Cylinder: CYV32-100
• Workpiece weight: 5 kg
• Average speed: 100 mm/s
• Measurement environment: Operation in the atmosphere after
baking at 150°C for 48 hours.
Note 2) This data is considered typical but not guaranteed.
0.0
0
100000
200000
1000000
late ge
ticu
2
ation
ner
Low par
Note 3) A particulate generation test has been conducted in a vacuum
environment of 10–5 Pa.
late ge
ticu
1
ation
ner
Low par
Operation cycles
Stainless steel
linear guide &
low particulate generation
vacuum grease
Particulate generation from the linear
guide unit has been reduced with the
use of a stainless steel linear guide and
low particulate generating vacuum
grease.
Non-contact construction
Low par
No contact
late ge
ticu
3
ation
ner
There is no particulate generation due
to friction, since the construction does
not allow contact between the cylinder
tube’s exterior surface and the slide
table’s internal surface.
Reduced initial
particulate
generation
Cleaned, assembled,
inspected and first-stage
packaged in a clean
environment.
Slide table
Cylinder tube
8-18-2
late ge
ticu
Low particulate generation at the stroke ends
Particulate generation
has been reduced at
the stroke ends by
reducing impact using
a sine cushion and by
stopping the stroke
using an internal
stopper.
Impact acceleration [m/s2]
4
ation
ner
A special cylinder tube using extruded
aluminum material is employed.
No deflection or contact occurs even
for long strokes, since the cylinder is
rigidly attached to the base and the
slide table is independently supported
by a linear guide.
Low par
Special cylinder tube
Long stroke
(Max. 700 mm)
5
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
Speed [mm/s]
Relationship between speed and impact acceleration
in vacuum environments (1.3 x 10
–4
Pa)
Carefully designed for low particulate generation, low leakage,
and low outgassing.
Low leakage
10-7 Pa⋅m3/sec or less
Leakage:1.3 x
10 Pa⋅m /sec
(at normal temperatures, excluding gas permeation)
MX
-7
10
Leakage [Pa⋅m3/sec]
Standard value
Note 1) The data indicates the leakage
measured in a vacuum environment
of 10–5 Pa.
10-8
Note 2) The leakage test result shown is
based on a test conducted for 10
minutes after the cylinder was
pressurized with helium at 0.1 MPa.
10-9
Note 3) This data is considered typical but
not guaranteed.
Leakage test result
0
5
10
Lo
Lo
Employs a
magnetically
coupled rodless
cylinder with no
air leakage from
moving parts.
ea
w l ka
2
ge
ge
1
O-ring seals separate vacuum and atmosphere.
Note 2) To allow fine stroke adjustments, O-ring
seals are installed to separate vacuum and
atmosphere. Please consult with SMC if
the sealing method needs to be altered.
Redu
Redu
outga
ced
2
Resin materials
eliminated
Laser marking is employed for
the model designation.
O-ring seal
Fine adjustments
at the end of the stroke
Fine adjustments between –2 to 0 mm
can be made on one side (–4 to 0 mm
for both sides).
All the external parts (made of
aluminum alloy) such as the body
and slide table are electroless
nickel plated.
Furthermore, external magnets are
coated with titanium nitride.
Note 1) Please consult with SMC if other
specifications for surface treatment
are required.
Laser marking
-X
Data
Note 1) The chart above shows the leakage test
results based on a test conducted using
this cylinder construction.
ng
ssi
ng
ssi
1
Reduction of outgassing
due to surface treatment
MG
20-
Static O-ring seals are used for
all the seals between vacuum
and atmosphere.
Reduced outgassing
outga
ced
CY
D-
Time [min]
ea
w l ka
MY
CX
-10
10
MTS
Hexagon wrench
8-18-3
Series CYV
Model Selection 1
Caution on Design (1)
The allowable load mass moment differs depending on the workpiece mounting method, cylinder mounting orientation and piston speed.
To determine whether or not the cylinder can be operated, do not allow the sum (Σαn) of the load factors (αn ) for each mass and moment to exceed "1".
Σαn =
Load mass (m)
Max. load mass (m max)
+
Dynamic moment (Me)
Static moment (M)
+
≤1
Allowable dynamic moment (Me max)
Allowable static moment (M max)
Moment
Load Mass
Allowable moment
Max. load mass (kg)
Model
m max
CYV15
1
CYV32
5
(Static moment/Dynamic moment)
m
M3
M1
m
Static Moment
(N⋅m)
M2
Model
CYV15
CYV32
m
M1 M2 M3
0.3 0.6 0.3
3
4
3
Moment generated by the workpiece weight even when the cylinder is stopped
Pitch moment
M1 = m x g x (L + B) x 10–3
Roll moment
M2 = m x g x (L + B) x 10–3
Yaw moment
M3 = m x g x (L + A) x 10–3
(mm)
L
L
B
Model
CYV15
CYV32
B
L
A
M1, 2, 3 :
m:
L:
A, B:
g:
M2
M1
M3
A
16.5
27.0
B
25.5
48.0
Moment [N⋅m]
Load mass [kg]
Distance to load center of gravity [mm]
Distance to guide shaft [mm]
Gravitational acceleration [9.8 m/s2]
mxg
mxg
Guide shaft
mounting surface
Dynamic Moment
mxg
Central axis of guide
Central axis of cylinder
Moment generated by the load equivalent to impact at the stroke end
We = 5 x 10–3 x m x g x U
We: Load equivalent to impact [N]
m : Load mass [kg]
U: Max. speed [mm/s]
g: Gravitational acceleration [9.8 m/s3]
Pitch moment
Me1 = 1/3 ⋅ We(L + B) ⋅ 10 –3 ∗
Yaw moment
Me3 = 1/3 ⋅ We(L + A) ⋅ 10 –3 ∗
∗ Average load coefficient
∗ Average load coefficient
Me3
Me1
Model
CYV15
CYV32
A
16.5
27.0
(mm)
B
25.5
48.0
We
B
L
L
We
8-18-4
Central axis of cylinder
A
Guide shaft
mounting surface
Central axis of guide
Series CYV
Model Selection 2
Selection Calculation
The selection calculation finds the load factors (αn) of the items below, where the total (Σαn) does not exceed "1".
Σαn = α1 + α2 + α3 ≤ 1
Item
Load factor
αn
1. Max. load mass
α1 = m/m max
2. Static moment
α2 = M/M max
3. Dynamic moment
α3 = Me/Me max
MX
Note
m
Review m.
max is the maximum load mass.
MTS
Review M1, M2, M3.
MY
M max is the allowable moment.
Review Me1, Me3.
CY
Me max is the allowable moment.
MG
Va
Calculation Example
m
CX
Operating Conditions
DL1
20Data
Load factor αn
Item
1. Maximum
load mass
-X
L2
Cylinder:
CYV32
Mounting:
Horizontal wall mounting
Maximum speed: U = 300 [mm/s]
Load mass:
m = 1 [kg] (excluding mass of the arm section)
L1 = 50 [mm]
L2 = 50 [mm]
Note
m
L2
α1 = m/m max
Review m.
= 1/5
= 0.20
L1
2. Static moment
M2 = m ⋅ g ⋅ (L1 + B) ⋅ 10–3
= 1 ⋅ 9.8 ⋅ (50 + 48) ⋅ 10–3
= 0.96 [N⋅m]
α2 = M2/M2 max
= 0.96/4
= 0.24
Review M2.
Since M1 and M3 are not generated,
review is unnecessary.
Review Me3.
Central axis
of guide
We = 5 x 10–3·m · g · U
= 5 x 10–3 ⋅ 1 ⋅ 9.8 ⋅ 300
= 14.7 [N]
Me3 = 1/3 ⋅ We(L2 + A) ⋅ 10–3
= 1/3 ⋅ 14.7 ⋅ (50 + 27) ⋅ 10–3
= 0.38 [N·m]
α3a = Me3/Me3 max
= 0.38/3
= 0.13
Review Me1.
Guide shaft
mounting surface
Me1 = 1/3 ⋅ We⋅(L1 + B) ⋅ 10–3
= 1/3 ⋅ 14.7 ⋅ (50 + 48) ⋅ 10–3
= 0.48 [N·m]
α3b = Me1/Me1 max
= 0.48/3
= 0.16
mxg
M
Guide shaft mounting surface
B
L1
3. Dynamic moment
W
A
We
L2
Me3
Me1
L1
W
B
We
Σαn = α1 + α2 + (α3a + α3b)
= 0.20 + 0.24 + (0.13 + 0.16)
= 0.73
The result Σαn = 0.73 ≤ 1 allows operation.
8-18-5
Series CYV
Model Selection 3
Caution on Design (2)
Table Deflection Note)
Table deflection due to
pitch moment load
Table deflection due to
roll moment load
A
Table deflection due to
yaw moment load
F
F
L
Central axis of guide
L
F
A
L
Central axis of guide
A
M2 = F x L
M1 = F x L
M3 = F x L
Note) Deflection: Displacement of point A when
force acts on point F
Point A: Indicates a measurement point
CYV15 (M1)
CYV15 (M2)
0.03
0.02
0.05
Deflection (mm)
0.04
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
0.01
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0
0.1
0.3
0.02
0
0.1
0.03
0.02
0.01
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
1.5
2
0
0.3
CYV32 (M3)
Deflection (mm)
0.04
0.2
Moment (N·m)
0.05
Deflection (mm)
Deflection (mm)
0.2
CYV32 (M2)
0.05
1
0.03
Moment (N·m)
CYV32 (M1)
0.5
0.04
0.01
Moment (N·m)
0
CYV15 (M3)
0.05
Deflection (mm)
Deflection (mm)
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
0.5
1
1.5
Moment (N·m)
Moment (N·m)
2
0
0.5
1
1.5
Vertical Operation
Intermediate Stop
When using in vertical operation, prevention of
workpiece dropping due to breaking of the
magnetic coupling should be considered. The
allowable load mass and maximum operating
pressure should be as shown in the table
below.
The cushion effect (smooth start-up, soft stop) is applied only before the stroke end in the stroke
ranges indicated in the table below.
Model
CYV15
CYV32
8-18-6
Maximum
Allowable load mass operating pressure
mv (kg)
Pv (MPa)
1
5
0.3
2
Moment (N·m)
The cushion effect (smooth start-up, soft stop) is not available an intermediate stop or return from an
intermediate stop using an external stopper, etc.
When using an intermediate stop with the above information taken into account, implement measures
to prevent particulate generation and set the operating pressure to no more than 0.3 MPa.
Cushion Stroke
Model
Stroke
(mm)
CYV15
CYV32
25
30
Rodless Cylinder for Vacuum
Series
CYV
ø15, ø32
How to Order
CYV 15
MX
200
MTS
MY
Bore size
15
32
CY
Standard stroke
15 mm
32 mm
Bore size (mm)
Standard stroke (mm)
15, 32
100, 150, 200, 250
300, 350, 400, 450
500, 600, 700
MG
CX
D-
Specifications
-X
15
Bore size (mm)
32
Atmosphere to 1.3 x 10-4 Pa (ABS)
20-
Operating atmosphere
Air/Inert gas
Fluid
Air/Inert gas
Data
Operating environment pressure
Double acting
Action
0.5 MPa
Proof pressure
0.05 to 0.3 MPa
Operating pressure range
1.3 x 10-7 Pa⋅m3/sec or less
(at normal temperatures, excluding gas permeation)
Leakage
Maximum baking temperature
150°C
Ambient and fluid temperature
–10 to 60°C
Piston speed
50 to 300 mm/s
Stroke adjustment
–2 to 0 mm on each side (– 4 to 0 mm total)
Cushion
Sine cushion (Air cushion)
Port size
5/16-24 UNF
7/16-20 UNF
Vacuum grease for linear guide unit
and inside the cylinder tube
Lubrication
Weight
(kg)
Standard stroke (mm)
Model
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
CYV15
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.7
1.9
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.5
2.8
3.2
CYV32
4.2
4.6
5.0
5.5
5.9
6.3
6.7
7.1
7.5
8.3
9.1
Magnetic Holding Force
Theoretical Output
(N)
Bore size (mm)
Magnetic holding
force (N)
15
59
32
268
Operating pressure
Bore size Piston area
(MPa)
(mm)
(mm2)
0.1
0.2
0.3
15
176
18
35
53
32
804
80
161
241
8-18-7
Series
CYV
Construction
CYV15
E
Section E-E'
E'
CYV32
Component Parts
No.
Description
q
Magnet A
w
Piston side yoke
e
Piston
@2
Inner cover
Rolled steel plate
Brass/
Aluminum alloy
Zinc chromated
@3
Cylinder tube gasket
Fluoro rubber
Electroless nickel
plated/Chromated
@4
O-ring
Fluoro rubber
@5
O-ring
Fluoro rubber
@6
Hexagon socket head
set screw
Hexagon socket head
cap screw
Fluoro rubber
t
Wear ring
Special bearing
y
Shaft
Stainless steel
u
Cushion ring
i
Magnet B
!0
Note
Electroless nickel plated
No.
Piston seal
External slider side yoke
Material
Aluminum alloy
Note
Aluminum chromated
r
o
Description
Material
Rare earth magnet
@7
Stainless steel/Brass —/Electroless nickel plated
Rare earth magnet
Titanium nitride coating
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
@8
Flat washer
Stainless steel
@9
Round head Phillips screw
Hexagon socket head
cap screw
Stainless steel
Rolled steel
Electroless nickel plated
Hold spacer
Aluminum alloy
Electroless nickel plated
#0
!1
Slide table
Aluminum alloy
Electroless nickel plated
#1
Base
Aluminum alloy
Electroless nickel plated
!2
Insertion guide plate
Stainless steel
#2
Cylinder tube
Aluminum alloy
Electroless nickel plated
!3
Round head Phillips screw
Stainless steel
#3
Aluminum alloy
Electroless nickel plated
!4
Side plate A
Aluminum alloy
Electroless nickel plated
!5
Aluminum alloy
Electroless nickel plated
!6
Side plate B
Hexagon socket head
cap screw
Tube attaching bracket
Hexagon socket head
cap screw
Stainless steel
!7
Spring washer
Stainless steel
#6
Flat washer
Hexagon socket head
cap screw
Stainless steel
#7
Flat washer
Stainless steel
Top cover
Aluminum alloy
Electroless nickel plated
Aluminum alloy
Chromated
!8
Flat washer
#4
#5
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Plate A
Aluminum alloy
Electroless nickel plated
#8
@0
Plate B
Aluminum alloy
Electroless nickel plated
#9
Cushion seal holder
@1
Cushion seal
$0
O-ring
$1
O-ring
Fluoro rubber
$2
Linear guide
Stainless steel
!9
Fluoro rubber
Fluoro rubber
Note) In the material and note columns of the Component Parts list above, the first description is for CYV15 and the second description is for CYV32.
8-18-8
Rodless Cylinder for Vacuum
Series
CYV
Dimensions
4-Counterbore
dia. øB
øE
T
Y
L
K
Depth ED
PA
4-MM
Thread depth M
F
T
4-øLD
Counter bore
depth C
MX
PB
QW
MTS
MY
A
N
CY
E depth EK
Q + Stroke
Z + Stroke
Stroke adjustment screw
CX
(inner cover)
LW
A
MG
G
D-
A
20-
HA
HL
HA
HI
H
HP
-X
Data
R
2-Counterbore dia. øTB
W
4-J
Depth JK
2-P
TA
Thread depth PC
(from counterbore surface)
Counterbore depth TC
TA
Inner cover holding screw Note)
(mm)
Model
CYV15
CYV32
Model
CYV15
CYV32
A
8
12
LW
69
115
B
10.5
16
C
6.4
10.2
MM
M4 x 0.7
M6 x 1
E
4H9 +0.030
0
6H9 +0.030
0
M
6
8
N
4.5
7.5
ED
9.5
13
EK
4
6
F
12.5
25
G
10
9
H
45
75
HA
23
39
HI
23
39
HL
37.6
63.3
HP
44
73.5
P
PA
5/16-24 UNF 25
7/16-20 UNF 50
PB
60
100
PC
10
12
Q
112
147
QW
48
83
R
45
79.5
T
30
34
J
M6 x 1
M10 x 1.5
TA
20
22.5
TB
15
22
JK
10
12
K
21
20
L
67
90
LD
5.6
9.2
TC
0.5
0.5
W
69
115
Y
2.5
3.5
Z
132
165
Note) Refer to “Cushion Effect (Sine Cushion) and Stroke Adjustment” under Specific Product Precautions on page 8-18-11.
8-18-9
Series CYV
Specific Product Precautions 1
Be sure to read before handing.
Handling
Operation
Caution
Caution
1. Open the inner package of the double packaged
clean series product inside a clean room or other
clean environment.
2. Do not install a cylinder with bare hands. Outgassing
characteristics can be degraded.
3. Perform parts replacement and disassembly work
inside the chamber after exhausting compressed air
in the piping to the outside of the clean room.
Mounting
Caution
2. When used for vertical operation, take precautions
against possible dropping due to separation of the
magnetic coupling.
When used for vertical operation, use caution as there is a possibility of dropping due to separation of the magnetic coupling if
a load (pressure) greater than the allowable value is applied.
3. Do not operate with the magnetic coupling out of
position.
If the magnetic coupling is out of position, push the external
slider (or the piston slider by using air pressure) back to the
proper position at the stroke end. (When pushing the external
slider, do not push it with bare hands.)
4. Do not apply lubricant, as this is a non-lube product.
1. Take care to avoid striking the cylinder tube with
other objects or handling it in a way that could cause
deformation.
The cylinder tube and slider units have a non-contact
construction. For this reason, even a slight deformation or
slippage of position can cause malfunction and loss of durability,
as well as a danger of degrading particulate generation
characteristics.
2. Do not scratch or gouge the linear guide by striking it
with other objects.
3. Since the slide table is supported by precision
bearings, do not apply strong impacts or excessive
moment when mounting workpieces.
4. The cylinder can be operated by directly applying a
load within the allowable range. However, careful
alignment is necessary when connecting to a load
with an external guide mechanism.
Since displacement of the alignment increases as the stroke
becomes longer, consider a connection method that can absorb
the displacement and does not cause interference at any point
within the stroke. Also, operate with due consideration of
measures against particulate generation.
The interior of the cylinder is lubricated at the factory, and lubrication with turbine oil, etc., will not satisfy the product's specifications.
5. Never reapply lubricant.
Never reapply lubricant, as this may cause a degradation of
particulate generation or operation characteristics.
6. Use the cylinder in inert gas environments.
Corrosive gases may cause corrosion of a cylinder and loss of
durability.
7. Be sure to use the cylinder in pressure environments from atmosphere to 1.3 x 10-4 Pa (ABS).
If used in pressure environments below these conditions,
grease applied to the guide unit will evaporate excessively and
may cause environmental contamination and loss of durability.
8. Be sure to set the baking temperature to 150°C or
less.
If a higher temperature is used, the grease will evaporate excessively and may cause environmental contamination and loss
of durability.
9. Positioning of a cylinder should be performed using
an optical sensor from outside the chamber.
A positioning sensor cannot be mounted on the cylinder.
5. Be sure to operate the cylinder with the plates on
both sides secured.
Avoid applications in which the slide table or only one plate is
secured.
6. Do not use until you verify that the equipment can be
operated properly.
After mounting or repair, connect the air supply and electric
power, and then confirm proper mounting by performing
appropriate function and leakage tests.
7. Instruction manual
Mount and operate the product after thoroughly reading the
manual and understanding its contents. Also, store it where it
can be referred at any time.
Fitting
Caution
1. A fitting with an O-ring is used for a high vacuum
rodless cylinder.
Use a fitting that conforms to the dimensions below, and install
it so that there is no air leakage.
P (Port size)
Operation
Caution
1. The maximum operating pressure for the vacuum
rodless cylinder is 0.3 MPa.
If the maximum operating pressure of 0.3 MPa for the vacuum
rodless cylinder is exceeded, the magnetic coupling can be
broken, causing a danger of malfunction or degradation of
particulate generation characteristics, etc.
8-18-10
Model
P (Port size)
CYV15
CYV32
5/16-24 UNF
7/16-20 UNF
2. Air blow and clean fittings and piping materials
completely with clean air to remove oil and impurities, etc., before piping.
Series CYV
Specific Product Precautions 2
Be sure to read before handing.
Speed Adjustment
Maintenance
Caution
Caution
1. A speed controller for clean room use is
recommended for speed adjustment.
2. Install the speed controller outside the chamber.
3. In case of vertical mounting, a system with a
regulated supply circuit installed on the down side is
recommended. (This is effective against delays at the
start of upward movement and for conservation of
air.)
Cushion Effect (Sine Cushion) and Stroke Adjustment
Caution
1. A sine cushion (smooth start-up, soft stop) function
is included in the standard specifications.
1. Never disassemble the cylinder tube or linear guide,
etc.
If disassembled, the slide table may touch the outside surface
of the cylinder tube resulting in a degradation of particulate
generation characteristics.
MY
Particulate Generation Characteristics
CX
2. The stroke adjustment is a mechanism to adapt the
slide table's stroke end position to a mechanical
stopper on other equipment, etc.
(Adjustment range: Total of both sides –4 to 0 mm)
To ensure safety, perform adjustment after shutting
off the drive air, releasing the residual pressure and
implementing drop prevention measures, etc.
If operation is continued beyond the recommended values,
lubrication failure of the linear guide and a degradation of
particulate generation characteristics may occur.
Table (1)
Total operation cycles (10,000)
100
50
40
30
20
10
100
200
300 400 500
Stroke (mm)
700
1000
Inner Cover Holding Screw Tightening Torques [N·m]
Tightening torque
Screw size
CYV15
M3 x 0.5
0.3
CYV32
M6 x 1
2.45
Plate
Stroke adjustment screw
(inner cover)
Hexagon
wrench
Inner cover
holding screw
– direction
CY
MG
D-
Caution
1. In order to maintain the particulate generation grade,
use operation of 1 million cycles or travel distance
of about 200 km as a guide. (Table (1) below)
Model
MTS
2. Please consult with SMC when replacing seals and
bearings (wear rings).
3. For repair of a cylinder inadvertently exposed to a
corrosive gas, please consult with SMC after
clarifying the name of the corrosive gas.
Due to the nature of a sine cushion, adjustment of the cushion
effect is not possible. There is no cushion needle adjustment as
in the case of conventional cushion mechanisms.
1) Loosen the inner cover holding screw with a hexagon wrench,
etc.
2) To match the position with a mechanical stopper on other
equipment, etc., rotate the stroke adjustment screw (inner
cover) to the left or right with a hexagon wrench to move the
inner cover back and forth.
3) The maximum adjustment on one side is –2 to 0 mm. A total
adjustment of approximately –4 to 0 mm is possible using
both sides.
4) After completing the stroke adjustment, tighten the inner
cover holding screw with a hexagon wrench, etc.
MX
+ direction
8-18-11
-X
20Data